Home

TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator

1. 54 SCSI failure in LME interface 1 Check your Encryption configuration 2 Run Key Path Diagnostics 3 Refer to your EKM server documentation 55 SCSI invalid license key entered 58 Recovered Error SCSI parity error No user action is required 59 Recovered Error Error log overflow 5A Illegal request downgrade prohibited Disable encryption for firmware downgrade 5B Incompatible medium generation Replace incorrect cartridge s 5C Illegal request downgrade prohibited Change network settings to IPv4 only before downgrading because of incompatible network stack firmware 5D Illegal request wrong drive FW for drive Obtain correct drive firmware image 60 Cleaning cartridge installed Complete the cleaning process and retry the operation 61 Sete uae Cleaning process could 4 Verify that autoclean is enabled norbe pemorme 2 Check for an expired cleaning cartridge and replace if necessary 3 Refer to Configuring I O Stations and Reserving Slots 62 Cleaning cartridge expired Replace cleaning cartridge 63 Invalid cartridge Drive has rejected the data cartridge as invalid 1 Verify that the correct cartridge is being used Refer to Cartridge Compatibility on page 6 2 64 Invalid cleaning cartridge Drive has 2 Refert vane rejected the cleaning cartridge as invalid Sees 65 Invalid upgrade cartridge Drive has rejected the upgrade cartridge as invalid Not supporte
2. a82ru008 Figure A 15 Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge 3 From the bottom of the drive locate the access hole f in Figure A 15 4 Insert a 2 5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise 5 Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Ensure that you do not stretch the tape 6 Locate the threader motor worm gear J in Figure A 16 on page A 17 on the rear of the drive Use your finger to rotate the treader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear J in Figure A 16 on page A 17 clockwise This rotates the threader motor worm gear J in Figure A 16 on page A 17 clockwise drawing the LBA into the cartridge A 16 1TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a82ru009 Figure A 16 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train Heo N N Loader motor worm gear 6 Threader mechanism gear Cartridge loader tray guide iever bearing Rotator stub 8 Loader mechanism gear Threader motor worm gear Threader intermediate gear As the tape leader block assembly LBA is secured in the cartridge you should hear the LBA retention spring clips click into place
3. Inventory Magazines Drive n Drive status Upper Left Upper Right Lower Left Lower Right Graphic of left Graphic of right 3 magazine magazine amp Figure 5 6 Example of a 4U Monitor Inventory menu Chapter 5 Operations 5 15 Under Magazine choose one of the following to see a graphical representation of the cartridge magazine s Slots containing cartridges will be highlighted Magazines gt Lower Left a77ug166 Idle Rand Figure 5 7 Overview of inventoried cartridges Lower Left Magazine of a 4U Library The black boxes are inventoried cartridges Press the up and down keys to scroll Note that this magazine has a 3 slot I O Station These slots can be changed to storage slots if needed See Configuring I O Stations and Reserving Slots on page 5 60 Press SELECT to display all empty slots and cartridge serial numbers in the associated magazine Magazinds gt Lower Left dale DT0632L4 LTO4 EC 3 3FB114L4 LTO4 ED 4 Empty 5 Empty Idle Rand a77ug236 l Figure 5 8 Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine l Table 5 3 Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine Magazine slot number Media type generation of cartridge A Cartridge volume serial number H Encryption abbreviation for LTO4 cartridges or Empty meaning no e EC encryption capable Th
4. m S fu LI Vz Y A t Che wi G S t T S t a77ug203 Figure 10 20 Drive sled taping diagrams Note The gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed j Push the black tab back underneath the drive sled When inserted properly only the handle of the tab will be visible 2 Power ON the replacement library enclosure a If power ON is successful 1 After power up the Ready Activity LED J in Figure 10 22 on page 10 23 will turn ON a If the following message is displayed after the library powers ON follow the instructions in Step 1 If the message is NOT displayed skip Step 1 and proceed to Step 2 New library detected 1 Perform Library Verify 2 Power Off and insert LCC from old library ok b The system will initialize completely c After confirming the pop up you should be able to use the interfaces d Run the Library Verify test Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify This diagnostic requires a blank or scratch data cartridge 2 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 3 You must power down remove the CRU LCC and replace it with the original LCC to have VPD transferred from the original LCC to the new chassis 4 Proceed to Swapping Library Controller C
5. Chapter 5 Operations 5 33 Drive Identity 1 LUN Vendor ID IBM Product ID ULTRIUM HH4 Serial Number 1K10000195 Firmware Revision 7A31 World Wide ID Port 5000 111068B0002 A World Wide ID Port 5000E1 1106880003 B Element Address 256 Control Path Drive Yes Data Compression Yes Interface Type ISAS Drive Identity 2 LUN Vendor ID IBM Product ID ULTRIUM HH3 Serial Number 1H00000683 Firmware Revision 73P9 SCSI ID 6 SCSI Element 256 Address Control Path Drive Yes Data Compression Yes Interface Type SCSI Drive Identity 3 LUN Vendor ID IBM Product ID ULT3580 TD4 Serial Number 1300000682 Firmware Revision 7781 Element Address 256 Control Path Drive Yes Data Compression Yes Interface Type Fibre Channel Node Name 2007000E111068B0 PortA Enabled Port Name 2008000E111068B0 Topology LN Port FC AL Loop ID 06 Speed Automatic Port B Disabled a77ug091 Figure 5 26 The 4U library Monitor Library Drive Identity page showing one SAS 1 one SCSI drive 2 and one Fibre Channel drive 3 Monitor Library Library Status This page displays the dynamic information about the library such as the current status of the components No changes can be made from this page Table 5 8 lists all available elements on the Library Identity page An X indicates that the element displays for the specified library type Table 5 8 Library Status page elements Menu Item D
6. Status on page 35 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Information Activity Menu Navigation Shortcuts Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info Cartridge in drive n serial number Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Drive n Source Monitor Library gt Drive Status Monitor Library Drive tatus on Configuration save and restore Configure gt Restore Defaults Configure Library gt Restore Defaults Note From this location you can not only restore factory defaults but save and restore your library configuration from the RMU or OCP Control path enable Configure gt Drive gt Control Paths Configure Library gt Drive Date and time current setting Monitor gt Library gt Identity gt Date Time Monitor Library gt Library Identity Date and time set Configure gt Set Date and Time Configure Library gt Date amp Time Dedicated Cleaning slot removing reinstating Configure gt Library Settings Configure Library on Not available with this interface DHCP current status Monitor gt Library gt Network gt DHCP Configure Library gt Network Configure DHCP modify Configure gt Network gt DHCP Configure Library gt Network pag
7. EP 2 NZ 2 pal NZ Oe oe m S fu LI Vz Y A t Che wi amp t _ Co S t a77ug203 Figure 10 9 Diagrams for applying conductive tape for ESD protection to the back of a drive sled installed in a 2U or 4U library Note The small gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed to provide ESD protection 7 Push the black tab EJ in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 back underneath the library When inserted properly only the handle of the tab will be visible 8 Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version Refer to Configure Library Drives on page 5 46 to configure the drive if it is a SCSI or FC drive Connect the drive host interface cable to the host or FC switch Note Go to http www ibm com storage support to download the latest firmware for your library and tape drive s 9 Run the Library Verify test Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify This test requires the use of a scratch blank cartridge e If the test passes When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I O Station opens remove the cartridge used in the t
8. e Using the Operator Control Panel refer to Control Magazine on page 5 17 e If your library can not be powered ON refer to Releasing the Magazines Manually on page 9 1 Replacing Magazine Fiducials Magazine fiducials are location sensors utilized by the library accessor Extra magazine fiducials are included in your original library shipment a66mi098 Figure 10 14 Magazine fiducial 10 14 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 2 Remove the damaged fiducial by pushing on the fiducial tab EJ and pulling the fiducial Ff out of the slot in the magazine H 3 Slide the replacement fiducial J into the correct magazine slot H being sure that the fiducial tab f on each side of the fiducial is underneath the magazine slot at J and above the magazine slot at J Ensure that the fiducial is not installed in the magazine slot as indicated by W 4 Slide the cartridge magazine into the library and resume normal library operation Replacing the Library Enclosure This procedure is necessary when the library accessor or display fails These components are contained within the replacement library enclosure The replacement library enclosure includes cartridge magazines a power supply a Library Controller Card and a packet of library foot pads These items are included with the replacement library enclosure due
9. 10 17 10 18 10 19 10 20 10 21 10 22 10 23 Leader pin in the incorrect and correct positions 6 12 Placing the dislodged leader pin into the correct position 6 12 Rewinding the tape into the cartridge 6 13 Leader Pin Reattachment Kit 6 14 Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the cartridge 6 15 Winding the tape out at the cartridge 6 16 Removing the C clip from the leader pin 6 16 Attaching the leader pin to the tape 6 17 A 250w power supply with LEDs 7 9 A 80w power supply without LEDs 7 9 Access holes for the left magazine 9 2 Access holes for the right magazine 9 3 Left Magazine pulled out of the 2U Library 9 4 Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library 9 4 ESD label 10 1 Shipping Lock and Label Storage eestor 10 2 Shipping Lock and Label 10 2 Library drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge ESD springs SCSI sled shown 10 3 Library drive sled with ESD springs 1 SAS sled shown 10 4 Drive sled components full high fibre drive in top position half high SCSI drive in middle position half high SAS drive in bottom position on back panel of a 4U library 10 5 Pulling the dive sled d t ae the library drive sled without ESD springs shown 10 6 Pushing the drive sled into the library drive sled without ESD springs shown 10 7 Diagrams for applying conductive tape for ESD protection to the back of a drive sled installed in a 2U or 4U library 10 8
10. 2 A storage slot must be reserved Res or RSVD e Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any particular logical library A reserved slot or slots is always the last slot in the last magazine of any particular logical library A cleaning cartridge that is in a reserved slot is available to any logical library drive even if the reserved slot is not in that particular logical library If the library contains multiple logical libraries typically the last logical library is chosen to be the reserved slot containing the cleaning cartridge As with a library with a single logical library this slot is the last physical slot in the library top right magazine uppermost rear slot 3 A cleaning cartridge CLNxxxLx must be placed or moved to a reserved slot e A cleaning cartridge must be replaced after 50 uses Click on the Web User Interface Monitor Library gt Inventory e Find the magazine that contains the cleaning cartridge e Click on the located under that magazine presentation to expand the detail of resident cartridges Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 39 e Observe the cleaning cartridge location displayed The number of Media Loads represent how many times the cleaning cartridge has been used The number 50 minus that Media Load number represents the number of uses left 4 To install a cleaning cartridge in the 2U or 4U library a Use the Operator Control Panel Control g
11. 5 Remove all clear plastic protective sheets from the library 4 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a77ug194 Figure 4 1 Removing the plastic protective sheets from the library Verifying the Shipment Verify that the following items are included in your library shipment With every library Power cord Foot pads for desktop installation Documentation CD Setup Operator and Service Guide Translated Safety Notices Statement of Limited Warranty in 29 languages IBM License Agreement for Machine Code Installation Quick Reference Warranty information in 9 languages Quality Hotline card With every library containing a SCSI drive SCSI terminator one per SCSI drive SCSI library to host cable if ordered by customer SCSI Wrap tool one for each library With every library containing a Fibre Channel drive Fibre wrap tool one per library Fibre Channel library to host switch cable if ordered by customer With every library containing a SAS drive SAS library to host cable if ordered by customer SAS Wrap tool one for each library Optional item that is included in your shipment if ordered Rack Mount Kit Important If any of the contents of your shipment are damaged or missing please call the appropriate number listed on the Quality Hotline card Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 3 Installing the
12. 5 37 Drive Inventory 1 Empty Magazine Inventory 8 9 10 11 4 5 6 7 I0 Station 1 2 3 23 22 21 20 ad 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 a Refresh 3 Figure 5 29 The 2U library Monitor Library Inventory page Note On some 2U Libraries prior to Library Microcode Level 1 90 slot 11 may be labelled a Not Used slot which contained a Slot Blocker With Library Microcode level 1 9 or higher there is an option to remove the Slot Blocker and place that slot into use See Removing the Slot Blocker 2U Library on page 10 10 5 38 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 1u 11 1z 13 Cartridge details for 2 Left Magazine 1 Right Magazine Slot inventory 1 Right Magazine Cartridge details for 1 Right Magazine 2 Right Magazine Slot inventory 2 Right Magazine E Cartridge details for 2 Right Magazine Slot II O Station 1 I O Station 2 I O Station 3 la 2 l3 l4 is 6 z is ig Attn Closed Closed Closed Status Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Full Gen 4 Full Gen 4 Full Gen 4 Empty Empty Manage Library Menu In Drive SIR115L4 ISFRO16L4 ZIR101L4 Figure 5 30 The 4U library Monitor Library Inventory page M
13. Installation Problems on page 7 6 POWER Library does not power ON 1 Perform Isolating a Power Supply Problem on page 7 8 The Operator Control Panel is blank or frozen 1 Power cycle the library 2 If possible log on to the Web User Interface and check the error log Service Library gt View Logs Look up the error code and try to resolve see Chapter 8 Error Codes on page 8 1 3 Upgrade reinstall the latest library firmware To download the latest library firmware visit http www ibm com support e If the problem is corrected run Library Verify before resuming normal library operations Refer to Service Library Verify on page 5 28 e If the problem persists refer to Contacting IBM Technical Support on page Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 7 1 Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table continued Problem Solution ENCRYPTION Encryption Error Displayed when the drive detects an error associated with an encryption operation if the problem occurred while the tape drive was writing data to or reading data from tape 1 Check the host application to ensure the Encryption Key Manager EKM application is providing the correct encryption key Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and Users Guide and the Drive Sense Data on page D 6 returned for an encryption operation e Retry the encryption operation after the EKM appl
14. Leader Block Assembly LBA Configuration of a one partition system Configuration of a two partition system Configuration of a three partition system Configuration of a four partition system Examples of SCSI element addressing AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example Figures A 11 A 12 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 18 A 19 A 20 A 21 A 22 A 23 A 24 A 24 B 3 B 4 B 4 B 4 E 3 E 4 xi xii 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Tables 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 6 3 1 5 7 5 10 5 11 5 12 Minimum Firmware Levels for common Library features NEBS Compliance Statements goy 2U library and 4U library front panel descriptions 2U library and 4U brary 1 rear panel descriptions Tape drive model and host interfac type Library storage capacity and data transfer rate Physical Specifications Power Specifications Operation Specifications Ultrium 4 Operation Specifications Ultrium 3 Environmental Specifications Host Drive Interface Support Maximum bus length between terminators Recommended maximum quantity of drives per SCSI bus Location criteria Menu navigation shortcuts Library Control Keys Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine Factory Default Settings Web User Interface Menus Library Identity page elements Drive Identity pa
15. The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing Special handling is needed for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification Also temporarily removed drives need to have their addresses preserved to not confuse the attached host and host application Generally only drives which are currently physically available or temporarily removed are reported Empty unused slots located at the bottom or the top should not be reported with an exception in case of a removed condition A drive slot which does not contain a drive and has a position between used slots needs to be reported as a SCSI element To signal the host application that this slot is not usable its ACCESS bit will be disabled Note When reducing the number of drives in your library update the Logical Library configuration This will remove the Attention LED on the front panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen indicating that a drive is missing Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element addressing and drive numbering Replacing LTO half high drives with full high drives may require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the drive element addressing and drive numbering See Configure Library Restore Defaults on page 5 52 Persistent Binding to Ensure SCSI ID Assignment When a server is booted devices are discovered and assigned SCSI target and LUN IDs It is possible for th
16. e Information in the servo manufacturer s word SMW on the tape must match information from the cartridge memory CM module in the cartridge If it does not match a media Error Code 7 will post on the drive s single character display SCD An error will also be displayed on the Operator Control Panel e Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not WORM capable causes the cartridge to be treated as an unsupported medium The drive will report a media Error Code 7 Upgrading the drive firmware to the correct code level will resolve the problem Requirements for WORM Capability To add WORM capability to your LTO Ultrium generation 4 drive s you need to have the drive firmware to the correct code level and use either Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM tape cartridges or Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM tape cartridges see Media Supplies on page 6 18 Cleaning Cartridge With each library a specially labeled IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge is supplied to clean the drive head The drive itself determines when a head needs to be cleaned It alerts you by lighting the Clean Drive amber LED above the library Operator Control Panel To clean the head manually insert a cleaning cartridge into the tape load compartment gee Inserting the Cleaning Cart dge ion pace 22 The drive performs the cleaning automatically When the cleaning is finished the drive ejects the cartridge and the library turns the Clean Drive LED off Some lib
17. Important A discharge of static electricity can damage static sensitive devices or Figure 10 1 ESD label microcircuitry Proper packaging and grounding techniques are necessary precautions to prevent damage LEA To prevent electrostatic damage observe the following precautions Transport products in static safe containers such as conductive tubes bags or boxes Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static free stations Cover the unit with approved static dissipating material If available provide a ground strap connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment If a ground strap is not available touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity in your body Keep the work area free of no conducting materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and foam packing Make sure you are always properly grounded when touching a static sensitive component or assembly Avoid touching pins leads or circuitry Use conductive field service tools Relocating Your Library When moving or shipping your library it is important that the shipping lock be in place to prevent the accessor from moving and to protect the library from possible damage Before relocating your library complete the following procedure if af ON Remove all cartridges from inside the library Power OFF the library This will align the robot with the shipping lock slot Remove any c
18. LVD IBM LVD tape devices support a bus length of 25 meters 82 ft point to point and 12 meters 39 ft using multi drop interconnection daisy chaining For each daisy chained device the maximum cable length must be reduced by 0 5 meters 1 6 ft Important A faster bus does not imply that an attached device will support that data rate but that multiple devices can operate on the bus at that maximum speed For a detailed table of SCSI terms and related specifications refer to the SCSI Trade Association Web site at performance if possible avoid daisy chaining SAS Interface A drive sled with a SAS Serial Attached SCSI interface can be linked directly to controllers SAS is a performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS enables multiple devices up to 128 of different sizes and types to be connected simultaneously with thinner and longer cables its full duplex signal transmission supports 3 0 Gb s Up to four Ultrium 3 or Ultrium 4 single port half high drives or two Ultrium 4 dual port drives can be attached At the library end each of four drive sleds or ports can be attached via a SFF 8088 cable to the interposer cable In addition SAS drives can be hot plugged Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 9 SAS drives will auto negotiate speed There are no configurable topologies thus no feature switches associated with SAS The SAS Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Half high drive sleds are single ported and can only be att
19. N oO Figure 4 15 Securing the 4U library to the rack Connecting the Host Interface Cable To connect the host interface cables to the library 1 It is recommended that you shut down and turn OFF the associated server Turn OFF all attached devices Remove the power cables from the server and all attached accessories Important Failure to remove the power cords from these devices before connecting the host interface cable could result in damage to the library 4 12 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 2 For a SCSI library attach one end of the host interface cable to one of the connectors on the back panel of the library MJ For a Fibre Channel library attach one end of the host interface cable to the connector on the back panel of the library E For a Serial Attached SCSI SAS connected library attach the host end of the SAS cable to the SAS or Mini SAS SFF 8088 HBA H Full high drives will have dual SAS or Mini SAS connectors Half high drives will have one SAS connector Unused SAS connectors do not need to be terminated os are aaa ening So a77ug101 Figure 4 16 Attaching SCSI 1 Fibre Channel 4 and SAS 2 cables to the 4U library 3 Attach the other end of the host interface cable as follows e For a SCSI library connect the host interface cable to the connector on the SCSI host bus adapter or to the connector on the previous device on the
20. 8047 Ultrium 3 Half High SAS Tape Drive Sled 8106 Right Side Magazine 8107 Left upper 4U Magazine 8108 Left lower 4U Magazine 8109 Left side 4U Magazine 8143 Ultrium 4 SCSI Tape Drive Sled 8144 Ultrium 4 Fibre Tape Drive Sled 8145 Ultrium 4 SAS Tape Drive Sled 8147 Ultrium 4 Half High SAS Tape Drive Sled 8305 Data Cart GEN3 5 Pack Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 11 1 Table 11 1 Optional Features continued Feature Code Description 8405 Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges 5 pack 9848 Rack Power Distribution Unit PDU Line Cord 9900 Encryption Configuration Replacement Parts Note This library has Tier 1 and Tier 2 CRUs customer replaceable units Tier 1 No tools needed Tier 2 Tools needed These CRUs are parts of the library that should be added removed and replaced by the customer If a customer chooses to have the CRU added or removed replaced by an IBM Service Representative there will be a charge for the service Table 11 2 Replacement Parts Part Number Description 95P5855 Ultrium 4 Full High LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled 95P5856 Ultrium 4 Full High Fibre Channel Tape Drive Sled 95P5857 Ultrium 4 Full High SAS Tape Drive Sled 45E2695 Ultrium 4 Half High SAS Tape Drive Sled 95P5218 Ultrium 3 Full High LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled 95P5219 Ultrium 3 Full High Fibre Channel Tape Drive Sled 95P
21. Argentina TEC 83 A5 Argentina Brazil Colombia 11 e 2 8 m 250V Paraguay Trinidad Tobago FC 9834 Uriguay e PN 39M5068 China CCEE People s Republic of China 12 e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9840 e PN 39M5206 Taiwan LV CNS 10917 3 Taiwan 13 2 8 m 125V e FC 9835 e PN 39M5247 Chapter 11 Optional Features Replacement Parts and Power Cords 11 5 Table 11 3 Power Cords continued Description Feature Code FC and Part Number PN Plug Standard Country or Region Reference Index Number in Figure 11 1 on page 11 7 Taiwan HV e 2 8 m 250V FC 9841 e PN 39M5254 CNS 10917 3 Taiwan 14 Japan LV 2 8 m 125V FC 9842 e PN 39M5199 Japan HV 2 8 m 250V e FC 9843 e PN 39M5186 JIS C8303 C8306 JIS C8303 C8306 Japan Japan 15 16 Korea HV e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9844 e PN 39M5219 KS C8305 K60884 1 Korea 17 India HV 2 8 m 250V FC 9845 PN 39M5226 IS 6538 India 18 Brazil LV e 2 8 m 125V e FC 9846 e PN 39M5233 InMetro NBR 6147 Brazil 19 Brazil HV 2 8 m 250V e FC 9847 e PN 39M5240 InMetro NBR 14136 Brazil 20 Low Voltage High Voltage Types of Receptacles Figure 11 1 on Table 11 3 on page 11 3 pa e 11 7shows the plugs that are used by the power cords in index number in the table 11 6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3
22. Data path failure 43 00 Message Error A message could not be sent or received due to excessive transmission errors 44 00 Internal target failure A hardware failure has been detected in the drive that has caused the command to fail 45 00 Select Reset Failure An attempt to reselect an initiator in order to complete the command has failed 48 00 Initiator detected error message received 49 00 Invalid message error 4A 00 Command phase error 4B 00 Data Phase Error A command could not be completed because too many parity errors occurred during the Data phase 4E 00 Overlapped Commands An initiator selected the drive even though it already had a command outstanding in the drive 50 00 Write Append Error A write type command failed because the point at which to append data was unreadable 51 00 Erase failure An Erase command failed to erase the required area on the media 52 00 Cartridge fault A command could not be completed due to a fault in the tape cartridge 53 00 Media Load Eject Failed Sense Key 03 An attempt to load or eject the cartridge failed due to a problem with the cartridge 53 00 Media Load Eject Failed Sense Key 04 An attempt to load or eject the cartridge failed due to a problem with the drive 53 02 Media Removal Prevented An Unload command has failed to eject the cartridge because media removal has been prevented 5A 01 Operator medium removal request 5D 00 Failure Predi
23. Monitor Library gt Library If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 you must be prepared to enter both IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses 5 24 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide e DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol If this is enabled your library host will negotiate the connection with the library If DHCP is disabled the following information is necessary to establish the remote access e IP Address the IP address of the library e Netmask the Network Mask address of the library e IP Stack the IP Stack manages static IP addresses e Stateless autoconfig allows IPv6 hosts to be configured automatically when connected to a routed IPv6 network e Prefix length the length of the IP address prefix e Static IPv6 address a static IPv6 address that has been assigned to the library e Link Local IPv6 address an IPv6 address having link only scope that can be used to reach neighboring nodes attached to the same link e Router assigned IPv6 address an IPv6 address assigned by a router e Gateway the Gateway address of the library e Ethernet the current speed setting of the ethernet interface Configure Set Access PIN Use this menu item to enable disable set or change the Access PIN personal identification number which is used to restrict access to the Control Configure and Service menus Note Record the Access PIN and store this in a secure location for future referenc
24. Revision Drive Firmware File S SESS e eee Browse Update a77ug081 Figure 5 54 The 2U library Service Library Upgrade Firmware page Upgrade Library Firmware Currently Installed R 05 Browse Library Firmware Library Firmware File Update Upgrade Drive 1 Firmware Drive Firmware F3PA Revision Drive Firmware File Browse Upgrade Drive 2 Firmware Drive Firmware F3PA Revision Drive Firmware File Browse Up a77ug097 Figure 5 55 The 4U library Service Library Upgrade Firmware page 5 58 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Service Library Reboot Important Some options of the Web User Interface take the library OFFLINE This inactive mode can interfere with host based application software causing data loss Ensure that the library is idle before attempting to perform any remote operations that will take the library OFFLINE This page is used to perform a library reboot There is a default time delay when the Web User Interface page refreshes itself This time should be sufficient to reload the page However during a reboot the connection to the library may be lost If the connection is lost the user will have to reload the page manually Reboot a77ug077 Figure 5 56 Service Library Reboot page Import and Export Media during Normal Library Operation Import Media Data
25. Sequence Number 1665 Machine ID 0046083B4C00 Node ID risc4 Error Class H Error Type PERM Resource Name smc0 Resource Class tape Resource Type 3573 Location P1 1 13 Q1 W5003013D38321011 L1000000000000 VPD Manuiiaccbune tme aeee n ei IBM Machine Type and Model 3573 TL Serial NUMDen ceres renr X2U78B0384 Device Specific FW 4 09 Firmware Level Description TAPE DRIVE FAILURE Probable Causes TAPE DRIVE Failure Causes TAPE TAPE DRIVE Recommended Actions PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES Detail Data bb SCSI target address In this example SCSI address 00 xx Unused or reserved SENSE DATA aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss SS SS tere aa Length of the Command Descriptor Block CDB sent by the host In this case OC bytes cc Start of CDB cc is the operation code byte 0 In this case A5 which was a Move Medium OCOO 0000 A500 0000 100F 1010 0000 0000 0102 0000 7000 0400 0000 000A 0000 0000 818F 0000 BEOO 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Figure E 1 AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example Table E 1 AIX ERRPT Library Sense Data Hex Description AS 70 04
26. a Use the UP and DOWN buttons to increment decrement the digit b Press the SELECT button to highlight the next editable digit 3 Press the SELECT button at the last digit to apply the complete entry or press the CANCEL button to cancel the whole edit process and maintain the original value Power ON OFF Part of the Operator Control Panel is the Power ON OFF button If the library is powered ON pressing this button for 4 seconds will initiate a controlled power down of the library soft landing The following operations will take place before the library shuts down completely e The display indicates with an appropriate message that the shutdown is in progress e The library controller finishes all ongoing library and drive activities e The accessor is moved to its home position e The library controller switches OFF the power supply s secondary side Note The shutdown process may be aborted by releasing the button before 4 seconds has passed Web User Interface Many of the same operations performed from the Operator Control Panel can also be performed remotely using the Web User Interface The Web User Interface lets you monitor and control your library from any terminal connected to your network or through the World Wide Web WWW The Web User Interface hosts a dedicated protected Internet site that displays a graphical representation of your library 2 4 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operat
27. by one of several symbols If the symbol is It means A hazardous electrical condition with less severity than electrical danger A generally hazardous condition not represented by other safety symbols A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the product Laser symbols are always accompanied by the classification of the laser as defined by the U S Department of Health and Human Services for example Class I Class II and so forth gt gt gt Class I A hazardous condition due to mechanical movement in or around the product A hazardous condition due to the weight of the unit Weight symbols are accompanied by an approximation of the product s weight oe svc00168 32 55 kg 70 5 121 2 Ibs Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 XV If the symbol is It means A hazardous condition due to the unit s susceptibility to electrostatic discharge XVi 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Laser Safety and Compliance Before using the library review the following laser safety information Class Laser Product The library may contain a laser assembly that complies with the performance standards set by the U S Food and Drug Administration for a Class I laser product Class I laser products do not emit hazardous laser radiation The library has the necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is i
28. call while at your computer with the library installed and turned on If running on a network have all relevant information available that is type version number network hardware and so on Having this information available when you call for customer assistance will enable support personnel to resolve your problem in the most efficient manner possible e Library Machine type and Model name s e Serial number of the library front of the library on the label underneath the power button e Library and drive firmware levels currently installed e Device driver information e Host application name and version e Type of host operating system version clock speed RAM network type network version and any special boards installed 3 The IBM Support Center will assist with problem determination and initiate shipment of a replacement part if needed to your location To contact IBM Technical Support In the USA 1 800 IBM_SERV 1 800 426 7378 All other Countries Regions http www ibm com planetwide To open a Service Request online Under Support amp downloads click Open a Service Request 9 6 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Tools Required To service a library you may need one or more of the following tools 2 Phillips screwdriver Ground strap recommended if available Electrostatic Discharge
29. server attachment SCSI interface 3 7 servers supported 1 11 Sharing the library 3 1 shipment verification 4 3 shipping container 4 2 shipping label removing and storing 4 5 shipping lock and label storage location 1 3 shipping lock removing and storing 4 5 shortcut keys H 1 Simple Network Management Protocol 1 6 sled description of tape drive 1 7 Slot Blocker 10 10 slot physical locations B 2 SME 5 43 SNMP 1 6 5 47 C 1 F 1 software supported 1 11 specifications 1 9 environmental 1 9 operation 1 9 physical 1 9 power 1 9 Specifications write protect switch cartridges 6 17 Write Protect Switch Setting C 3 speed matching 1 8 Write Protect Switch SSL 4 26 5 47 setting 6 7 storage capacity 1 6 WWNN 5 31 System p error information E 1 T tape cartridge 1 9 tape drive sled 1 3 A 1 Tape drives channel calibration 1 9 power management 1 9 quantity in library 1 7 speed matching 1 8 TapeAlert Flags for drives C 3 TapeAlert Flags library C 1 technical support 9 5 Telnet A 26 Telnet Service Port 5 30 Traps F 1 troubleshooting 7 1 U Ultral60 1 6 Ultra320 1 6 Ultrium Tape Drives 1 7 unpacking the library 4 2 Updating firmware using ITDT Tool 9 4 pgrade firmware 5 57 SB port 1 3 lt G V verifying the shipment 4 3 View Drive Logs 5 55 W Web User Interface Configure Library Event Notification 5 52 Configure Library Restore Defaults 5 52 configuring library 4 16 date and time 4 3
30. the attached host and host application Generally only drives which are currently physically available or temporarily removed are reported Empty unused slots located at the bottom or the top should not be reported with an exception in case of a removed condition A drive slot which does not contain a drive and has a position between used slots needs to be reported as a SCSI element To signal the host application that this slot is not usable its ACCESS bit will be disabled Note When reducing the number of drives in your library update the Logical Library configuration This will remove the Attention LED on the front panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen indicating that a drive is missing Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element addressing and drive numbering Replacing LTO half high drives with full high drives may require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the drive element addressing and drive numbering See Configure Library Restore Defaults on page 5 52 Appendix B SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations B 5 B 6 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Appendix C TapeAlert Flags This appendix is intended to provide additional information to the reader about the tape drive All error code and diagnostic information contained in this chapter can be accessed from the Operator
31. utilized Autoload Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available cartridge slot with the lowest numerical value that contains a cartridge automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive Loop Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest numerical slot after the cartridge in the highest numerical slot has been filled and sent back to its home slot This allows endless backup operations without user interaction e Active Slots Select the number of active slots you would like to assign in your library This item will affect the number of Res Reserved Slots in our library For more information refer E 0 cus al Note Slots can be reserved so that they are invisible to the host It may be necessary to reserve slots in order to match the number of available slots to the ISV software licensing Slots will be reserved starting with the highest element address If your library does not have a dedicated cleaning cartridge slot and you desire to enable Auto Clean you must designate a reserved slot which can be used to hold the cleaning cartridge I O Station Enabled If checked the I O Station is enabled If not the first 3 slots in a 4U library or the 1st slot in a 2U library are configured as storage See Configure Library General on page 5 41 e Auto Clean Enabled Automatically cleans drive when drive requests cleaning and cleaning cartridge is present in a reserved slo
32. violation related to a missing EOD data set 14 10 Not Ready Auxiliary memory not accessible The drive is not able to become ready because it is unable to access the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge 17 01 Recovered data with retries 1A 00 Parameter list length error The amount of parameter data sent is incorrect 20 00 Invalid Command Operation Code The Operation Code in the command was not a valid Operation Code 24 00 Invalid field in CDB An invalid field has been detected in a Command Descriptor Block 25 00 LUN not supported The command was addressed to a non existent logical unit number 26 00 Invalid Field in Parameter List An invalid field has been detected in the data sent during the data phase Appendix D Sense Data D 7 Table D 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Continued Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC ASCQ 27 00 Write Protect A Write type operation has been requested on a cartridge which has been write protected 28 00 Not Ready to Ready Transition A cartridge has been loaded successfully into the drive and is now ready to be accessed 28 01 Import or export element accessed 29 00 Reset The drive has powered on received a reset signal or a bus device reset signal since the initiator last accessed it 29 04 Device internal reset
33. 000 000 000 bytes Gigabit Interface Converter GBIC Converts copper interface to optic interface gnd Ground H hertz Hz Unit of frequency One hertz equals one cycle per second hex Hexadecimal High Voltage Differential HVD A logic signaling system that enables data communication between a supported host and the library HVD signaling uses a paired plus and minus signal level to reduce the effects of noise on the SCSI bus Any noise injected into the signal is present in both a plus and minus state and is thereby canceled Synonymous with differential HVD SCSI Bus High Voltage Differential Hz Hertz cycles per second IBM Ultrium Tape Drive Located within the library a data storage device that controls the movement of the magnetic tape in an IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge The drive houses the mechanism drive head that reads and writes data to the tape ID Identifier identifier ID 1 In programming languages a lexical unit that names a language object for example the names of variables arrays records labels or procedures An identifier usually consists of a letter optionally followed by letters digits or other characters 2 One or more characters used to identify or name data element and possibly to indicate certain properties of that data element 3 A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a program device or system to another program device or system IML Initial
34. 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 4U Position 4 4U Position 4 4U Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 4U Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 4U Position 4 4U Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 Fibre Channel Logical Library Logical Library Logical Library Logical Library Drive settings Position Position Position Position Speed Speed Speed Speed Port type Port type Port type Port type Loop ID Loop ID Loop ID Loop ID SAS Drive Logical Library Logical Library Logical Library Logical Library settings Position Position Position Position ID ID ID ID SCSI Drive Logical Library Logical Library Logical Library Logical Library settings Position Position Position Position ID ID ID ID User Accounts Role Password Role Password Role Password Role Password Encryption Key Path Failover Key Activation Key Labels Adhere one of the activation key labels here for future reference Adhere one of the activation key labels here for future reference G 2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Appendix H Accessibility Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability such as restricted mobility or limited vision to use the HTML version of the customer documentation successfully Features These are the major accessibil
35. 3 2 1 0 Address valid When set to 1 the info 0 byte field Error Code contains a valid logical block address 1 Segment Number 0 2 Filemark EOM end ILI Reserved Sense Key Description of medium Incorrect 0 No sense length 1 Recovered error indicator 2 Not ready 3 Media error 4 Hardware error 5 Illegal request 6 Unit attention 7 Data protect 8 Blank Check 9 Reserved A Reserved B Aborted command C Reserved D Volume overflow E Reserved F Reserved Information byte most significant byte Information byte Information byte least significant byte 3 4 5 Information byte 6 7 Additional Sense Length Command specific information D 6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table D 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC ASCQ 00 00 No additional sense The flags in the sense data indicate the reason for the command failure 00 01 Filemark detected A Read or Space command terminated early due to an FM The FM flag is set 00 02 EOM A Write or Write File Marks command failed because the physical end of tape was encountered or a Read or Space command encountered EOM The EOM flag is set 00 04 BOM A
36. 4 18 Removing the protective label from the power receptacle 2 Plug one end of the power cord E in Connecting the Host Interface Cable lon page 412 n page 4 12 into each power supply connector on the back panel of the library 3 Plug the other end of each power cord into the nearest properly grounded power outlet Use separate power sources for each power supply for redundant power Attention To disconnect all power from the library remove the power cord from each outlet The power button removes power from portions of the library and the drives but the power supplies still have AC power at their inputs 4 Remove the protective plastic on the exterior surfaces of the library 5 Turn ON the library using the power button Check the Operator Control Panel display to make sure the library is receiving power If it is not check the power connections and your power source During the Power On Self Test POST all four LEDs are illuminated briefly followed by a flashing Ready LED When the initialization sequence is complete the Home screen see Power ON Display will be displayed Configuring Your Library Note Review the information in Installation Planning before configuring your library The library can be configured using the Operator Control Panel and or the Web User Interface The recommended method for configuring your library is using the Web User Interface For complete detailed configuration infor
37. 40404040 40404040 40404040 00000000 OOEO F6F3CIFO FOFOFOF1 0000E2D3 C9C3C9D6 4040E5F5 DIF3D4FO 40490000 00000000 63A00001 SLICIO VSR3M0 00000000 0100 01030000 00000000 00000141 00000000 00000000 01950000 00000000 00000197 00000000 0120 00000000 00000000 00000000 90000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0140 E3C1D7F2 F7404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 00070001 00000000 0160 00000000 10200003 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00090011E 00000188 00000000 0180 F8807800 28440001 00002600 21410400 63A00001 93500100 45381202 05080000 00000000 01AO 00000000 00004624 00000000 00000000 00040000 00003580 0001A170 02903435 Product Activity Log Page 3 ROMLPAR1 08 26 05 10 28 40 00000000 01CO 36310040 00007100 63000000 001C0000 00005300 06003119 06010002 60000000 id 00000000 01 0 00000000 00000000 03010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000009 By 00000000 0200 00000000 0000D9C5 D8400000 DIEZOOOC 02000000 0000E2C3 E2C91202 00180000 REQ RS SCSI a 00000000 0220 00000000 GO00C5D9 D940C3C8 C3D20444 8502D9E2 0000E2C3 E2C91202 00180300 ERR CHCK e RS SCSI id 00000000 0240 00008000 0000E2D5 E2C47100 03000000 001C0000 0000C5D9 D7C11202 O5D80000 SNSD ERPA Q 00000000 0260 00171202 O5D8D9C5 E2D70000 00171202 O5D8D9E2 00000000 D4C5C4C9 C10000C3 QRESP QRS MEDIA C 00000000 0280 D7D7F1F2 F5C500D4 E3C1D7C3 D3D500C3 D7D7F6F4 FOFOOOE4 C6C9FOFO F8F7F1C3 PP1
38. 49 52 Data set Number 53 1st Error FSC 54 55 1st Error Flag Data 56 57 2nd Error FSC 58 59 2nd Error Flag Data 60 61 Next to Last Error FSC 62 63 a Next to Last Error Flag Data D 12 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table D 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 65 Last Error FSC 66 67 Last Error Flag Data 68 69 LPOS Region 70 85 ERP Summary Information 86 89 Product Revision Level YMDV as defined in Standard Inquiry this is also known as the Code Level 90 95 Reserved 0 The descriptions below serve only as an overview of sense reporting in the tape drive This tape drive conforms to all sense field reporting as specified in the SCSI standards Note 1 The Error Code field Byte 0 is set to 70h to indicate a current error that is one associated with the most recently received command It is set to 71h to indicate a deferred error which is not associated with the current command 2 The segment number Byte 1 is zero since the Copy Compare and Copy and Verify commands are not supported 3 The File Mark flag Byte 2 bit 7 is set if a Space Read or Verify command did not complete because a file mark was read 4 The End of Media EOM flag Byte 2 bit 6 is set if a Write or Write File Marks command completed in the early warning area Spacing into
39. 4U library are similar Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 9 a77ug011 Figure 4 10 2U library side screws to remove 5 Install the library rack anchors H as shown in Figure 4 11 on each side of your library using the longer counter sunk screws included in the rack kit N e D 5 N o Figure 4 11 2U library rack anchors and mounting brackets 6 Install the library mounting brackets H as shown on the 2U and 4U library on each side of the library using the screws removed from your library and additional short counter sunk screws included in the rack kit 7 With library rack anchors and mounting brackets installed slide the libra a a a a tilend k 11 When the library stops gently push the library to lock the anchors installed on each side of the library to the rails and until the mounting brackets are flush with the vertical rack rails 4 10 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a77ug111 Figure 4 12 Sliding the 2U library into the rack Q O D 5 N oO 4 Figure 4 13 Sliding the 4U library into the rack 8 Using thumbscrews secure the library to the rack see Figure 4 14 on page 4 12 for a 2U library see Figure 4 15 on page 4 12 for a 4U library by placing a screw in the center hole of each mounting bracket and tightening them E Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 11 a77ug112 i e a D 5
40. 55 KBs transferred Save Drive Dump System Status t Drive 1 View Legend 01 13 2000 21 18 12 Library Name RB4U139 Status Ready Drive 1 Status Reacy Slots Empty Total 40 44 1 0 Station Closed Library Time 21 18 12 Drive Dump in Progress47 KB transferred a77ug121 Figure 5 51 Service Save Drive Dump Service Library Perform Diagnostics Note When running the System Test the library must contain at least the same number of data cartridges as there are drives in that library For example if your library has 4 drives installed you must have 4 or more data cartridges in the library prior to the start of the test If there are fewer data cartridges than drives in the library an error message Slot Empty will occur and the test will not complete successfully This page provides the system administrator with general tests to verify the usability and reliability of the library The System Test will use resident data cartridges to test the load and unload capability of the drives and ensure that the library mechanics are working satisfactorily No data will be written to the cartridges and the cartridges will be returned to their normal slot location The Slot To Slot test will move each resident data cartridge from one slot to another for each test cycle requested When completing the Slot To Slot test you will need to Inventory your library before placing it back online since this test scramble
41. 9 11 219 139 Se 255 255 255 0 IPv6 Enable DHCP Enable Stateless Auto Config Static Address Prefix length Gateway address SNMP Enabled O Target 1 IP Address 1 TERA IPv4 address or Host name and domain Target 2 IP Address Version IPv4 address or Host name and domain Target 3 IP Address EETA IPv4 address or Host name and domain Community Name Security User Name initial You will be required to login again if changes are made except of changing snmp settings If you change the IP address of the library then you r will need to use the new IP address when you attempt to access the library again a77ug074 Figure 5 41 Configure Library Network Page 2 Select a Protocol Stack Choose IPv4 only IPv6 only or Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 you must be prepared to enter both IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses The sections below will gray out depending on the choices made here Note When changes are made the following Warning message will appear when the Submit button is clicked Warning Changes Will Take Effect After A Reboot a77ug171 Figure 5 42 Warning Screen The library must be rebooted or the changes will not take place 5 48 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide N O Or Pp 10 11 Enter the Host Name Enter the Domain Name DNS Primary Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server DNS Secondary Enter the IP addre
42. Card may contain valid non zero VPD data left over from having been installed previously in another library If this occurs the library which is expecting to see zeros in the VPD area will instead detect valid VPD data and will not know which copy of the VPD is the correct one It will detect a VPD Mismatch and display on the Operator Control Panel a screen entitled VPD Selection where it is asking you to determine which copy of VPD should be written to the new Library Controller Card 10 12 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide If the message VPD Selection is displayed at the Operator Control Panel carefully highlight the VPD from Enclosure option to copy that version of the VPD to the new Library Controller Card Then continue with the procedure Removal and Replacement 1 2 Power OFF the library by pressing and holding the power button at the front of the library for 4 seconds Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source then from the power supply or supplies at the back of the library Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card Grasp the two thumbscrews and pull the defective Library Controller Card out of the library a66mi097 Figure 10 13 A Library Controller Card being removed from the library 11 12 Remove the packaging from the replacement Library Controller Card Grasp the two thumbscr
43. Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the desired slots See Control Move Cartridges on page 5 17 or Manage Library Move Media on page 5 39 for more information Note If you run a library configuration backup program on your host computer use the program to run an audit of the library after new cartridges have been added to update the backup program Chapter 5 Operations 5 59 Export Media To remove cartridges from your library using your I O Station follow these steps 1 Go to Main gt Control gt Move Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the 1 0 Station See or Manage Library Move Media on page 5 39 for more information 2 Go to Main gt Control gt Open T O Station The I O Station will unlock itself 3 Pull out the magazine and take the data cartridge s out of the I O Station 4 Push the magazine back into the library The library will automatically start an inventory of the I O station If you do not have an I O Station all slots are assigned to storage and wish to export media you will need to release a magazine and take out the cartridges manually following these steps 1 Go to Main gt Control gt Magazine Choose the magazine you wish to unlock remove 2 Pull out the magazine and remove the desired data cartridge s 3 Push the magazine back into the library The library will automatically start an inventory Note If you run a library configuration backu
44. Codes 8 1 Error LEDs 7 8 Error log 8 1 errors obtaining from library and drives E 1 System p E 1 errpt command using E 1 Ethernet Port 1 3 Export Media 4 38 5 17 5 39 5 59 9 1 F factory default settings 5 25 fan vents 1 3 feature activation key 5 43 features optional drives 1 7 Fibre Channel 3 7 Fibre Channel interface cables and speeds 3 10 connectors and adapters 3 11 persistent binding 3 6 sharing on a SAN 3 11 zoning 3 10 fibre channel interposer 4 14 Fibre Channel ports 3 10 Firmware updating using ITDT Tool 9 4 firmware upgrade 5 57 foot pads installing 4 4 front panel components 1 1 G Gateway address 4 17 Gateway Address 4 26 5 24 5 47 glossary J 1 H Host Attachment 7 13 host bus adapter 3 7 host connection verifying 4 34 host interface cable 4 12 host interface connectors 1 3 host interfaces 3 7 host preparation 4 34 hp ux system error information E 5 humidity 4 1 I O Station 1 1 4 35 5 59 I O Station configuring 5 60 I O Station open and close 5 60 identifying a suspect cartridge 1 1 2 2 Import Media 4 38 5 17 5 39 5 59 installation 4 1 Interface 7 13 interfaces 3 7 interfaces supported 1 7 internal view of library A 1 Internet Protocol version 4 1 5 Internet Protocol version 6 1 5 interposer fibre channel 4 14 Inventory 5 15 5 40 IP address 4 17 5 31 IP Address 4 26 5 24 5 47 IP Stack 5 24 IPv4 1 5 IPv6 1 5 ITDT Tool 9 4 K Key Path 5 35 Ke
45. Controller Card CRU refer to Replacing a Library Controller Card on page 10 12 Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems If the server has reported inventory problems relating to inability to read bar code labels or if some or all of the cartridge labels are not being displayed on the Web User Interface use the following procedure to determine if the scanner library enclosure CRU needs to be replaced 1 Ensure that a supported bar code label or labels are being used Also check for damaged labels see Bar Code Label on page 6 5 With library power OFF reseat the library controller card CRU refer to Replacing a Library Controller Card on page 10 12 and then switch library power ON Perform a re inventory via the Operator Control Panel Control gt Re Inventory and view the inventory via the Web User Interface Monitor Library gt Inventory to determine if the labels are now being read If the labels are still not being read properly replace the library enclosure CRU refer to Replacing the Library Enclosure on page 10 15 Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems After successfully exercising Isolating Drive Sled Problems and more specifically the Library Verify diagnostic on the Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify which includes a drive or drives read write diagnostic the following procedures are suggested to help isolate the failure to properly establish connecti
46. Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 1 1 Table 1 1 2U library and 4U library front panel descriptions Number Item Description Power button Pressing this button powers ON the library Pressing and holding this button for 4 seconds will power OFF the unit soft power down No power switch or button can be found on the back panel of the library Front panel LEDs left to right e Ready Activity Green LED It is illuminated any time the unit is powered ON and able to function It should blink whenever there is library or drive activity or when the library is in the process of powering up e Clean Drive Amber LED It is illuminated when the drive needs to be cleaned The LED will be turned OFF after the drive is cleaned successfully Attention Amber LED It is illuminated when there has been a failure that indicates a piece of media is bad marginal or invalid It will be cleared when all invalid cartridges have been exported from the library The amber LED may also be lit because a power supply or a power supply fan is failing or a drive sled is defective missing or has been replaced by a different drive type Error Amber LED It is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable library or drive failure A message is displayed at the same time on the Operator Control Panel display Cartridge magazines e The 2U library contains two cartridge magazines The left magazine can hold up to 12 cartrid
47. Drive 2 Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3 Element Address Element Address Dri z N 256 256 rive 1 Drive 1 Element Address Element Address gt 256 256 Front side Figure B 2 Configuration of a two partition system Configuration of a 3 Partition System A three partition system must have at least three drives installed A drive must be installed in drive position 1 another drive must be installed in drive position 2 and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4 Partition 1 will contain the first drive and the first magazine Partition 2 will contain the second drive and the second magazine Partition 3 will contain any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4 Partition 3 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4 Drive 4 aE Element Address LAE 257 Magazine Magazine Element Address z 95 256 Drive 3 Element Address 256 Drive 2 Drive 2 Element Address Element Address Magazine LUET EFA 256 256 1 3 Drive 1 Drive 1 2 Element Address Element Address 256 256 Front side 5 Figure B 3 Configuration of a three partition system Configuration of a 4 Partition System A four partition system must have four drives Each partition will contain one drive and one magazine Drive 4 Element Address 256 Magazine Magazine 2 Drive 3 Element Address 256 Drive 2 El
48. Ferrers U S A Chelmsford Essex CM3 5UL Telephone 888 438 8362 U K http www tri optic com Telephone 44 0 1245 322380 http www tri optic com Dataware Dataware Labels Europe P O Box 740947 Houston TX 77274 Heubergstrasse 9 D 83052 Bruckmuhl Gotting U S A Germany Telephone 800 426 4844 Telephone 49 8062 9455 E E http www datawarelabels com NetC NetC Europe Ltd P O Box 1067 Town Farm Bungalow Fairfield CT 06825 The Pavement U S A North Curry Telephone 203 372 6382 http www netcllc com TA3 6LX Somerset U K Telephone 44 0 1823 49 1439 http www netclabels co uk NetC Asia Pacific Pty Ltd Locked Bag 1 Kenthurst NSW 2156 Australia Telephone 61 0 2 4573 6556 http www netclabels com uk Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 21 6 22 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The library consists of the following CRUs Customer Replaceable Units Control Card electronics processor memory etc Power Supply Drive Sled drive plus drive to library connectivity Library Enclosure accessor Operator Control Panel display etc Cartridge Magazines e Other possible Replacement Parts are Data Cartridges Cables Terminator Important Before replacing any CRU and after finding the problem and performing any listed_actions listed in the Trou
49. Figure 4 3 Shipping lock and label Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 5 a77ug195 Figure 4 4 Removing the Shipping lock and label 2 Store the lock E and label a on the rear panel of the library as shown in Figure 4 5 a77ug019 Figure 4 5 Library shipping lock and label storage location on rear panel of library Rackmounting the Library for Rack Installation ONLY Attention If you haven t removed the shipping lock complete this first before rackmounting your library See Removing and Storing the Shipping The 2U library and the 4U library are easily installed into a standard 19 inch rack system A standard 19 inch rack system contains multiple mounting locations 4 6 1953100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide called EIA units as defined by the Electronics Industries Association Each EIA unit contains three square or round holes used to mount rack designed equipment These units are often referred to as U s thus the 2U library requires 2 EIA units or 6 holes of space the 4U library takes 4 EIA units or 12 holes of space Each unit is separated by a very small space See Figure 2 5 for an example of how to count EIA units The 2U library requires 2U 3 5 in of space The 4U library requires 4U 7 in of space Important A 2U library weighs 15 59 kg 34 37 Ibs with one drive and without media A 4U library weighs 21 32 kg 47 lbs with one drive and wi
50. IBM devices The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool ITDT v2 1 is available as a command line utility and a graphical user interface GUI version e The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool ITDT v2 1 tool is a command line utility Invoke it by entering the executable from the directory where the tool is located The Help feature gives a brief explanation of each function and shows the required syntax e The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool ITDT v2 1 tool is a GUI version for Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 IX86 32 bit are only supported Note Before using ITDT verify that your library host operating system is at the latest released level This will ensure optimum read write operations for diagnostics Note The legacy Tape Products 3580 GEN1 and GEN2 3581 3582 and 3583 Products are not supported with this version of ITDT but are still supported with the older version of ITDT v1 2 To download the ITDT tool and instructions for using the tool visit http www 03 ibm com servers storage support Contacting IBM Technical Support Note The IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library is a customer installed unit The customer is responsible for the setup and maintenance of the tape library The customer will be charged for service if a service contract is not in place Note Where instructions refer you to the web visit http www 03 ibm com se
51. IP network Networks using the TCP IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the destination The format of an IP address is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be zero to 255 For example 1 160 10 240 could be an IP address c Network Mask This address defines and limits users within a local network d Gateway address This address allows access outside the local network Enter IPv6 settings if applicable a Enable DHOP Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the DHCP server If you are not using a DHCP server leave unchecked and enter the appropriate information for the IP Address Network Mask and Gateway Address b Enable Stateless Auto Config Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the library host computer Leave unchecked and enter the appropriate information for the static assigned IP Address prefix length and Gateway Address c Static Address Enter the assigned IPv6 address The format of an IPv6 IP address is a 128 bit numeric address written as 8 groups of four numbers separated by colons d Prefix length The default prefix length is set to 64 but can be set to any length depending upon the address used e Gateway address This address allows access outside the local network Enter SNMP settings Note For more information on SNMP refer to SNMP Messa
52. If you do not hear the click continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear J in Figure A 16 stops The LBA is in the correct position Note Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge by using a hex wrench as shown in Figure A 15 on page A 16 Notice the a Loader mechanism gear J in Figure A 16 nearest the front of the drive that actuates the cartridge loader mechanism b Position of the rotate stub J in Figure A 16 c Front loader motor worm gear iJ in Figure A 16 Rotating this gear allows the loader mechanism gear H in Figure A 16 to turn Rotate the loader motor worm a E in Figure A 16 to turn the threader mechanism gear J in counterclockwise Continue turning until the rotator stub K in loses contact with the lever J in Figure A 16 This releases the LBA leader pin Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 17 counterclockwise This moves the LBA out of the carttidge and past the read write head Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller nearest the rear of the drive shown as F a82ru010 Figure A 17 Leader Block Assembly LBA 11 Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear in Figure A 16 on page A 17 until the rotator stub E in Figure A 16 on page A 17 is positioned as shown Notice that the rotator stub J in Figure A 16 on page A 17 is nearly aligned with the cartridge load
53. LTO4 LTO 3 etc and how much of the tape is spooled out of the cartridge for the cartridge to rewind and unload 4 If the cartridge unloads inform the operator that the cartridge is unloaded If the cartridge does not unload repeat steps 2 and 3 once before continuing with this procedure Note If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY COPY data i e there is no backup eject commands issued at the host fail to unload the tape and power cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Call Technical Support and open a PMR if one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery Beginning Procedure Note If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY COPY data i e there is no backup eject commands issued at the host fail to unload the tape and power cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Call Technical Support and open a PMR if one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery Removing the Drive Brick from the Sled 1 Remove the tape drive sled from the library See Removing a Tape Drive Sled 2 Place the sled on a clean sturdy work surface 3 If necessary perform the following steps to remove the sled connection card to
54. Libraries prior to Library Microcode Level 1 9 slot 11 may be labelled a Not Used slot which contained a Slot Blocker With Library Microcode level 1 9 or higher there is an option to remove the Slot Blocker and place that slot into use See Removing the Slot Blocker 2U Library on page 10 10 a77ug020 Figure 4 35 2U library left magazine Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 35 a77ug021 Figure 4 36 2U library right magazine 2U Library I O Station The I O Input Output Station see Figure 4 37 in a 2U library is part of the left magazine To open the I O Station select Control gt Open I O Station The I O Station will pop open To close the I O Station gently push it back into the left magazine a77ug022 Figure 4 37 2U library I O Station in the left magazine 4U Library Cartridge Magazines The 4U library has four cartridge magazines two on each side see Figure 4 38 on and Figure 4 39 on page 4 37 The upper left magazine has twelve 4 36 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide storage slots The lower left magazine has nine storage slots and houses the elective 3 slot I O Station J in Figure 4 38 The upper right magazine has twelve storage slots The lower right magazine has twelve storage slots For information on Element Addressing see 4U Library I O Slots Storage Slots and Drive Slots Element Addresses and Physi
55. Library Enclosure See Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page ITDT Performance Test duration varies Items affecting the duration of the test are e The level of adapter device driver e Your adapter model and type OTHER PROBLEMS Web User Interface problems See Isolating Web User Interface Problems on page 7 12 Bar code scanner problems Host Attachment Interface problems See Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems on page 7 13 See Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems on page 7 13 Need help with a library password Refer to Contacting IBM Technical Support on page 9 5 Key path diagnostic not working This diagnostic is available with library firmware level greater than 6 xx Refer to g g Firmware on page 4 19 to determine the level of firmware on your library If necessary visit http www ibm com to download the latest levels of firmware for your library Auto Clean status displayed as Chk Media Rsvd Slot on the Web User Interface System Status screen If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present or if a cleaning cartridge is present but not in the reserved slot Auto Clean status will show Chk Media Rsvd Slot and Status will show a green check mark and the words Media Attention Installation Problems Problems encountered during the installation of the li
56. Library Setup Operator and Service Guide wo Q D 5 N oO Figure 10 16 Foot pads installed on the bottom of the library enclosure 3 Carefully return the library to an upright position 4 Remove the shipping lock from the top of the replacement library enclosure see Figure 10 17 on page 10 18 Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 17 a77ug195 Figure 10 17 Removing the shipping label and lock from the top of the library and storing on the rear panel 5 Store the lock and label on the back panel of the replacement library enclosure see Figure 10 18 _ ATTEN HON gt Remo 2 a77ug019 Figure 10 18 Library shipping lock and label storage location on the real panel of the library 6 Proceed to Installing Your Drive s in the Replacement Library Enclosure Installing Your Drive s in the Replacement Library Enclosure Note It is important to install the drives from the defective library into the same positions in the replacement library enclosure in order to maintain your current library configuration 10 18 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 1 Remove all drives from the defective library see Figure 10 19 and install them in the same positions in the replacement library enclosure a77ug027 Figure 10 19 Removing a drive sled from the library drive sled without ESD springs shown a On the rear of the defective l
57. Replacing a Library Controller Card on page 10 12 If the error code indicates an accessor type error slider elevator sled etc release and remove both magazines see Control Magazine on page 5 17 ge Li Release Magazine on e 5 40 or Releasing the Magazines Manually on page 9 1 and observe the accessor path for any obvious obstruction or problems Resolve any observed problem if possible Otherwise replace the library enclosure CRU refer to n page 10 15 If the problem is intermittent or if a particular electronic or mechanical function of the library is not working properly as evidenced through observation or by error code the library enclosure CRU is the most likely failing component refer to Replacing the Library Enclosure on page 10 15 If the library is taking an extended amount of time in recovery to complete initialization perform an inventory or executing a cartridge movement within the library and after finding the magazine cell fiducials to be present with no visible damage and correctly installed suspect the sensor emitter on the accessor mechanism to be inoperable See Isolating Web User Interface Problems If the Web User Interface is not functioning at all or if it is intermittently functioning review the following steps to ensure that it is properly configured or to help determine which CRU or part needs to be replaced The complete Web User Interface el
58. Serial Attached SCSI SAS dual port Ultrium 4 Half High drives 3 Gb s SAS single port 1 6 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 1 3 Tape drive model and host interface type continued Tape Drive Model Host Interface Ultrium 3 Full High drives e Ultral60 SCSI LVD depending on drive single ended SE is not recommended as it will severely degrade performance e 4 Gb s Fibre Channel Ultrium 3 Half High drives e Ultra 160 SCSI LVD depending on drive single ended SE is not recommended as it will severely degrade performance e 3 Gb s SAS single port Table 1 4 Library storage capacity and data transfer rate Characteristic 2U Library Specification 4U Library Specification Maximum storage capacity Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges 24 data cartridges Native 19 2 TB Compressed 38 4 TB 2 1 compression 48 data cartridges Native 38 4 TB Compressed 75 2 TB 2 1 compression Maximum storage capacity Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges 24 data cartridges Native 9 6 TB Compressed 19 2 TB 2 1 compression 48 data cartridges Native 19 2 TB Compressed 38 4 TB 2 1 compression Sustained native data transfer rate LTO 3 HH 60 MBs LTO 3 FH 80 MBs LTO 4 HH and FH 120 MBs Ultrium Tape Drives This library supports the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drives Each tape drive
59. Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 11 y a82hd003 Figure A 11 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train Threader A Threader mechanism Loader motor worm intermediate gear gear gear 1 Pull out tape from the takeup reel Note If there is more than approximately 0 6 m 2 ft of tape on the takeup reel go to Half hig 2 If there is less than approximately 0 6 m 2 ft of tape on the takeup reel cut off the excess tape as close to the leader pin as possible 3 Reattach the leader pin to the remaining tape 4 Locate the threader intermediate gear J near the rear of the drive You can use your finger to rotate the threader intermediate gear J and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear H clockwise This draws the tape leader block assembly LBA into the cartridge 5 As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge you should hear the leader pin retention spring clips click into place If you do not hear the click continue rolling until the threader intermediate gear fJ stops The LBA is in the correct position 6 Rotate the loader motor worm gear EJ clockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it stops This releases the LBA leader pin 7 Rotate the threader intermediate gear J counterclockwise until the leader block is in front of the Read Write head This moves the LBA out of the cartridge A 12 153100 Tape Library an
60. The table below shows each Main menu item and the associated sub menu items TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Montor conto configure Service P f Logical F Library Open I O Station libraries Library Verify Drive Move Cartridges Library Run Tests Settings Inventory Magazines Drive Service Drives Re Inventory Network Display Contrast Set Access PIN Telnet Service Port Restore Default Set Date and Time Path Failover a77ug050 Figure 5 3 Operator Control Panel Menu Tree Monitor Menu The Monitor menu contains information about the following sub menu items e Library e Drive e Inventory Monitor Library This menu item displays current library information and settings Chapter 5 Operations 5 11 Library I Figure 5 4 Monitor Library menu Under Monitor gt Library are the following items e Status e Identity e Error Log e Network Under Monitor gt Library gt Status are the following items e Status current status of the
61. To stop sequential mode use the Move Cartridges option from the Control menu Control gt Move Cartridges to unload the drive the next sequential cartridge will NOT be loaded To restart sequential mode use the same Control menu command to load a cartridge The loading sequence will resume from that numeric slot in the cartridge inventory e Active Slots the number of active slots in each logical library Note Slots can be reserved so that they are invisible to the host It may be necessary to set the number of Active Slots to match the number of slots that are available to the ISV software Reserved slots are created by reducing the number of active slots e Auto Clean Use this menu item to enable the Auto Clean function All cleaning cartridges must have CLNxxxLx as part of the bar code The cleaning cartridge can be stored in any data cartridge slot Chapter 5 Operations 5 21 Note The universal cleaning cartridge has a bar code CLNUXxxLx This cleaning cartridge is used to clean all LTO generation tape drives For Auto Clean to function the following criteria must be met On 4U libraries with library firmware of 1 95 or lower that still contain a Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS or 4U libraries with library firmware higher than 1 95 that chose to retain the DCS in their library a CLN cartridge must be present in that slot On libraries that don t have a DCS a storage slot must be reserved RSVD by reducing the
62. You may use other LTO certified data cartridges but they may not meet the standards of reliability that are established by IBM Neither the IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 3 nor the IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge can be interchanged with the media used in other IBM non LTO Ultrium tape products shows the IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge and its components a67b0022 Figure 6 1 The IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge LTO cartridge memory 4 Write protect Switch 2 Cartridge door H Label area Leader Pin 6 Insertion guide Data Cartridges The different generations of IBM Ultrium data cartridges can be identified by color Type Color Ultrium 4 Green Ultrium 4 WORM Green and Silvery gray Ultrium 3 Slate Blue Ultrium 3 WORM Slate Blue and Silvery gray Ultrium 2 Purple Ultrium 1 Black All generations contain 1 2 inch dual coat metal particle tape Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 6 1 You can order tape cartridges with the bar code labels included or you can order custom labels To obtain tape cartridges and bar code labels see Ordering Media Supplies on page 6 18 When processing tape in the cartridges Ultrium Tape Drives use a linear serpentine recording format The native data capacity and recording format of Ultrium data cartridges is as follows Type Native Data Capacity Recording Format Ultrium 4 800 GB 1600 GB at 2 1
63. a secure location for future reference 10 Install the Encryption Key Manager EKM application on your host Refer to the EKM documentation for detailed instructions refer to the EKM documents listed in Related Publications Choosing Drive s Interface Identification Settings 1 Click Drives in the left navigation pane Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 25 Drives Drive 1 Logical Library 1 Posen On Control Path Note SAS drives do not require user configuration ee m Power On Control Path poea Power On Control Path Port A Configuration isst Automatic v oa ee LN Port Loop ID 6 yv Port B Configuration Port not available a77ug095 Figure 4 27 The Configure Library Drive screen 2 Select the desired settings for each drive listed either SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel See Figure 4 27 3 Click one of the following e Refresh to update the current screen e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Note If you have a Fiber Channel Drive connected to an AS 400 Host direct attached to the Fiber HBA set the Port Type to L Port Entering Library Network Settings This page shows the current network configuration of the library and allows modification to the configuration When a change is requested a pop up box checks to confirm the changes 1 Click Network in the left navigation pane to display the Network page 4 26 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Set
64. active slot count by one A cleaning cartridge CLNxxxLx must be placed or moved to the reserved slot Auto Clean must be enabled Note Cleaning cartridges must be replaced after 50 cleanings The Web User Interface inventory screen will show the number of times the media has been loaded not the number of cleaning sessions remaining Subtract this number from 50 to determine the number of cleanings remaining T O Station s enabled The I O Station s can be enabled the default or disabled so the stations can be utilized as storage slots Remove DCS If the DCS has been removed it cannot be reinstated This option will no longer appear in the Operator Control Panel Host Label Length The Host Label Length is related to the Bar Code Labels appearing on the media being used The default value is 8 but 6 can also be chosen 5 22 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Configure Drive Drive Drive Interface m SAS drives SCSI ID A Speed do not require user configuration A Type A Address Mode A Loop ID Figure 5 15 Configure Drive menu The following items are in this menu Control Path a77ug042 e Drive Interface use this to assign a SCSI ID to a SCSI drive or to assign a Port Speed Port Type and Loop ID to a Fibre Channel drive SAS drives do not requi
65. all drives present in any drive positions and it will contain all four magazines Drive 4 Drive 4 Dive Element Address D 3 Element Address nve rive 259 Magazine Magazine Element Address A Element Address 95 2 Drive 3 258 Drive 3 Element Address Element Address 258 Drive 2 Drive 2 Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3 Element Address Element Address Drive 1 Drive 1 5 Element Address Element Address gt Front side Figure B 1 Configuration of a one partition system Configuration of a 2 Partition System A two partition system must have at least two drives installed One drive must be installed in either drive position 1 or drive position 2 and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4 Partition 1 will contain any Appendix B SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations B 3 drives in drive position 1 and drive position 2 Partition 1 will also contain magazine 1 and magazine 2 Partition 2 will contain any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4 Partition 2 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4 Drive 4 Drive 4 Drive 2 Element Address ee Element Address rive i i Element Address oie Element Address aed aa crt 256 rive 3 256 Drive 3 Element Address Element Address 256 256 Drive 2
66. and valid device sense data would be listed DETAIL DATA aabb Xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS aa Length of the Command Descriptor Block CDB sent by the host In this case 06 bytes bb SCSI target address In this example SCSI address 00 xx Unused or reserved cc Start of CDB cc is the operation code byte 0 In this case 12 which was an Inquiry E 2 SCSI Sense Data Library Error The following example of SCSI Sense Data was received from an RS 6000 Open System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look like Unlike the previous situation with SCSI Sense Data Definition this data contains valid sense data as defined by the hex 70 in the first sense byte position Therefore instead of all zeros as in the previous example we have valid data to rely on While the data shows that this is a TAPE_ERR2 it could also be caused by a library failure As described above the resource name is smc0 indicating a library error The ASC ASCQ points to a Mechanical Positioning Error while attempting a Move Medium command A5 For more information about Sense Data TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide consult your IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library SCSI Reference document LABEL TAPE_ERR2 IDENTIFIER 476B351D Date Time Fri May 04 42 26 DFT
67. cable Power cords Drive sled blue captive thumbscrews Black pull out tab Drive sled Soho ot tell Drive sled handle 5 If present remove the conductive tape from the drive sled refer to Figure 10 9 jon page 10 8 Loosen the blue captive thumbscrews J in Figure 10 6 on the drive sled Pull straight back on the drive sled handle QJ to remove it from the library see Figure 10 7 on page 10 6 If you are replacing the tape drive sled proceed to Installing a Tape Drive Sled for instructions If you are not replacing the tape drive sled immediately you will need to perform the following procedures a Install a drive cover plate to protect your library from dust and debris b To remove the Missing drive indicators on the Operator Control Panel Attention LED and the Web User Interface System Status screen modify or resubmit logical library setting Operator Control Panel Configure gt Logical Libraries or Web User Interface Configure Library gt Logical Libraries Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 5 a77ug027 Figure 10 7 Pulling the drive sled out of the library drive sled without ESD springs shown Installing a Tape Drive Sled Note Power OFF the library before installing a SCSI drive sled Fibre Channel and 1 2 3 SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while the library is powered ON Before installing the ne
68. cartridges can be inserted and taken out of a magazine while the library is in operation If the library contains an I O Station and you wish to import media follow these steps 1 Go to Main gt Control gt Open I O Station The I O Station will unlock itself 2 Pull out the magazine and insert a data cartridge s into the I O Station On a 2U library only 1 cartridge can be inserted at a time On the 4U library 3 cartridges can be inserted at one time 3 Close the door of the I O Station The library will automatically start an inventory The cartridges in the I O Station will be counted but unassigned until they are moved into storage slots desired data slots See Control Move Cartridges on page 5 17 or Move Media on page 5 39 4 Go to Main gt Control gt Move Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the Manage Librar for more information If the library does not have an I O Station all slots are assigned to storage and you wish to import media you will need to release a magazine and insert the cartridges manually following these steps 1 Go to Main gt Control gt Magazine Choose the desired magazine to unlock remove 2 Pull out the magazine and insert a data cartridge s into the empty slots 3 Push the magazine back into the library The library will automatically start an inventory 4 To move cartridges in the magazine once they are inserted go to Main gt Control gt Move
69. elevator home movement 07 Error during sled movement to rotation position 08 Error during rotation initialization get range failed 09 Error elevator init 0A Error during rotation to far position 0B Error first sled init move to sensor failed 0C Error during sled movement to rotation position 0D Error during rotation to drive position 0E Error slider init get range failed OF Error during slider forward movement 8 6 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 8 2 Sub error codes continued 10 Error gripper init get range failed 11 Error during slider home movement 12 Error during rotation to FAR position 13 Error sled init move to sensor failed 14 Error during sled movement check shipping lock 20 Error Inventory scan 21 Error during gripper close 22 Error slider home movement 23 Error during move gripper to scan pos 24 Error reading barcode label 25 Error during move sled to scan position 26 Error during move elevator to scan position 27 Error during sled preposition movement 28 Error Extra inventory scan 29 Error during closing gripper 2A Error slider preposition movement 2B Error during opening gripper 2C Error during sled movement up to sensor 2D Error slider preposition backwards movement 30 Error slot preposition 31 Error during sled movement in FLMoveRotation function 32 Comman
70. ensure that the incineration complies with all applicable regulations Ordering Media Supplies Table 6 6 on page 6 19 lists the cartridges and media supplies that you can order for the drive 6 18 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 6 6 Media supplies Supply Item Methods of Ordering 20 PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge with attached labels Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine Type 3589 Model 010 Specify the VOLSER characters that you want Order as part number 95P4443 color label or 95P4445 black and white label through an IBM authorized distributor Specify the VOLSER characters that you want 20 PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge without attached labels Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine Type 3589 Model 011 Order as part number 95P4447 through an IBM authorized distributor 5 PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge 20 PACK IBM Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM Tape Cartridge with attached labels Order as part number 95P4278 through an IBM authorized distributor Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine Type 3589 Model 032 Order as part number 95P4457 color label or 95P4459 black and w
71. equivalent Also lower the leveling pads to raise the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet R002 Product Recycling and Disposal This unit contains recyclable materials XX 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations IBM encourages owners of information technology IT equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed IBM offers a variety of product return programs and services in several countries to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products Information on IBM product recycling offerings can be found on IBM s Internet sites at http iuww ibm com ibm recycle us index shtml and http www ibm com ibm environment products index shtml Note This paragraph is also translated into Spanish as follows Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la normativa nacional o local aplicable IBM recomienda a los propietarios de equipos de tecnologia de la informaci n TI que reciclen responsablemente sus equipos cuando stos ya no les sean utiles IBM dispone de una serie de programas y servicios de devoluci n de productos en varios paises a fin de ayudar a los propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI Se puede encontrar informaci n sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de IBM en el sitio w
72. firmware level is equal to or lower than 73P5 and or the library firmware is equal to or lower than 1 95 For either or both of these two cases the device driver interface Data Path Failover key activation will still be required The Path Failover feature is available for select LTO 4 tape drives Path Failover is not supported for half high drives Service Menu The 2U 4U library is always online except for when the user enters the Service Library area A warning message appears stating that the library should be taken offline from the host before performing any Service functions It is up to the operator to ensure that it is taken offline by phoning the host operator or other means of communication Before performing any service functions ensure the host is not performing any data writing or retrieval The Service Menu contains the following items e Library Verify an overall library diagnostic e Run Tests other library diagnostics e Service diagnostics and procedures for servicing the drive e Display Contrast setting the display from light to dark Service Library Verify This is an overall diagnostic that exercises all library components To run the Library Verify test complete the following procedure Library Verify a77ug047 Figure 5 21 Service Library Verify menu 1 On the Operator Control Panel navigate to Service gt Library Verify and start diagnostic 2 When prompted by the Operator Control
73. for future reference 13 Install the Encryption Key Manager EKM application on your host Refer to the EKM documentation for detailed instructions refer to the EKM documents listed in Related Publications Configure Library Drives This page allows you to modify the current ID assigned to a SCSI or Fibre Channel drive This page allows any drive in the library to be powered off by de selecting the check mark in the Power On box The displayed information will vary depending on the library model and drive type SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel Table 5 19 ists all available elements on this page An X indicates that the element displays for the specified drive type Table 5 12 Drive Identity page elements Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI ID For each SCSI drive click on the drop down list X X and select the number of the slot in which the drive is located Power On For each drive click in the box to power ON the X X X X X X selected drive Control Path The control path drive communicates messages X X X X X X from the host to the library Select this option for each drive that you want to be a control path drive At least one drive in each logical library must be designated as a control path drive Port A Configuration 5 46 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 5 12 Drive I
74. gear H in Figure A 20 on page A 21 clockwise This rotates the threader motor worm gear J in Figure A 20 on page A 21 clockwise drawing the LBA into the cartridge A 20 1TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a82ru009 Figure A 20 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train Heo N O Loader motor worm gear 6 Threader mechanism gear Cartridge loader tray guide iever bearing Rotator stub 8 Loader mechanism gear Threader motor worm gear Threader intermediate gear As the tape leader block assembly LBA is secured in the cartridge you should hear the LBA retention spring clips click into place If you do not hear the click continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear J in Figure A 20 stops The LBA is in the correct position Note Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge by using a hex wrench as shown in Figure A 19 on page A 20 Notice the a Loader mechanism gear J in Figure A 20 nearest the front of the drive that actuates the cartridge loader mechanism b Position of the rotate stub J in Figure A 20 c Front loader motor worm gear J in Figure A 20 Rotating this gear allows the loader mechanism gear J in Figure A 20 to turn Rotate the loader motor worm ie E in Figure A 20 to turn the loader mechanism gear H in counterclockwise Con
75. glichkeit von Ger ten Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Ger ten EMVG Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU Richtlinie 2004 108 EG in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz iiber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit von Ger ten EMVG bzw der EMC EG Richtlinie 2004 108 EG fiir Ger te der Klasse A Dieses Ger t ist berechtigt in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG Konformitatszeichen CE zu f hren Verantwortlich fiir die Konformitatserklarung des EMVG ist die IBM Deutschland GmbH 70548 Stuttgart Generelle Informationen Das Ger t erf llt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement Attention This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take adequate measures Notices I 5 I 6 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Glossary This glossary defines the special terms abbreviations and acronyms that are used in this publication If you do not find the term you are looking for refer to the index or to the Dictionary of Computing 1994 Numbers 2 1 compression The relationship between the quantity of data that can be stored with compression as compared to the qua
76. have an LTO CM capacity of 4096 bytes 6 4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Bar Code Label A bar code label contains e A volume serial number VOLSER that is human readable e A bar code that the library can read Note The tape drive does not require bar code labels but you may choose to use labels for tape cartridge identification purposes Table 6 2 Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape drives and libraries Ultrium Tape Drive Library Bar Code Label Requirements 3573 Required 3576 Required 3580 Not required 3581 Required with optional Bar Code Reader 3582 Required 3583 Required 3584 Required When read by a library s bar code reader the bar code identifies the cartridge s VOLSER to the library The bar code also tells the library whether the cartridge is a data cartridge or cleaning cartridge In addition the bar code includes the two character media type identifier Lx where x equals 1 2 3 or 4 L identifies the cartridge as an LTO cartridge and the number represents the generation of cartridge for that cartridge type label for the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge Figure 6 3 on page 6 6 shows a sample bar code Tape cartridges can be ordered with the labels included or with custom labels To order tape cartridges and bar code labels see Ordering Media Supplies on page The bar code for usage in LTO tape libraries mus
77. in to your library s Web User Interface c Expand Service Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface d Click Upgrade Firmware e Browse to the new firmware level on your host then click Update Do this for both library and drive firmware if necessary 4 Install the MIB file on your SNMP server Refer to your server application documentation for instructions Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 19 Choosing General Library Settings If your library contains only one drive or lo settings will be combined into one table see gical library both general and specific Figure 4 20 on page 4 21 1 Expand Configure Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface 2 Click General and enter the following e Library Name Enter a name for your library e Library Mode select one of the following per logical library Random In random mode the library allows the server s host s application software to select any data cartridge in any order Sequential In sequential mode the library s firmware predefines the selection of the cartridges After initialization the firmware causes the library to select the first available cartridge found counting from the I O Station through the last slot in your library for loading into the drive Important If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than one drive only the first drive in the Logical Library will be
78. inspect all connectors on the drive sled Ensure that the connectors are intact free of any foreign objects and have no cracks deformed or bent contacts 2 Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot and align the connectors on the library while supporting the bottom of the drive sled see page 10 7 If necessary ensure that the black tab remains extended EJ in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 Push in on the drive sled handle J in lon page 10 5 while supporting the bottom of the drive sled until it is properly seated ET Important Damage to the connector pins may occur if this procedure is not followed 3 Tighten the captive thumbscrews W in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 until the drive sled is secure 4 If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs see Figure 10 4 on page 10 3 apply conductive tape to the sled as shown in Figure 10 9 on page 10 8 Note The small gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed to provide ESD protection 5 Install cover plates on any open drive slots in the library 6 Power ON the library 7 Run the Library Verify test Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify This test requires the use of a scratch blank cartridge e If the test passes When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I O Station opens remove the cartridge used in the test Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen Procee
79. library 4 38 populating library 4 38 Cartridges insert and remove 5 59 Cartridges repairing A 2 channel calibration 1 9 choosing a location 4 1 clean drive 5 53 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 cleaning slot 5 60 clearance 4 1 Configure menu network settings 4 17 configuring library using Web User Interface 4 16 configuring the library 4 15 control keys 5 8 control path drive 5 32 5 46 control path failover 3 2 5 43 control paths 5 23 multiple 3 2 multiple paths for iSeries and as 400 3 2 using multiple for control path failover 3 2 D daisy chaining 3 9 Data Cartridge 5 59 data transfer rate 1 6 DCS 5 60 dedicated cleaning slot B 2 default settings 5 25 description 1 1 desktop installation 4 1 Device drivers supported 1 12 DHCP 4 17 4 26 5 24 5 47 Diagnostics 5 56 display contrast 5 30 dll 4 34 7 13 Drive channel calibration 1 9 power management 1 9 speed matching 1 8 drive configuration 5 46 Drive Density 5 35 Drive Diagnostics 5 29 5 56 drive dump saving to host 5 55 drive firmware current version 5 32 drive interface 5 23 Drive Log 5 55 drive serial number 5 32 drive sled description 1 7 drive status 5 35 drive clean 5 53 E EC 5 15 ED 5 15 EKM 4 23 EKM Server Setting 4 23 element addresses 3 3 B 2 B 3 element addressing B 1 element types B 1 Encryption 1 5 4 23 environment 1 11 environment continued operating 1 11 particulates 1 11 environmental specifications 1 9 Error
80. on page 5 57 Bootcode This is the level of bootcode firmware currently installed on the library X X Firmware Bootcode is the firmware that allows the library to begin initialization Revision when it is powered ON IPv4 Address This is the Internet Protocol v4 Address assigned to your library X X Link local IPv6 This is the local IPv6 address assigned to your library X X address IPv6 static This is your library s IPv6 static assigned address X X assigned address Router discovery This is the IPv6 router discovery address assigned to your library X X IPv6 address MAC Address This is the machine s access code assigned to your library X X WWide Node This is the Worldwide Node Name assigned to your library X X Name Logical Library x The Extended Logical Libraries Information table displays information X X Library Mode about the logical libraries currently assigned in your library For each logical library in your library either Random or Sequential Loop Autoload will be displayed Library Identity Serial Number 7880368 Product ID 3573 TL Currently Installed 7 AH 2 70e Library Firmware Bootcode Firmware 0 50 Revision IPv4 Address 9 11 219 162 Link local IPv6 address FE80 20E 11FF FE10 6880 IPv6 static assigned 2002 90B E002 219 9 11 224 30 address Router discovery IPv6 2002 90B E002 219 20E 11FF FE10 68B0 address MAC Address 000E111068B0 WWide Node Name 2000000E111068B0 Extended Logical Library
81. one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 7 1 With the front of the drive facing you pull an arm s length of tape out of the take up reel from the left side of the drive 2 From the take up reel thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head and rollers on the left side of the drive 3 Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up 4 Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm 0 5 in of the tape end and feed it onto the supply reel inside the cartridge 5 From the bottom of the drive insert a 2 5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle a82ru008 Figure A 7 Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge A 8 6 Turn the supply reel clockwise allowing the moistened tape to adhere to the hub as it winds around the supply reel inside the cartridge 7 Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Ensure that you do not stretch the tape 8 Go tof Ending Procedure on page A25 Half high Drive Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel ATTENTION DO NOT TOUCH THE OUTER GUIDE RAIL H THIS RAIL IS VERY DELICATE AND EASILY DAMAGED Note If the ca
82. online since this test scrambles the cartridge slot locations Note After running the System Test or the Slot to Slot Test the library will need to be re inventoried Service Service Drives ee os Clean Drive Drive Tests Drive Power a77ug058 Figure 5 23 Service Service menu The following drive diagnostics and service procedures are available in this menu e Clean Drive The accessor takes the cleaning cartridge from the dedicated cleaning cartridge slot DCS or previously reserved slot if no DCS is available and inserts it into the drive After the cleaning is complete the accessor removes the cleaning cartridge from the drive and returns it to the dedicated cleaning cartridge slot or reserved slot Chapter 5 Operations 5 29 e Drive Tests Power On Self Test POST Wrap Test Normal Read Write Test Head Test Media Test Note The Operator Control Panel will display Wrap Test for libraries 4 5 containing SCSI and Fibre Channel tape drives Wrap A Test and Wrap B Test will be displayed for libraries containing SAS tape drives Run both wrap tests A amp B on SAS full high tape drives to test both SAS ports Run Wrap A test only on SAS half high tape drives as they only have one SAS port Navigate to the desired test Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Choose the drive if more than one is installed Follow the instructions displayed on the Oper
83. operating systems are supported It also gives requirements for adapter cards and tells how to configure hosts to use the device driver All of the above are with the Ultrium family of devices e IBM Tape Device Driver Programming Reference GA32 0566 supplies information to application owners who want to integrate their open systems applications with IBM supported Ultrium hardware The reference contains information about the application programming interfaces APIs for each of the various supported operating system environments e IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Quick Start Guide GA76 0420 gets you started with a basic configuration for encryption on LTO 4 tape drives e IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Introduction Planning and User s Guide GA76 0418 contains information to help you install configure and use the IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform e IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager V1 0 English publications may be downloaded from the following Web site Ihttp www ibm com software tivoli IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Quick Start Guide GI11 8738 IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Installation and Configuration Guide SC23 9977 e The IBM Publications Center http www ibm com shop publications order The Publications Center is a worldwide central repository for IBM product publications and marketing material with a catalog of 70 0
84. or when the cartridge format has been corrupted 15 Cartridge memory chip Set when a cartridge memory CM Replace the tape cartridge Appendix C TapeAlert Flags C 3 Table C 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive continued Flag Number Flag Description Action Required 16 Forced eject Set when you manually unload the No action required tape cartridge while the drive was reading or writing 17 Media loaded is Set when a cartridge marked as read No action required Read only format only is loaded into the drive The flag is cleared when the cartridge is ejected 18 Tape directory corrupted Set when the drive detects that the Re read all data from the tape to in the cartridge memory tape directory in the cartridge rebuild the tape directory memory has been corrupted 19 Nearing media life Set when the tape cartridge is nearing 1 Copy the data to another tape its specified end of life The flag is cartridge cleared when the cartridge is removed 2 Repl het trid fromthe diiy Replace the tape cartridge 20 Clean now Set when the tape drive detects that it Clean the tape drive needs cleaning 21 Clean periodic Set when the drive detects that it Clean the tape drive as soon as needs routine cleaning possible The drive can continue to operate but you should clean the drive soon 22 Expired clean Set when the tape drive detects a Re
85. pa page 5 3 5 7 Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Information Activity Menu Navigation Shortcuts Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info Slots number active Monitor gt Library gt Identity gt Active Slots Monitor Library gt Library Identity Slots number empty Monitor gt Library gt Status gt Slots Empty Monitor Library gt Library Status Slots reassign number of active reserving Configure gt Library Settings gt Active Slots Configure Library on Configure Library gt General SNMP modify settings Not available with this interface Configure Library gt Network Telnet Service Port activate Service gt Telnet Service Port Not available with this interface Time elapsed since power ON Monitor gt Library gt Status Monitor Library gt Library Status Library Librar Status on page Operator Control Panel access PIN enable disable Configure gt Set Access PIN Not available with this interface Web User Interface user access create or modify Not available with this interface Configure Library gt User Access Operator Control Panel Navigation 5 8 The four control keys on the front of a 2U or 4U library enable the user to navigate through the library settings and make changes
86. page 539 or Move the tapes from the drive s to the magazines using the Manage Library gt Move Media command Web User Interface or Control gt Move Cartridges command Operator Control Panel See Manage Library Move Media on Control Move Cartridges on page 5 17 Note Refer to Contacting IBM Technical Support on page 9 5 if a cartridge will not eject from the drive Use the magazine removal process to release the magazine and remove it from the library To use the Operator Control Panel see Control Magazine on page To use the Web User Interface see e Library Release Magazine If neither one of these processes works see Magazines Manually Releasing the Magazines Manually If the directions in steps 1 and 2 above do not allow you to remove the tapes do the following ie Unplug the power cord from the library 2 Find the access holes for the right and left magazines Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 9 1 Figure 9 1 Access holes for the left magazine 9 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide wo N Q D 5 Na N oO 4 N fo D Ej X N o Figure 9 2 Access holes for the right magazine 3 To manually release the magazines push the end of a straightened paper clip into the access hole for each magazine at the back of the library While holding the paper clip have a second pe
87. page 8 1 run Library verify Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify e If the test passes the Error LED will turn OFF e If the test fails cycle library power to turn the Error LED OFF To check the library error log log on to the Web User Interface and click Service Library then View Logs If the Operator Control Panel displays WARNING Unit Busy click OK to turn the error LED OFF FIRMWARE Determining current firmware levels Many problems can be resolved by a firmware upgrade Ensure that both the library and drive firmware are at the latest levels available Compare the firmware levels on the Operator Control Panel with the latest levels on the web site http www ibm com storage Library firmware Monitor gt Library gt Identity gt Version e Drive firmware Monitor gt Drives gt Identity select a drive gt Firmware Rev Update library firmware Refer to Update drive firmware or Service Library Upgrade Refer to Service Service Drives on Firmware on page 5 57 page 5 29 CARTRIDGE MOVEMENT PROBLEMS Cartridge placement problems Magazine slot prism fiducials NOT seated properly can result in gripper or slider error codes due to the fiducial interfering with the back edge of the cartridge Release and pull magazines out of the library for inspection To release the magazines using the Operator Control Panel navigate to Control gt Maga
88. page allows service personnel to set the error log mode to Continuous or to Stop trace at first error Logs amp Traces Error Log Mode Continuous O Stop Trace At First Error Stopped Trace Level Cmd Response Event Trace Data Low Level Recovered Trace Error Hard Error Trace Filter Main Drive CDE Interpreter Robotic Trace OCP Input ocp SCSI Module SDCI Module Output a77ug071 Figure 5 45 Configure Library Logs amp Traces page It is recommended that you select Continuous for the Error Log Mode so that all information for logs and traces will be captured Chapter 5 Operations 5 51 Note The trace level and trace filter selection options are only changeable by Service personnel Configure Library Event Notification This page allows the user to enter information for event notification When set up correctly Event Notification allows the library to send an email to a designated individual when the library is experiencing a problem Event Notification Notify Errors A On Notify Warnings Al On To Email Address xxxxx us ibm com SMTP Server Address IPv4 or 9 17 195 158 IPv6 Host name and domain Domain Name a77ug065 Refresh Submit Figure 5 46 Configure Library Event Notification page The following elements are displayed on the Event Notification page Notify Errors Select this item to be notified of library errors via email Notify Warnings Select this item to be not
89. part number 19P5941 to the replacement unit Please be sure to use the following procedures when replacing your 3580 or 3581 units Verify that the machine serial number on the failing unit matches the serial number reported to IBM technical support Transcribe the machine type model and serial number of the failing unit to the Repair ID tag for the replacement unit USE BALLPOINT PEN TO COMPLETE THE RID TAG Place the Repair ID tag as close as possible but not covering the machine serial number of the replacement unit The original serial number must be visible 2 The use of the Repair ID tag is important for customer inventory accuracy a77ug032 Figure 10 29 Proper placement of the Repair Identification RID Tag 6 Proceed to Retumning the Defective Library Returning the Defective Library 1 Remove the shipping label H in Figure 10 18 on page 10 18 and lock J from the rear panel of the defective library place the lock in the slot located in the top center of the library and secure with the shipping lock label This will secure the library accessor for shipping Fill out the Warranty Redemption card that was included with the replacement library enclosure Using the replacement library enclosure packaging materials securely package the defective library including the left and right magazines Library Controller Card and power supply removed from the replacement library enclosure and
90. performance of a product but is not essential for its basic work SR Service representative see also CE SRAM Static random access memory SS Status store SSL SSL or Secure Socket Layer is a cryptographic protocol that provide secure communications on the Internet for such things as web browsing EKM communication Internet faxing instant messaging and other data transfers This protocol allows applications to communicate across a network in a way designed to prevent eavesdropping tampering and message forgery ST Store standard feature The significant design elements of a product that are included as part of the fundamental product START Start maintenance subsystem A secondary or subordinate system usually capable of operating independently of or asynchronously with a controlling system SUPP Support syne Synchronous synchronize Occurring with a regular or predictable time relationship T tachometer tach A device that emits pulses that are used to measure check speed or distance tape cartridge A container holding magnetic tape that can be processed without separating it from the container tape void An area in the tape in which no signal can be detected TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCU Tape control unit Telnet See Telnet Service Port Telnet Service Port A network protocol used by service personnel under direction by support personnel to acc
91. persists go to Contacting IBM Technical Support oni page 9 5 13d Library Pick There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader picking a cartridge Retry from a drive or slot e No action needs to be taken at this time e If the problem persists go to Contacting IBM Technical Support on This flag is cleared when the next move command is received 14d Library Place There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader placing a cartridge Retry into a slot e No action needs to be taken at this time e If the problem persists go to Contacting IBM Technical Support oni This flag is cleared when the next move command is received 15d Drive Load There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader or drive when Retry placing a cartridge into a drive e No action needs to be taken at this time e If the problem persists go to Contacting IBM Technical Support on This flag is cleared when the next move command is received 17d Library I O There is a mechanical problem with the library media I O Station Station 18d Media It is set when a magazine is removed from the changer Changer 19d Library Library security has been compromised The door was opened then Security closed during operation 21d Media It is set when the changer is set offline Changer 24d Library The library has detected an inconsistency in its inventory Inventory Redo the library inventory to correct inconsistency e Restart the operation Check th
92. provide access to the two screws securing the sled to the drive brick Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 3 a77ug226 Figure A 2 Drive connection card showing screws and plastic cover Connection card screws Plastic cover Connection card Screws that hold the drive brick to the sled 2 on each side Signal cable Power cable BS ES ES oS RS 422 cable a Remove the three screws H securing the connection card E to the sled Remove the plastic cover H from the connection card c Carefully move the connection card to one side DO NOT UNPLUG ANY CABLES CONNECTED TO THE CARD 4 Remove the drive brick from the sled by performing the following steps a Remove the four screws two on each side of the sled J that secure the sled to the drive brick A 4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a77ug228 Figure A 3 Half high drive with the connection card moved to the side showing the screws b Carefully pull the drive brick out of the front of the sled far enough to unplug the signal cable SCSI Fibre Channel or SAS J p Va c HE CATCHER aiiz esy NTH a77ug227 Figure A 4 The drive brick showing the cables to be unplugged c With the signal cable unplugged carefully pull the drive brick out so that the power cable f and the RS 422 cable J can be accessed and unplug
93. refer to the distances that are supported by the HBA If the library attaches to a switch the supported distances are e For a 50 micron cable 1 Gbit link speed up to 500 m 1640 ft 2 Gbit link speed up to 300 m 984 ft 4 Gbit link speed up to 150 m 492 ft e For a 62 5 micron cable 1 Gbit link speed up to 175 m 574 ft 2 Gbit link speed up to 150 m 492 ft 4 Gbit link speed up to 70 m 230 ft Using Zoning to Isolate Devices and Enhance Security For security reasons it is important to limit the devices that a server or servers can recognize or access Also some performance configurations and SAN configurations can result in a device being seen multiple times from the same server For example if you have two HBAs from the same server connected to an Ultrium Tape Drive in the library the drive will be detected and appear as two logical devices That is there will be two special files for one physical device Zoning can address these issues 3 10 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Zoning allows you to partition your SAN into logical groupings of devices so that each group is isolated from the other and can only access the devices in its own group Two types of zoning exist hardware zoning and software zoning Hardware zoning is based on physical fabric port number Software zoning is defined with a World Wide Node Name WWNN or World Wide Port Name W
94. replacement library enclosure the library will automatically restore the VPD on the replacement library enclosure from the Library Controller Card If a VPD Selection message is displayed in the Operator Control Panel see the Read Me before Continuing section earlier in this procedure to determine how to respond to the message 3 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 4 Proceed to Swapping Cartridge Magazines on page 10 23 b If power ON is not successful 10 22 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 1 The Error LED J in Figure 10 22 will turn ON This indicates that the Library Controller Card from the defective library is not functioning properly 2 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 3 Refer to IBM Technical Support for further instructions a77ug230 Figure 10 22 Library front panel LEDs Ready Activity LED green Attention LED amber Clean Drive LED amber 4 Error LED amber Swapping Cartridge Magazines 1 Manually release and remove all magazines from the defective library and from the replacement library enclosure To release and remove a cartridge magazine a Find the access holes for the right and left magazines see Figure 10 23 on page 10 24 and Figure 10 24 on page 10 25 Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 23 Figure 10 23 Access hole for the left ma
95. sensor not found 9A Rotation home sensor not found 9B Sled position sensor fiducial sensor not found 9C Gripper range out of specification 9D Slider range out of specification 9E Elevator range out of specification 9F Rotation range out of specification AO Sled range out of specification Al Open I O Station Import Export Element failed BO Robotic controller response timeout A command did not complete in the required amount of time Bl NACK not acknowledged received from robotic controller B2 Accessor controller communication failed Chapter 8 Error Codes 8 3 Table 8 1 Main Error Codes continued Error Code Description User Action B3 Accessor controller urgent stop due toa 4 Verify that the left and right magazines are completely released magazine inserted then retry operation 2 Refer to Isolating a Library Controller Card vs B4 Cartridge did not transport completely Accessor Enclosure Problem on page 7 12 Possible Replacement CRUs B5 Accessor controller does not respond on E pa Lib oaan Primary Library Enclosure e Secondary Library Controller Card CO Network initialization failed 1 Refer to Isolating Web User Interface Problems oni C1 Telnet Interface initialization failed C2 Webserver initialization failed 2 If the error recurs refer to Contacting IBM Technical C6 Ping command did not reach tar
96. service functions ensure the host is not performing any data writing or retrieval Service Library Clean Drive This page allows the user to clean the tape drive After the requested drive is cleaned the screen will be greyed out If you want to clean another drive click on the Navigation bar Service Library Clean Drive in the left column of your screen to activate the Clean Drive screen and select another drive Click on Clean Note If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present or if a cleaning cartridge is present but not in a reserved slot Auto Clean status on the Web User Interface Status screen will show Chk Media Rsvd Slot and Status will show a green check mark and the words Media Attention Chapter 5 Operations 5 53 Clean Drive aoe Pree O D s a77ug122 Figure 5 48 Service Library Clean Drive page Service Library Advanced Diagnostics for Service Personnel Only This menu is for use by IBM Authorized Service Personnel only Refer to a Drive Dump to Flash Memory on page A 25 Service Library View Logs This page allows the library logs to be viewed after entering the following e Log Type Error Trace Logs all the error messages Informational Trace Logs all the informational messages created as the library operates Warning Trace Logs all warning messages created by the library Warning messages will not stop a library s operation but does remind th
97. service if a service contract is not in place Note Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together When updating to the latest firmware verify that all installed components such as tape drive s and library are at the latest levels noted on the Support web site Mixing different levels of library and tape drive firmware is not supported and may cause unpredictable results Chapter 5 Operations 5 57 This page displays the current library and drive firmware versions Firmware can be downloaded to the host then uploaded to the drive in the library by using this page In the first line you can see the actual loaded firmware revision or level installed on the drive Click Browse to choose the firmware file you have downloaded from the web site the web site is ies eevenribon cont ctsraveleup port on the first drive you want to update You can not update 2 drives at the same time Be sure you choose the correct firmware for your drive type After pressing the Update button the file will be sent to the drive and the drive will be upgraded Note During the update no host drive action is possible The drive update takes approximately 5 minutes The system status panel in the right of the browser window will change from update to ready Upgrade Library Firmware Currently Installed 3 05 Library Firmware Library Firmware File Browse Update Upgrade Drive 1 Firmware Drive Firmware 73P0
98. systems supported 1 11 operation specifications 1 9 Operator Control Panel Access PIN 4 32 Configure Restore Defaults 5 25 control keys on front panel 1 1 display 1 1 menu tree 5 10 Monitor menu Drive 5 13 Library 5 11 power ON display 2 2 Operator Control Panel menus Configure Drive 5 23 Configure Library 5 20 P packaging materials 4 2 partitioning 3 3 4 21 B 3 partitioning your 4U library 5 42 path failover 4 22 5 27 physical specifications 1 9 power button 1 1 2 4 power connector 1 3 power management 1 9 power ON display 2 2 power source 4 1 power specifications 1 9 power supply A 1 Power Supply Problem 7 8 product ID 5 31 PTF 4 34 7 13 Q Quiesce 5 56 R rack installation 4 1 4 6 rack mounting the library 4 6 rack requirements 4 1 RAID controllers 3 7 Read Write capability 6 2 rear panel of library 1 3 Remove replace procedures 10 1 reserve slot active slot 5 60 Reserved Slots 4 20 RFC Request for Comments 1 5 Router assigned IPv6 address 5 11 S Safety inspection procedure xvii SAS interface 3 9 screens displayed at power ON 2 2 SCSI interface 3 7 bus termination 3 9 connectors and adapters 3 9 description 1 7 multiple buses 3 8 physical characteristics 3 8 SCSI LVD 3 7 3 9 SCSI Trade Association Web site 3 9 Sense data using D 1 sense data library D 1 sequential mode starting 5 20 sequential mode stopping 5 20 serial number 5 31 serial number drive 5 32 Serial Port 1 3
99. the drive is LUN 0 and the library is LUN 1 These models require an HBA that supports LUN scanning which must be enabled at the HBA Refer to ie 5 Operating Systems and Cable Connections Ensure that there are no bent pins on cables and that all connections are securely fastened Fibre Channel Tape Support Ensure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the HBA if you are installing a library with a Fibre Channel drive SCSI Cable Length Ensure that the maximum cable length is not over 25 meters 82 ft for a single device on the bus or 12 meters 40 ft for multiple devices Internal SCSI length within the library accounts for 2 ft SCSI Termination Verify proper termination on both ends of the SCSI bus Refer to SAS Cables and Interposers Ensure that SAS Cables and Interposers if any are properly attached Refer to Connecting the Host Interface Cable on page 12 Backup Application Installation Refer to the documentation included with your backup application software for instructions on how to verify proper installation Device Driver Installation Ensure that the proper device driver if applicable is installed for the library Note Many backup applications use their own drivers for the library and drive Before installing a driver make sure it will not be in conflict with the software Contact your Backup Application vendor for this information Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 7 Libra
100. the hex wrench clockwise Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 13 a82ru008 Figure A 13 Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge 7 Turn the supply reel clockwise carefully guiding the mended portion of the tape to wind around the hub of the supply reel located inside the cartridge Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut The tape must remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Ensure that you do not stretch the tape 8 Go to Ending Procedure on page A 25 Half high Drive Tape Broken in Mid tape 1 With the front of the drive facing you pull an arm s length of tape out of the takeup reel From the takeup reel thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head rollers on the left side of the drive Note If there is less than approximately 5 cm 2 in of tape on the takeup reel 2 From the supply reel inside the cartridge pull approximately 0 3 m 1 ft of tape 3 Ensure that the tape is not twisted Untwist the tape if required 4 Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm 0 5 in of the tape end Overlap the tape ends loosely mending them together 5 Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up 6 Turn the supply reel Ef clockwise carefully guiding the mended portion of the tape to wind around the hub of the supply reel locat
101. to OSP wiring An external Surge Protective Device SPD is not required for operating this library This product can be installed in a network telecommunication facility or location where the NEC applies XX V TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Preface This manual contains information and instructions necessary for the installation operation and service of the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Note The IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library is a customer installed unit The customer is responsible for the setup and maintenance of the tape library The customer will be charged for service if a service contract is not in place Related Publications Refer to the following publications for additional information To ensure that you have the latest publications visit the web at http www ibm com storage IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Getting Started Guide GA32 0546 provides installation information e IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library SCSI Reference GA32 0547 provides supported SCSI commands and protocol governing the behavior of SCSI interface e IBM Tape Device Driver Installation and User s Guide GC27 2130 provides instructions for attaching IBM supported hardware to open systems operating systems It indicates what devices and levels of
102. to safety agency requirements These unused parts will be removed from the replacement library enclosure and sent back to IBM installed in the defective library The old parts currently in your defective library will be removed and installed into the replacement library enclosure Note To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment e observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual material handling e obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during installation or removal Minimum Installation Time 1 hr Minimum Number of Persons Required 2 Recommended Tools 2 Phillips screw driver paper clip blank or scratch data cartridge Preparing the Defective Library for Replacement 1 If possible use the Operator Control Panel to unload any drives that contain a cartridge Control gt Move Cartridges 2 Power OFF the defective library 3 Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the defective library 4 If the defective library is rack mounted remove the two screws f in Figure 10 15 on page 10 16 from the front of the defective library anchoring the mounting brackets on the library to the rack With assistance remove the defective library from the rack Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 15 a77ug112 Figure 10 15 Removing the two mounting bracket screws anchoring the library to the rack one screw on each side of the library 5 Place th
103. to your call Ah oe For the European Union For Taiwan Please recycle batteries FRE 32h Bk Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006 66 EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide and accumulators The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont tiquet s conform ment aux directives europ ennes 2006 66 EC norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs us s Les directives d terminent la marche suivre en vigueur dans l Union Europ enne pour le retour et le recyclage des batteries et accumulateurs us s Cette tiquette est appliqu e sur diverses batteries pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas tre mise au rebut mais plut t r cup r e en fin de cycle de vie selon cette norme AyvFY HSUMANY FU BONY e Viclst EU MBH SREREFRS HS 2006 66 EC DIAWAGEENTHEFT COBB Ny TF VU EBBM BE URRY TF U EBEMICMT SLOTS COHBIZ RAAANYTI ERE HORRE VY DILOBFEEHTUSLOT EU HEl HtkoCMHASHET IOSA WAAAH ot ERSTER MEET DDED E EMSC
104. transfer element full 53h 02h Library media removal prevented state set 53h 03h Drive media removal prevented state set 44h 80h Bad status library controller 44h 81h Source not ready 44h 82h Destination not ready 44h 83h Cannot make reservation 44h 84h Wrong drive type 44h 85h Invalid slave robotic controller request 44h 86h Accessor not initialized Unit Attention 06h 28h 00h Not ready to ready transition 28h 01h Import export element accessed 29h Olh Power on occurred 29h 02h SCSI Bus reset occurred 29h 05h Bus type changed to Single Ended SE 29h 06h Bus type changed to Low Voltage Differential LVD 2Ah Olh Mode parameters changed 2Ah 10h Time stamp changed 3Bh 13h Medium magazine inserted 3Fh Olh Microcode has changed 53h 02h Media removal prevented Appendix D Sense Data Table D 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description Command Aborted OBh 3Fh OFh ECHO buffer overwritten 43h 00h SCSI message error 47h 00h SCSI parity error 49h 00h SCSI invalid message 4Eh 00h Overlapped command attempt Drive Sense Data LTO Ultrium 4 drives contain hardware which performs user data write encryption and read decryption protecting all user data written to the medium from unauthorized use provided it is integrated into a secure system design Table D 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4
105. were derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication equipment Attention This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take adequate measures European Community contact IBM Technical Regulations Pascalstr 100 Stuttgart Germany 70569 Tele 0049 711 785 1176 Fax 0049 0 711 785 1283 e mail tjahn de ibm com People s Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement piE A RHE AR ZAA AA HAAR i EARP Pm RSE MA TH THLE OT RRA PTR ROSCA IT AEE Taiwan Class A compliance statement AAG FA REFR RRA D gt E Fie fz Ee E Ak AL HT A Oe RAAT HE AS UF gt RAACRE RARLULMFUOHR taiemi Notices I 3 Taiwan Contact Information IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info IBM Taiwan Corporation 3F No 7 Song Ren Rd Taipei Taiwan Tel 0800 016 888 IBM pe th alee co B ES Pa Se BR as Ae i AR E SJETE Na HETA 34 0800 016 888 Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement TOREJ HHRMBRESERESRTMABBS VCCI 0R I BOC VIAARMRNEE CT raed A ee ae Ee RME Se SERIO TCEMBVES COMBAIMSRABMBISMHREBT Ok IER SENECEMHVET Industry Canada Compliance Statement This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conform la norme NMB 003 du Ca
106. 0 drive information 4 25 event notification 4 31 general library information 4 20 logging on 4 18 logs and traces 4 30 user access information 4 29 Web User Interface menus Configure Library User Access 5 50 World Wide Node Name WWNN 3 6 World Wide Port Name WWPN 3 6 worldwide node name 5 31 WORM Write Once Read Many 6 3 Write Once Read Many see WORM 6 3 Index X 3 X 4 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Machine Type 3573 Publication No GA32 0545 07 We appreciate your comments about this publication Please comment on specific errors or omissions accuracy organization subject matter or completeness of this book The comments you send should pertain to only the information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented For technical questions and information about products and prices please contact your IBM branch office your IBM business partner or your authorized remarketer When you send comments to IBM you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you IBM or any other organizations will only use the personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state o
107. 0 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Attention If your library originally contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot and was removed it can only be reinstated by restoring factory default settings To enable automatic cleaning of the drives when needed a slot must be reserved a cleaning cartridge must be present in the reserved slot and Auto Clean must be enabled Reserving Slots Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any particular logical library Slots are reserved beginning with the last available slot in the last magazine of the library A cleaning cartridge in a reserved slot is available to any logical library drive even if the reserved slot is not in that logical library Typically if the library contains multiple logical libraries the last logical library is chosen for the reserved slot containing the cleaning cartridge As with a library with a single logical library this slot is the last physical slot in the library top right magazine uppermost rear slot To reserve a cleaning slot follow these steps e To reserve slots in your library go to the Web User Interface at Chapter 5 Operations 5 61 5 62 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media To ensure that your IBM Ultrium Tape Drive conforms to IBM s specifications for reliability use only IBM LTO Ultrium tape cartridges
108. 0 or higher this blocker can be removed by following the procedure below a77ug167 Figure 10 10 2U Magazine with Slot Blocker Completely remove the magazine from the library The power does not have to be turned off 1 In the upper right cell locate the slot blocker E 2 Remove the slot blocker a From behind the magazine push a screwdriver or a pen through the hole b Pop the slot blocker out of the cell 10 10 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a77ug168 Figure 10 11 Popping the Slot Blocker out of the Cell 3 4 5 Slide the magazine back into the rack After the accessor runs through the inspection a REMOVE SLOT RESTRICTION message will appear on the main menu screen Choose the YES option You can replace the empty cell with a data cartridge Replacing a Power Supply 1 Power OFF the library by pressing and holding down the power button for 4 seconds Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source then from the library Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply located on the back panel of the library Pull on two of the thumbscrews to pull the unit away from the rear panel of the library then grasp the top and bottom edge of the power supply and pull it out of the library Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 11 ee sa SO gt SY 00 oe a por yas SorsoH er Sn parte
109. 00 items Extensive search facilities are provided Payment options for orders are via credit card in the U S or customer number for 20 countries A large number of publications are available online in various file formats and they can all be downloaded by all countries free of charge Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 XXV XXVi TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 1 Product Description The IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library 2U library and the IBM System Storage TS3200 Tape Library 4U library provide compact high capacity low cost solutions for simple unattended data backup The 4U library houses up to 48 tape cartridges or 45 and an elective 3 slot I O Station in a compact 4U form factor with easy access to cartridges via four removable magazines The 2U library houses up to 24 tape cartridges or 23 and an elective 1 slot I O Station in a compact 2U form factor with easy access to cartridges via two removable magazines The fourth generation of the Ultrium series of products is available with interfaces to suit your needs a Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI Fibre Channel interface FC or Serial Attached SCSI interface SAS Front Panel Q Q D 5 Na N oO a77ug115 Figure 1 2 Front panel of a 4U library Table 1 1 on page 1 2 below contains front panel descriptions for both the 2U Figure 1 2 library in and the 4U library in
110. 05 2008 8 1 Error Codes Errors described in this section are hard errors If such an error occurs the library stops all operations and the Error LED starts blinking An appropriate message will be posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface These errors are also reported via email notification if enabled To enable email notifications refer to Configure Library Event Notification on page 5 52 Table 8 1 Main Error Codes Error Code Description User Action 80 Bar code reader Error cannot initialize BCR 81 Bar code reader Error no response from BCR 82 EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Error no response from EEPROM located on accessor controller Refer to Isolating a Librar Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page 7 12 Possible Replacement 83 Accessor controller generic problem CRUs 84 Setting of gripper motor parameters e Primary Library Enclosure failed e Secondary Library Controller Card 85 Setting of slider motor parameters failed 86 Setting of elevator motor parameters failed 87 Setting of rotation motor parameters failed 88 Setting of sled motor parameters failed 89 Gripper blocked 1 If this is the first time the library has been powered ON or if it has been moved to a new location ensure that 8A Slider blocked the shipping lock has been removed The lock is located on the top see Removing
111. 2 Maite Mie ite M ma iun Ot orda a66mi096 Figure 10 12 A power supply being removed from a 2U library 5 Remove the packaging from the replacement power supply 6 Grasp the top and bottom edge of the power supply and push it into the library 7 Tighten the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply located on the back panel of the library 8 Connect the power cord to the library then to the electrical source 9 Power ON the library using the power button on the front panel 10 Run the Library Verify test refer to Service Library Verify on page 5 28 11 Package the failed power supply in the same packaging in which the new power supply was shipped to you and return to IBM Fill out the Warranty Redemption form and return it in the package with the power supply Replacing a Library Controller Card Read Me before Continuing The Library Controller Card contains a copy of the vital product data VPD for your library The VPD contains your current library configuration A backup copy of this VPD is contained within the electronics of the Library Enclosure When the Library Controller Card is replaced the new replacement card should contain zeros 0 s in key VPD locations Upon detection of these zeros the library will automatically attempt to write VPD data to the new Library Controller Card from the backup copy of the VPD contained in the Library Enclosure In rare occurrences the new Library Controller
112. 2 Timeout while loading tape 93 No activity after load command 94 Timeout drive Unload 95 Drive terminated unsuccessfully 96 Tape not ejected at robot unload 97 Slot not free at robot unload 98 Cartridge not seated in load phase Warning Events Warning events described in this section are reported via email notification The Attention LED will blink when warning events for the following occur e Media e Fan e Redundant power supply An appropriate message will be posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface Chapter 8 Error Codes 8 9 Table 8 3 Warning Events 30 SCSI transport element full 31 SCSI all slots empty 32 SCSI invalid opcode 33 SCSI invalid element address 34 SCSI invalid field in CDB 35 SCSI Invalid drive specified 36 SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command invalid test number 37 SCSI invalid LUN 38 SCSI parameter list length error 39 SCSI parameter list error invalid field 3A SCSI parameter list error parameter not supported 3B SCSI parameter value invalid 3C SCSI saving parameters not supported SCSI invalid ID message SCSI destination element full Refer to your host application documentation for problem determination information 3F SCSI source slot or drive empty 40 SCSI wrong checksum 41 SCSI command sequence error 42 SCSI dri
113. 200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Match the index number that is beside each plug to the C D N Co 0 EH a77ug005 20 Figure 11 1 Types of Receptacles Chapter 11 Optional Features Replacement Parts and Power Cords 11 7 11 8 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel Internal View of Library Important FOR REFERENCE ONLY The customer is not authorized to remove the top cover of the library No customer serviceable components are inside the library a77ug026 Figure A 1 Internal view of the library Table A 1 Internal view description Number Item Description Right cartridge e Ina 2U library the right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges magazine s e Ina 4U library the right magazines can hold up to 24 cartridges A Left cartridge In a 2U library the left magazine can hold up to 11 cartridges and houses magazine s the elective 1 slot I O Station e Ina 4U library the left magazines can hold up to 21 cartridges and houses the elective 3 slot I O Station Accessor This component contains the library robot and bar code reader The accessor moves cartridges to from the following e I O Station e storage slots e tape drive s 4 Library Controller
114. 25E MTAPCLN CPP6400 UF100871C 00000000 O2A0 D7D7F1F8 F5C600D5 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000009 00000000 PP185F N 00000000 O2CO 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 C3D7D7F6 F3FOC3D5 00000000 02E0 F6F3C1FO FOF3F5FO FOFOFOFO FOFOFOFO FOFOFOFO FOFIF9F7 F8FOFOF7 0000E8D5 00000000 0300 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 E ENDL OUR C O MAUTE R PER TINTO UTE ehei ees A E 6 T53100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps Note For additional information refer to Table F 1 SNMP Status Events Event Trap ID Definition Status Change 1 Library status has changed Door Open 2 Library door has been opened Mail Slot Accessed 3 Library I O Station has been accessed Fault Posted 4 Library has posted a hard fault error Request Drive Clean 5 Drive has requested a clean Drive Error 6 Drive has reported an error Loader Retries Excessive 7 Library has reported excessive load retries Loader OK 8 Library has resumed normal operations Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 F 2 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Appendix G Library Configuration Form Use this form when planning your library configuration Keep this document in a secure location and update it when changes are made to the libr
115. 2A 01 Mode Parameters Changed The Mode parameters for the drive have been changed by an initiator other than the one issuing the command 2C 00 Command sequence error 2C OB Not reserved The OIR bit of the sequential access device page is set and the I T nexus attempting to communicate with the drive does not hold a reservation 2F 00 Commands cleared by another initiator 30 00 Incompatible Media Installed A write type operation could not be executed because it is not supported on the cartridge type that is loaded 30 01 Unknown Format An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge in the drive is of a format not supported by the drive 30 02 Incompatible Format An operation could not be completed because the Logical Format is not correct 30 03 Cleaning Cartridge Installed An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge in the drive is a cleaning cartridge 30 05 Cannot write medium incompatible format 30 07 Cleaning Failure A cleaning operation was attempted but could not be completed for some reason 30 0C Data Protect WORM overwrite attempted The drive rejected a write operation because it would have resulted in an overwrite Overwrite is not allowed on WORM media 30 OD Medium Error WORM integrity check The drive rejected a Read or Write operation because the cartridge is a suspicious WORM cartridge 31 00 Media format corrupted Data could not be read because the forma
116. 2U Magazine with Slot Blocker 10 10 Popping the Slot Blocker out of the Cell 10 11 A power supply being removed from a 2U library 10 12 A Library Controller Card being r m v d from the library 10 13 Magazine fiducial s 10 14 Removing the two mounting bracket screws anchoring the library to the rack one screw on each side of the library 10 16 Foot pads installed on the bottom of the library enclosure 10 17 Removing the shipping label and jock from the top of the library and storing on the rear panel 10 18 Library shipping lock and label storage location on the real panel of the library 10 18 Removing a drive sled from the library drive sled without ESD springs shown 10 19 Drive sled taping diagrams 10 20 Removing a Library Controller Card fom the library 10 22 Library front panel LEDs 10 23 Access hole for the left magazine facing rear of library 10 24 X TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 10 24 10 25 10 26 10 27 10 28 10 29 11 1 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 Access hole for the right magazine facing rear of library Left magazines pulled oui af a 4U library facing front of library A power supply being removed iom a library Mounting brackets and anchors for securing the library in a rack one bracket and anchor on each side of the library Front view of a rack showing the rai
117. 4 27 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 31 4 33 4 35 4 36 4 36 4 37 4 37 4 38 4 38 ae 5 11 5 12 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 16 5 17 5 17 5 18 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 25 5 27 5 28 5 28 5 29 ix 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 47 5 48 5 49 5 50 5 51 5 52 5 53 5 54 5 55 5 56 6 1 6 7 Service Service menu 5 29 Service Display Contrast menu 5 30 The 4U library Monitor Library Library Identity page 5 32 The 4U library Monitor Library Drive Identity page showing one SAS 1 one SCSI drive 2 and one Fibre Channel drive 3 ar 5 34 The 4U library Monitor Library Library Status page 5 35 The 4U library Monitor Library Drive Status page f 5 37 The 2U library Monitor Library Inventory page 5 38 The 4U library Monitor Library Inventory page 5 39 Manage Library Move Media page 5 40 Manage Library Perform Inventory page 5 40 Manage Library Release Magazine page 5 40 The 4U library Configure Library General and Extended page 5 42 The 4U library Configure Library Logical Libraries page A 5 43 The 4U library Configure Library Path Failover page 5 43 Path Failover license verification page 5 43 Feature Act
118. 5 Choosing Your Configuration Methodi 4 15 Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration 4 16 Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface 4 16 Configuring Your Library using ihe Operator Control Panel be 433 Preparing the Host 4 34 Verifying the Connection 4 34 Cartridge Magazines 4 35 Populating the Library with Data Cartridges 4 38 Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge 4 39 Registering for My Notification 4 40 vV Chapter 5 Operations 5 1 Chapter 8 Error Codes 8 1 Operator Control Panel Navigation 5 8 Operator Control Panel Menu Tree 5 10 Chapter 9 Service Procedures 9 1 Monitor Menu a a a 2 2 ee Od Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots 9 1 Control Menu gt a a 1 ee ee S16 Releasing the Magazines Manually 9 1 Configure Menu o 518 JBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool TDT 9 4 Service Menu o a a 4 5 28 Contacting IBM Technical Support 9 5 Web User Interface Men s Se oe Ao ae 658380 Monitor Library Menu 5 31 Chapter 10 Check Adjat jules Manage Library Menu 5 39 Configure Library Menu wo ew BAL and Replace Bm ee T 10 1 Service Library Menu 5 53 Tools Required A ha e poao e aop e a IOI Import and Export Media during Normal Library Electrostatic Discharge 10 1 Operation 5 59 Relocating Your Library 10 1 C
119. 5 Slot 6 256 Slot 29 Slot 28 Slot 27 Slot 26 17 4099 4100 4101 0x100 4124 4123 4122 4121 0x11 0x1003 0x1004 0x1005 0x101C 0x101B 0x101A 0x1019 T O Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 25 Slot 24 Slot 23 Slot 22 16 4096 4097 4098 4120 4119 4118 4117 0x10 0x1000 0x1001 0x1002 0x1018 0x1017 0x1016 0x1015 Library Partitioning and Element Addressing Library 4U systems with firmware versions of 1 70 and higher and containing at least 2 drives have the ability to configure two logical libraries create two partitions This partitioning has been expanded with the new library firmware and half high drive integration Now it is possible to configure 1 2 3 or 4 partitions in the 4U library Additionally the 2U library can now be configured into one or two partitions Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library partition B 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Partitioning of 2U Libraries When two half high drives are installed in a 2U library the library firmware will support partitioning in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two full high drives today The first partition will contain the first magazine and the first drive The second partition will contain the second magazine and the second drive The I O station if configured as I O will be shared as is done with the partitioned 4U library One ful
120. 5858 Ultrium 3 Half High LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled 95P5859 Ultrium 3 Half High SAS Tape Drive Sled 45E0657 Library Controller Card 95P6037 250 W Power Supply can be used in both 2U and 4U libraries is a replacement for an 2U library 80w power supply 23R7170 Foot Pads 23R5841 SCSI Terminator 23R5840 SCSI Wrap Tool 12R9314 Fibre Channel Wrap Tool 23R3841 2 5 m VHDCI HD68 SCSI Cable 23R3594 4 5 m VHDCI HD68 SCSI Cable 23R3593 10 m VHDCI HD68 SCSI Cable 95P4587 2 m SAS Mini SAS 1x Cable 39M5700 5 m LC LC Fibre Channel Cable 12R9559 13 m LC LC Fibre Channel Cable 39M5701 25 m LC LC Fibre Channel Cable 95P4588 5 5 m SAS Mini SAS 1x Cable 95P4488 2 m Mini SAS Mini SAS 1x Cable 95P4494 5 5 m Mini SAS Mini SAS 1x Cable 95P5933 SAS Mini SAS 4x Interposer 95P5177 Mini SAS Mini SAS 4x Interposer 95P6566 SAS Wrap Tool 11 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 11 2 Replacement Parts continued Part Number Description 23R9679 Library Enclosure 2U 23R9629 Library Enclosure 4U 23R6471 Left Cartridge Magazine 2U 23R6452 Right Cartridge Magazine 2U 4U 23R7175 Lower Left Cartridge Magazine 4U 23R7174 Upper Left Cartridge Magazine 4U 23R7172 Block Out Panel Power Supply 4U 23R7173 Block Out Panel Full High Drive Bay 4U 95P6720 Half High Drive Filler Plate 2U 4U 45E2709 Half High Drive Blockout Back Plate Tier 2 CRUs Power
121. 7 Provide Proper Acclimation and Bavinonindital Complenne the installati fth pleting the Installation of the E inspediion an e ss Replacement Library Enclosure 10 28 Handle the Cartridge Carefully gt gt 6 10 Returning the Defective Library 10 29 Examples of Cartridge Problems 6 10 P Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin 6 11 Chapter 11 Optional Features Repositioning a Leader Pin 6 1 Replacement Parts and Power Cords 11 1 Reattaching a Leader Pin 6 13 Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Appendix A Information for Trained Tape Cartridges ooa ee CT Service Personnel A1 Disposing of Tape Cartridges woe ee ee 618 Internal View of Library ee AA Ordering Media Supplies 6 18 Manual Cartridge Removal Pro edur ms at Ge be a A 2 Ordering Bar Code Labels 6 20 Recommended Tools o s s 2 A 2 Before You Begin A2 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 1 Beginning Procedure a a A3 Installation Problems i amp 76 al Removing the Drive Brick fom the Sled S o A Library Recovery Problem Determination 2 7 8 Removing the Drive Cover A 6 Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems 7 8 Full high Drive Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel A 7 Isolating a Power Supply Problem 7 8 Half high Drive Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel A 8 Isolating Drive Sled Pro
122. 818F SCSI Command in this case Move Medium Byte 0 of Library Sense Data Valid Data Sense Key in this case Hardware Error ASC ASQQ additional sense code additional sense code qualifier in this case a Cannot Find Slider Block error SCSI Sense Data Drive Error The following example of SCSI Sense Data was received from a RS 6000 Open System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look like Like the SCSI Sense Data in Example 1 this Sense Data example contains Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host E 3 valid sense data as defined by the hex 71 in the first sense byte position Therefore we have valid data to rely on While the data shows that this example is a TAPE_ERR2 it could also be caused by a library failure Further review of the ASC ASCQ Media load or eject failed points more to a problem with the media or the drive Also note that the FSC listed was F402 which is a timeout while attempting to load drive 2 For more information about the Sense Key and ASC ASCQ fields refer to the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library SCSI Reference document Tiel TAPE_ERR2 D IDENTIFIER 476B351D Date Time Wed May 09 07 51 42 DFT Sequence Number 1669 Machine ID 0046083B4C00 Node ID risc4 Error Class H Error Type PERM Resource Name rmtd Resource Class tape Resource Type LTO Location P1 1 13 Q1 W5003013D38321011 LO VPD Manu
123. 8L9129 to correctly seat the pin see Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin on Then immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data loss 6 10 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 3 Review media handling procedures Example Improper Placement of Leader Pin see Figure 6 8 on page 6 12 The leader pin is misaligned Perform the following steps 1 Look for cartridge damage 2 Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit part number 08L9129 to correctly seat the pin see Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin Then immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data loss Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin Attention Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to another cartridge Continued use of a repaired cartridge may void the warranties of the drive and the cartridge If the leader pin in your cartridge becomes dislodged from its pin retaining spring clips or detaches from the tape you must use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit part number 08L9129 to reposition or reattach it Do not reattach the pin if you must remove more than seven meters 23 feet of leader tape The sections that follow describe each procedure Attention Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to another cartridge Continued use of a repaired cartridge may void the warranties of the
124. BOM also causes this flag to be set It is also set on an attempt to read or space past EOD or if an attempt is made to space into Beginning of Media 5 The Illegal Length Indicator ILI flag Byte 2 bit 5 is set if a Read or Verify ended because a block was read from tape that did not have the block length requested in the command 6 The Information Bytes Bytes 3 5 are only valid if the Valid flag is set This occurs only for current errors and not for deferred errors 7 The Field Replaceable Unit field Byte 14 is set to either zero or to a non zero vendor specific code indicating which part of the drive is suspected of causing the failure 8 The Clean CLN flag Byte 21 bit 3 is set if the drive needs cleaning and clear otherwise 9 The Volume Label Fields Valid VolValid bit Byte 21 bit 0 is set if the Volume Label being reported is valid 10 The Volume Label field Bytes 22 28 reports the volume label if a cartridge is loaded in the drive and Volume Label Fields Valid is set 11 The Current Wrap field Byte 29 reports the physical wrap of the tape The least significant bit reflects the current physical direction A 0 Appendix D Sense Data D 13 means that the current direction is away from the physical beginning of the tape A 1 means that the current direction is towards the physical beginning of the tape 12 Relative LPOS fields Bytes 30 33 reports the current physical position on the tape 13 SCSI Add
125. C 79 F 26 C 79 F temperature Note 1 The short term or operational storage environment is for storage durations of up to six months 2 The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to ten years Disposing of Tape Cartridges Under the current rules of the U S Environmental Protection Agency EPA regulation 40CFR261 the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge is classified as non hazardous waste As such it may be disposed of in the same way as normal office trash These regulations are amended from time to time and you should review them at the time of disposal If your local state country non U S A or regional regulations are more restrictive than EPA 40CFR261 you must review them before you dispose of a cartridge Contact your account representative for information about the materials that are in the cartridge If a tape cartridge must be disposed of in a secure manner you can erase the data on the cartridge by using a high energy ac degausser use a minimum of 4000 oersted peak field over the entire space that the cartridge occupies The tape should make two passes through the field at 90 degree orientation change for each pass to achieve complete erasure Some commercial degaussers have two magnetic field regions offset 90 degrees from each other to accomplish complete erasure in one pass for higher throughput Degaussing makes the cartridge unusable If you burn the cartridge and tape
126. Card This component is a customer replaceable unit CRU and stores the user configuration information or vital product data VPD Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 A 1 Table A 1 Internal view description continued Number Item Description Tape drive sled Both libraries support the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive Each tape drive in the library is packaged in a container called a drive sled The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit CRU and is designed for easy removal and replacement e The 2U library houses one full high tape drive sled or up to two half high tape drive sleds e The 4U library houses up to two full high tape drive sleds or up to four half high tape drive sleds Combinations of full high and half high drive sleds are allowed Power supply The power supply is a customer replaceable unit CRU and the sole source of power for the library The 2U has one power supply The 4U has one or can have an optional second power supply for redundancy Manual Cartridge Removal Procedure Attention It is strongly recommended that the drive and tape be returned to IBM for removal and recovery If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY COPY data i e there is no backup eject commands issued at the host fail to unload the tape and power cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Cal
127. Control Panel of the Library The drive portion of the Operator Control Panel Display will contain any drive error codes Therefore there is no need to open the Library to access the buttons on the drive as described in this chapter See the Setup Operator and Service Guide for a complete description of the Operator Control Panel functions and Displays TapeAlert is a standard that defines status conditions and problems experienced by devices such as tape drives autoloaders and libraries The standard enables a server to read TapeAlert messages called flags from a tape drive via the SCSI bus The server reads the flags from Log Sense Page 0x2E This library is compatible with TapeAlert technology which provides error and diagnostic information about the drives and the library to the server Because library and drive firmware may change periodically the SNMP interface in the library does not require code changes if devices add additional TapeAlerts that are not supported today However should this occur the Management Information Block MIB is written to minimize impact to the SNMP monitoring station At the time of this writing the TapeAlert flags in this appendix correctly represent TapeAlerts that will be sent The MIB file should not be taken to mean that all traps that are defined in the MIB refer to Appendix F SNMP Status MIB will be sent by the library or that they will be sent in the future This appendix lists TapeAlert fla
128. Cords To avoid electrical shock a power cord with a grounded attachment plug has been provided Use only properly grounded outlets Table 11 3 lists the power cord part number feature code the country or region where the power cord can be used and the plug s standard reference The last column in the table contains an index number that you can match to a specific receptacle type in Figure 11 1 on All power cords use an appliance coupler that complies with the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard 320 Sheet C13 If the power cord that you receive does not match your receptacle contact your local dealer Power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter s Laboratories UL are certified by the Canadian Standards Association CSA and comply with the plug standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA For other worldwide geographies plug standards are listed in Table 11 3 Table 11 3 Power Cords Description Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 11 1 FC and Part Number Reference on page 11 7 PN US Canada NEMA 5 15P Aruba Bahamas Barbados 1 e 28 m 125V Bermuda Bolivia Brazil Canada Cayman Islands FC 9800 Colombia Costa Rica e PN 39M5081 Curacao Dominican Republic Ecuador El Salvador Guatemala Guyana Haiti Honduras Jamaica Japan Liberia Mexico Netherlands Antilles Nicaragua Panama Per
129. Diagnostics Library firmware level must be greater than 6 3 Path Failover for one activation key for LTO 4 Tape Drives No minimum level of both Control Path Failover and Data Path firmware is required Failover LTO 3 Tape Drives Drive firmware must be greater than 73P5 Library firmware must be greater than 1 95 Secure Socket Layer SSL over Encryption Library firmware must be 6 3 or higher Key Manager EKM Accessing Online Technical Support For online Technical Support for your Library visit http www ibm com support Registering for My Notification My Notification registration provides email notification when firmware levels have been updated and are available for download and installation To register for My Notification 1 Visit the web at http www ibm com us 2 Click Get support 3 Click My support Note Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together When updating to the latest firmware verify that all installed components such as tape drive s and library are at the latest levels noted on the Support web site Mixing different levels of library and tape drive firmware is not supported and may cause unpredictable results Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 iii Sending Us Your Comments Your feedback is important in helping IBM provide accurate and useful information If you have comments or suggestions for improving this publication send your c
130. ED is illuminated when either a cleaning requested or a cleaning required flag has been issued by the drive The LED is turned off after a successful drive cleaning operation e The Attention LED indicates one of the following conditions Problem Action Required Bad media 1 Go to Monitor gt Inventory to locate the defective cartridge 2 Move the defective cartridge to the I O Station Operator Control Panel Control gt Move Cartridges 3 Open the I O Station to remove the defective cartridge Operator Control Panel Control gt Open T O Drive sled issues Do one of the following Install a drive sled see Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled on page 10 3 Modify or resubmit Logical Library setting Operator Control Panel Configure gt Logical Libraries or Web User Interface Configure Library gt Logical Libraries Restore defaults Operator Control Panel Configure gt Restore Defaults or Web User Interface Configure Library gt Restore Defaults Redundant power supply failed Complete the following steps 1 Replace the failed power supply see Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 11 2 Cycle library power Power supply fan failure Replace the power supply e The Error LED is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable i e hard drive or library failure This will happen at the same time the hard error message is displayed on the screen
131. Hardware POST or Module Failure Sense Key 5 Illegal Request EE 00 Encryption Key Service Not Enabled EE 01 Encryption Key Service Not Configured EE 02 Encryption Key Service Not Available EE 10 Encryption Key Required EE 20 Encryption Key Count Exceeded EE 21 Encryption Key Alias Exceeded EE 22 Encryption Key Reserved EE 23 Encryption Key Conflict EE 24 Encryption Key Method Change EE 25 Encryption Key Format Not Supported EE 26 Encryption Unauthorized Request dAK EE 27 Encryption Unauthorized Request dSK EE 28 Encryption Unauthorized Request eAK EE 29 Encryption Authentication Failure EE 2A Encryption Invalid RDKi EE 2B Encryption Key Incorrect EE 2C Encryption Key Wrapping Failure EE 2D Encryption Sequencing Failure EE 2E Encryption Unsupported Type EE 2F Encryption New Key Encrypted Write Pending EE 30 Encryption Prohibited Request EE 31 Encryption Key Unknown EE 32 Encryption Keystore Related Problem EE 42 Encryption EKM Challenge Pending EE E2 Encryption Key Translation Disallowed EE FF Encryption Security Prohibited Function EF 01 Encryption Key Service Not Configured 26 11 Encryption Incomplete Key Associate Data Set 26 12 Encryption T10 Vendor Specific Reference Key Not Found 55 08 Encryption T10 Maximum Number of Supplemental Keys Exceeded D 10 153100 Tape Lib
132. I O station slots Sustained native data transfer rate Ultrium 4 Full High Drive 120 MB s Ultrium 4 Half High Drive 120 MB s Drive types Ultrium 4 Full High Drive SCSI Fibre Channel SAS Ultrium 4 Half High Drive SAS Interfaces Ultra160 SCSI LVD 4 Gb s Fibre Channel 3 Gb s SAS Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization y vary aep 8 g Table 1 8 Operation Specifications Ultrium 3 Library with Ultrium 3 drive s 2U library 4U library hia sens Maximum number of data cartridges 24 Maximum number of data cartridges 48 nite Native 9 6 TB Native 19 2 TB i ade Compressed 19 2 TB 2 1 compression Compressed 38 4 TB 2 1 compression Number of slots 24 including I O Station 48 Including 3 I O station slots Sustained native data transfer rate Drive types Ultrium 3 Full High Drive 80 MB s Ultrium 3 Half High Drive 60 MB s Ultrium 3 Full High Drive SCSI Fibre Channel Ultrium 3 Half High Drive SCSI Serial Attached SCSI SAS Interfaces Ultral60 SCSI LVD 4 Gb s Fibre Channel 3 Gb s SAS Environmental Specifications Table 1 9 Environmental Specifications Temperature Operating 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Storage without cartridges 30 to 60 C 22 to 140 F Wet bulb operating 26 C 79 0 F maximum 1 10 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup
133. IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library tl Setup Operator and Service Guide Machine Type 3573 GA32 0545 07 IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library tl Setup Operator and Service Guide Machine Type 3573 GA32 0545 07 Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information under Notices on page Elin the IBM System Storage TS3100 and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide To ensure that you have the latest publications visit the web at http www ibm com storage This edition applies to the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide GA32 0545 07 and to the subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005 2008 US Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Read This First Minimum Firmware Levels for Common Library Features Table 1 Minimum Firmware Levels for common Library features Feature Minimum Firmware Level s Required Dedicated Cleaning Slot removal Library firmware level must be greater than 1 95 Encryption Library firmware level must be 4 0 or greater Drive firmware level must be 74H4 or greater Key Path
134. Important Some HBAs such as RAID controllers do not support LUN scanning Host Interfaces The 2U library and the 4U library can be attached to servers using the following interfaces e SCSI LVD Ultrium 160 Serial Attached SCSI SAS e Fibre Channel Table 3 1 Host Drive Interface Support Drive SCSI LVD Ultra 160 SAS FC Ultrium 3 FH X X Ultrium 3 HH X X Ultrium 4 FH X x X Ultrium 4 HH X Note Dual Port SAS SCSI Interface Note Although the LVD hardware in the library is capable of operating in single ended SE mode SE operation is not recommended The library supports SCSI LVD attachments by using SCSI cables with 68 pin HD connectors SCSI adapters must be properly terminated Before installing the SCSI cables inspect all cables for damage Do not install a cable if it is damaged Report the damage immediately by contacting your place of purchase The maximum allowable length of your bus cabling depends on the type of SCSI bus that you use LVD e For a server with an LVD SCSI bus Use a maximum system to device cable length of 10 m 33 ft when attaching to the host interface board SCSI and one or two daisy chained drives Use a maximum system to device cable length of 5 m 17 ft when attaching to the host interface board SCSI and three to six daisy chained drives Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 7 Note For maximum performance it is recommend
135. Informations Logical Library 1 Library Mode Random Logical Library 2 Library Mode Sequential Loop Autoload Logical Library 3 2 Library Mode Random 3 Logical Library 4 2 Library Mode Sequential Loop Autoload 3 Figure 5 25 The 4U library Monitor Library Library Identity page Monitor Library Drive Identity This page provides the following detailed information about the drive No changes can be made from this page The displayed information will vary depending on the library model and drive type SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel Table 5 7 on page 33 5 32 153100 Tape Lib TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide lists all available elements on the Drive Identity page An X indicates that the element displays for the specified drive type Table 5 7 Drive Identity page elements Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library SCSI Fibre SAS_ SCSI Fibre SAS Vendor ID This identifies the manufacturer of the tape drive X X X X X X Product ID This is the SCSI inquiry string of the tape drive X X X X X X Serial This is the unique identification number of the tape X X X X X X Number drive that was assigned by the manufacturer Firmware This is the current level of firmware installed on the X X X X X X Revision drive To ensure you are running the latest version of firmware visit http www ibm com For information on updating your firmware refer to Upgrade Firmwa
136. Library Foot Pads for Desktop Installation ONLY Important Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads may damage your library or cause it not to function properly Six foot pads must be installed on the bottom of the library before the library can be used as a desktop unit To install the library foot pads 1 Being very careful lay the library on its side 2 Peel the adhesive from the back of each foot pad 3 Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing each foot into one of the six areas F as shown in the figure below a77ug085 Figure 4 2 Installing foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure 4 4 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 4 Carefully return the library to an upright position Important Do not place any objects on top of the library Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock Important The shipping lock which prevents the library accessor from moving during shipment must be removed before the library is powered ON The shipping lock is held in place with a label and is located in the top center of the library After the shipping lock is removed it should be stored on the right side of the back panel of the library for future use To remove and store the shipping lock 1 Remove the blue label B that is are the lock Ml to the top of the library then remove the lock see Figure 4 3 a77ug018
137. M Medium Set when the drive rejects a write Append the information on a Overwrite attempted operation because the rules for WORM tape cartridge or write the allowing WORM writes have not been data to a non WORM cartridge met Data can only be appended to WORM media Overwrites to WORM media are not allowed C 6 T53100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Appendix D Sense Data When a drive encounters an error it makes sense data available You can use IBM device drivers to examine the sense data and determine errors Instructions for downloading installing and properly configuring the IBM device drivers are available in the IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide The IBM device drivers may conflict with some commercial software applications unless properly configured To avoid conflicts on Windows operating systems refer to your device driver s procedures for setting the driver to manual startup mode For applications that use Open Systems device drivers that are provided by IBM for example AIX Sun Solaris HP UX Windows 2000 Linux and Windows 2003 the Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide contains information about how to obtain sense data after an error has occurred If your application uses other device drivers see the appropriate documentation for those drivers to obtain the sense data Raw sense data as returned from the drive
138. M Technical Support for the Service password 2 Expand Service Library and click Advance Diagnostic 3 Select the drive that has failed then select Write Drive Dump to Flash To determine which drive has failed refer to the Web User Interface System Status screen 4 Click Execute to write the drive dump to flash memory Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 25 Accessing the Library using Telnet To access a customer s library using telnet complete the following procedure 1 ONAar ON 11 12 Ask the library administrator to enable the serial port Operator Control Panel Service gt Telnet Service Port Open a Command Prompt screen Enter telnet library IP address then press the Enter key FLMON gt will display Enter h then press the Enter key for the limited command menu Enter lgi then press the Enter key Enter service as your Username then press the Enter key Enter the service Password then press the Enter key Contact your next level of support for the password Enter help then press the Enter key for the expanded command menu To end the telnet session enter lgo then press the Enter key to log out of the library Enter exit then press the Enter key to disconnect from the library Inform the library administrator that your telnet session has ended and instruct the administrator to reboot his library to disable telnet capabilities to the library A 26 TS3100 Tap
139. Network Mask This address defines and limits users within a local network d Gateway address This address allows access outside the local network Enter IPv6 settings if applicable a Enable DHCP Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the DHCP server If you are not using a DHCP server leave unchecked and enter the appropriate information for the IP Address Network Mask and Gateway Address b Enable Stateless Auto Config Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the library host computer Leave unchecked and enter the appropriate information for the static assigned IP Address prefix length and Gateway Address c Static Address Enter the assigned IPv6 address The format of an IPv6 IP address is a 128 bit numeric address written as 8 groups of four numbers separated by colons d Prefix length The default prefix length is set to 64 but can be set to any length depending upon the address used e Gateway address This address allows access outside the local network Enter SNMP settings Note For more information on SNMP refer to and SNMP Messaging on page Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps on page Chapter 5 Operations 5 49 Enabled If you desire to have SNMP traps sent to an IP address of your choosing place a check in this box Target 1 IP Address If SNMP traps are enabled enter an IP a
140. Operator and Service Guide Table 1 9 Environmental Specifications continued Temperature shock immunity maximum rate of change 10 C 18 F per hour Miscellaneous Dust concentration less than 200 microgram cubic meter Altitude operating 2500 meters 8200 ft at 25 C ambient Maximum acoustical noise sound power levels LwAd in bels 6 6 6 8 Humidity Operating 15 to 80 RH non condensing Storage without cartridges 10 to 90 RH non condensing Product Environment The library is designed to operate in a general business environment The library meets the acoustical requirements for general business area category 2D Category 2D states that the library should be installed a minimum of 4 m 13 ft from a permanent work station To allow for service access install the library a minimum of 0 9 m 3 ft from all obstacles The library is a precision computer peripheral To ensure maximum longevity of your library locate the library away from dust dirt and airborne particulates e Keep the library away from high traffic areas especially if the floor is carpeted Carpeting harbors dust and people walking on the carpet can cause the carpet fibers and the dust to become airborne e Keep the library out of printer copier rooms because of toner and paper dust Additionally do not store paper supplies next to the library e Keep the library away from moving air caused by doorw
141. P Access PIN Disabled If OCP Access PIN has been enabled the default PIN is 1234 SSL for Web Disabled Drives Power Power On All drives Drive 1 SCSI ID 4 SCSI Drives Drive 2 SCSI ID 5 SCSI Drives Drive 3 SCSI ID 6 SCSI Drives Drive 4 SCSI ID 8 SCSI Drives Drive 1 Loop ID 4 FC Drives Arbitrated Loop Drive 2 Loop ID 5 FC Drives Arbitrated Loop Control Path Drive Drive 1 only Speed Auto FC Drives all Topology LN Port FC Drives all IPv6 Stateless Autoconfig Off Note all settings at library firmware level 4 xx and greater In some cases such as Library Mode the entry of one option precludes any other options from being selected In such cases the details of the non applicable options are not shown Configure Set Date and Time Use this menu item to set the current date and time in your library Set Date and Time a77ug046 Figure 5 19 Configure Set Date and Time menu Configure Path Failover Use this menu item to enter the Path Failover Feature Activation key 4U library only Chapter 5 Operations 5 27 Path Failover a77ug119 Figure 5 20 Configure Path Failover Path Failover is a combination of two previous features Control Path Failover key entered at the library user interface and Data Path Failover key entered at the device driver interface A single activation key entered at the library user interface now activates both features unless the LTO 3 drive
142. Panel display and the I O Station opens insert a blank or scratch data cartridge 3 Close the I O Station by pushing it back into the library 4 While the test is running the Operator Control Panel will display library status e If the test PASSES resume normal library operations 5 28 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide e If the test FAILS an error code will be displayed Make note of the error then refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting on page 7 1 5 When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I O Station opens remove the cartridge used in the test 6 Close the I O Station by pushing it back into the library 7 Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen Service Run Tests Service Run Tests a77ug048 Figure 5 22 Service Run Tests menu The following library diagnostics are available in this menu e System Test this test exercises library components by moving customer data cartridges from slots to drives and back to slots No data is written or read from the customer tapes To run this test successfully the library must contain at least one data cartridge for every drive present in the library e Slot to Slot Test The Slot To Slot test will move each resident data cartridge from one slot to another for each test cycle requested When completing the Slot To Slot test you will need to Inventory your library before placing it back
143. Present 2 Left Magazine This displays whether the upper left magazine is Present or Not X Present 2 Right Magazine This displays whether the upper right magazine is Present or Not X Library Status At 10 07 25 Library Time Status O Ready Cartridge In Transport None Number Of Moves 1145 Total Power On Time 42d 17h 25min Accessor Status Ready 1 Left Magazine Present 1 Right Magazine Present 2 Left Magazine Present 2 Right Magazine Present Figure 5 27 The 4U library Monitor Library Library Status page Monitor Library Drive Status a77ug092 This page provides the following detailed dynamic information about the drive in the library No changes can be made from this page The displayed information will vary depending on the library model and drive type SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel Table 5 9 lists all available elements on the Drive Status page An X indicates that the element displays for the specified drive type Table 5 9 Drive Status page elements Menu Item Status Description 2U Library 4U Library SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI This is the current status of the drive A X X X X checkmark indicates that the drive is operating properly An exclamation point indicates that the drive is operating but has a problem An X indicates that the drive is not operational because of a serious problem Fibre X SAS X Cartridge in Drive This is the serial
144. Pv4 only IPv6 only or IPv4 amp IPv6 If you do not want to select DHCP as your library network setting skip this step and proceed to the next step If you want to select DHCP as your library network setting complete the following steps a Press the SELECT button to highlight the DHCP field b Press the DOWN button to select ON c Press the SELECT button to apply your selection d Skip to Step 7 Press the DOWN button to select IP Address For IPv4 only enter only an IPv4 address For IPv6 only enter only an IPv6 address For IPv4 amp IPv6 enter an Pv4 address and an IPv6 address a Press the SELECT button to highlight the IP Address field b Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit s of your library s IP Address c Press the SELECT button to highlight the next digit s in your IP Address d After entering the final digits press the SELECT button to apply your entries Press the DOWN button to select Netmask For IPv4 enter only an IPv4 Netmask address For IPv6 enter only an IPv6 Netmask address For IPv4 amp IPv6 enter both IPv4 and IPv6 Netmask addresses a Press the SELECT button to highlight the Netmask field b Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit s in your library s Netmask address c Press the SELECT button to highlight the next digit s in your library s Netmask address d After entering the final digit s in your Netmask address press the SELECT button to apply y
145. Reads and writes data on 896 compression tracks sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 3 400 GB 800 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 704 compression tracks sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 2 200 GB 400 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 512 compression tracks eight tracks at a time Ultrium 1 100 GB 200 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 384 compression tracks eight tracks at a time The first set of tracks sixteen for Ultrium 4 and 3 eight for Ultrium 2 and 1 is written from near the beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape The head then repositions to the next set of tracks for the return pass This process continues until all tracks are written and the cartridge is full or until all data is written The cartridge door H protects the tape from contamination when the cartridge is out of the drive The tape is attached to a leader pin behind the door When the cartridge is inserted into the drive a threading mechanism pulls the pin and tape out of the cartridge across the drive head and onto a non removable take up reel The head can then read or write data from or to the tape The write protect switch J prevents data from being written to the tape cartridge For more information see Write Protect Switch on page 6 7 The label area provides a location to place a label For more information see Bar Code Label on page 6 5 The insertion guide f is a large notched area that prevents the
146. Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled on page 10 3 Take this action if the tape is stuck in the drive 1 Attempt to unload the tape from the drive using the host backup application that is currently using the drive or using the remote or local UI 2 56 Unload Failure When attempting to unload a tape 1 Unload the cartridge from the cartridge a drive hardware drive using the Operator Control malfunction can prevent the tape from Panel Control gt Move being ejected The tape may actually Cartridge or the Web User be stuck in the drive Interface Manage Library gt Move Media 2 Cycle drive power using the Operator Control Panel Service gt Service gt Drive Power or the Web User Interface Configure Library gt Drives 3 Try unloading the cartridge from the drive again using the Operator Control Panel Control gt Move Cartridge or the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Move Media 4 If the cartridge will not unload from the drive go to Contacting IBM Technical Support on page 9 5 Appendix C TapeAlert Flags C 5 Table C 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive continued Flag Number Flag Description Action Required 59 WORM Medium Set when the drive determines that 1 Copy the data to another integrity check failed the data on tape is suspect from a WORM tape cartridge WORM point orien 2 Discard the old WORM tape 60 WOR
147. SCSI bus Attach the terminator El in Connecting the Host Interface Cable on to the remaining SCSI connector on the back panel of the library if the library is the last or only device on the SCSI bus Otherwise attach one end of a SCSI cable to the remaining port and the other end to the next device on the SCSI bus Make sure that the last device on the SCSI bus is properly terminated Note Cables and terminators supporting Ultra160 should be used Note The host bus adapter should be LVD SCSI A single ended SE SCSI host bus adapter will work but will severely degrade performance and limit cable length If there are any SE devices on the same SCSI bus the entire SCSI bus will negotiate down to SE speed and severely degrade performance e For a Fibre Channel library connect the host interface cable to the host or to a switch If an SC to LC interposer is required refer to Installing a Fibre Channel Interposer Feature Code 5096 on page 4 14 e For a SAS library connect the drive using a host interface cable to the host HBA or to an interposer as required You can connect to either ports if you have a dual port configuration Unused SAS connectors do not need termination Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 13 4 Plug the network ethernet cable H in Connecting the Host Interface Cable lon page 412 n page 4 12 into the ethernet port on the back panel of the library If the ethernet con
148. SEOILBLONYFYU ICRMSNTUET In accordance with the European Directive 2006 66 EC batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery Pb for lead Hg for mercury and Cd for cadmium Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste but use the collection framework available to customers for the return recycling and treatment of batteries and accumulators Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances For proper collection and treatment contact your local IBM representative Spain This notice is provided in accordance with Royal Decree 106 2008 of Spain The retail price of batteries accumulators and power cells includes the cost of the environmental management of their waste Perchlorate Material California Special handling may apply See http www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for more information The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations Title 22 Division 4 5 Chapter 33 Best Management Practices for Perchlorate Materials This product part may include a lithium manganese dioxide battery which contains a perchlora
149. U and 4U library firmware will generally retry failed operations up to three times before posting a failure to complete the operation or in some situations proceeding with an operation that can be completed in an alternative manner Linear Tape Open LTO A type of tape storage technology developed by the IBM Corporation Hewlett Packard and Certance LTO technology is an open format technology which means that its users will have multiple sources of product and media The open nature of LTO technology enables compatibility between different vendors offerings by ensuring that vendors comply with verification standards The LTO technology is implemented in two formats the Accelis format focuses on fast access the Ultrium format focuses on high capacity The Ultrium format is the preferred format when capacity rather than fast access is the key storage consideration An Ultrium cartridge has a compressed data capacity of up to 800 GB 2 1 compression and a native data capacity of up to 400 GB Link local address An address having link only scope that can be used to reach neighboring nodes attached to the same link All interfaces have a link local unicast address Linux A Unix like computer operating system using a Linux kernel liquid crystal display LCD A low power display technology used in computers and other I O devices loadable Having the ability to be loaded LME Library Managed Encryption LTO c
150. WPN While zoning can be reconfigured without causing an outage some zoning configurations can become complicated The advantage of the library s WWNN implementation is that you can avoid the exposure of introducing zoning errors because you do not have to change the zoning configuration if a drive needs service or replacement Attention It is recommended that tape storage devices be connected on a separate HBA from disk storage devices to avoid potential configuration incompatibilities Fibre Channel Host Environment The library is supported by a wide variety of servers hosts operating systems and adapters These attachments can change throughout the product s life cycle To determine the latest supported attachments visit the web at http www ibm com storage Sharing on a Storage Area Network With Storage Area Network SAN components the possibilities for connecting multiple systems and multiple drives have increased Not all software and systems are designed to share drives Before you install a drive that would allow two systems to share it check that the systems and their software support sharing If your software does not support sharing note that Fibre Channel switches have a zoning capability to form a SAN partition For systems that do not cooperate use zoning to prevent the systems from sharing the same drive You can remove zoned partitions as you upgrade software and system levels Chapter 3 Installation Plann
151. a configuration file that was saved with the D9 No SCSI IC detected same version of firmware currently installed in the library DA aie mina y pray Pa 1 Refer to Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems on page e bar code reader read different bar 7 13 code data for the same F 2 If the error recurs refer to Contacting IBM Technical customer supplied scratch cartridge label z Support on page 9 5 E0 Incompatible magazine detected 1 Remove magazine from library 2 Insert magazine in library If error recurs refer to Contacting IBM Technical Support on page 9 5 FO Drive Over temperature Condition 1 Check the ambient temperature conditions and check The subcode indicates which drive is all tane affected 2 Refer to Isolating Drive Sled Problems on page 7 10 Example Subcode 02 drive 2 8 4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 8 1 Main Error Codes continued Error Code Description User Action F1 Drive Communication Error Library controller has lost communication to drive The subcode indicates which drive is affected Example Subcode 02 drive 2 F2 Drive Sled not present The subcode indicates which drive sled is affected Example Subcode 02 drive sled 2 F3 Drive Hardware Error The subcode indicates which drive is affected Example F3 xy Where x refers to the hardware drive error co
152. ables and terminators connected to the library Remove the library from the rack if necessary Remove the shipping label H and lock F from the rear panel of the library Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 10 1 a77ug019 Figure 10 2 Shipping Lock and Label Storage Location 6 Insert the shipping lock into the slot located on the center of the top of the library and secure with the shipping label H a77ug018 Figure 10 3 Shipping Lock and Label 7 Pack the library in its original packaging materials or equivalent packaging for moving or shipping Table 10 1 Shipping Lock Shipping Label Shipping Lock 2 Shipping Label 10 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled There are two types of drive sleds in a TS3100 library 2U library and a TS3200 library 4U library The contents of the ship groups are specific to the type of drive sled e Drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge ESD springs see Figure 10 4 ship group Drive sled without ESD springs Packet of conductive tape to be applied to the drive sled for ESD protection e Drive sled with ESD springs see Figure 10 5 on page 10 4 ship group Drive sled with ESD springs a77ug008 Figure 10 4 Library drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge ESD springs SCSI sled shown Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Repla
153. ached to one host While the Ultrium 4 Full high drive is dual ported and can be attached to a maximum of two hosts the intention of the second port is for redundancy for failover rather than sharing Sharing between these two hosts is limited to active passive cluster failover LAN free drive sharing is not supported Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 SAS drive sleds use the SFF 8088 connection at the drive sled end and SFF 8088 or SFF 8470 at the host adapter end Initially only point to point connections are supported Fibre Channel Interface Fibre Channel allows for an active intelligent interconnection scheme called a Fabric to connect devices Everything between the ports on Fibre Channel is called the Fabric The Fabric is most often a switch or series of switches that takes the responsibility for routing The library allows the selection of the following Fibre channel port behaviors e LN Port default setting an automatic configuration that tries arbitrated loop first then switched fabric e L Port arbitrated loop e N Port point to point protocol in a switched fabric topology Cables and Speeds Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Fibre Channel tape drives use LC duplex fiber optics cables The maximum distances that the library supports on a Fibre Channel link is determined by the link speed the type of fiber 50 micron or 62 5 micron and the device to which the library is attached If the library attaches to an HBA Host Bus Adapter
154. adapters and the OS 400 5 1 OS 400 5 2 or i5 OS 5 3 operating system Using Multiple Control Paths for Path Failover Command failures and timeouts are costly You want your library to run smoothly and efficiently To ensure continued processing the library offers an optional path failover feature that enables the host device driver to resend the command to an alternate control path for the same logical library With control path failover installed the alternate control path can include another HBA SAN or library control path drive The device driver initiates error recovery and continues the 3 2 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide operation on the alternate control path without interrupting the application AIX HP UX Solaris Linux and Windows 2003 hosts are currently supported for this feature The 2U library does not support Control Path Failover and Data Path Failover As a result there should be no license key entry for Path Failover on the 2U library Path Failover is a combination of two previous features Control Path Failover key entered at the library user interface and Data Path Failover key entered at the device driver interface A single activation key entered at the library user interface now activates both features unless the LTO 3 drive firmware level is equal to or lower than 73P5 and or the library firmware is equal to or lower than 1 95 For either or both of these
155. age 4 6 Connecting the Host Interface Cable on page 4 12 Connecting a Power Cord on page 4 14 On OOO a ONS Choosing a Location Choose a location that meets the following criteria Table 4 1 Location criteria Criteria Definition Room temperature 10 35 C 50 95 F Note If the temperature in the room where the library will be installed varies by 15 C 30 F from the room where the library was stored allow the library to acclimate to the surrounding environment for at least 12 hours before unpacking it from the shipping container Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 4 1 Table 4 1 Location criteria continued Criteria Definition Power source e AC power voltage 100 127 VAC 200 240 VAC 4 2 A Note The 4U library requires two separate power sources to implement redundant power e Line frequency 50 60 Hz Place the library near an AC outlet The AC power cord is the product s main AC disconnect device and must be easily accessible at all times Two separate power sources must be available for redundant power Air quality The library should be placed in an area with minimal sources of particulate contamination Avoid areas near frequently used doors and walkways stacks of supplies that collect dust printers and smoke filled rooms Excessive dust and debris can damage tapes and tape drives Humidity 15 80 RH non condensing Clear
156. aintenance package for the host Note See Appendix D Sense Data on page D 1 for further details on sense data SCSI Sense Data Definition Following is an example of a tape drive communication failure while attached to an Open Systems host through a fibre channel link using SCSI protocol When the host detected the failure it built the following SCSI Sense Data record An explanation of the SCSI Sense Data breakout in this example follows aabb 0600 0000 sense DATA Xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS 0000 1200 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0200 0300 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Note The bold area above represents the SCSI Sense Data presented by the host The regular font data in this case many bytes of zero designated by ssss would normally contain device sense data but with the kind of failure in this example COMMAND TIMEOUT the host could not collect valid device sense data so zeros are the result and should be ignored If the host had been able to collect valid sense data from the drive the first byte ss would be 70 71 FO or Fl
157. an Status Chk Media Rsvd Slot g Power Supply 2 Online E Status Figure 2 4 4U library System Status screen Status icons indicate the following conditions e The green check mark indicates that the library is fully operational and that no user intervention is required e The yellow exclamation point indicates that user intervention is necessary but that the library is still capable of performing operations This condition can be caused by a media library redundant power supply power supply fan or a drive sled problem To determine which view the System Status screen e The red X indicates that user intervention is required and that the library is not capable of performing operations 2 6 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present or if a cleaning cartridge is present but not in a reserved slot Auto Clean status will show Chk Media Rsvd Slot and Status will show a green check mark and the words Media Attention System Status View Legend 10 15 2008 13 28 52 Library Name rb4U139 so Media Attention Drive 1 Status Ready Drive 3 Status Ready Slots 40 44 Empty Total I O Station Closed Library Time 13 28 52 2 Auto Clean StatusChk Media Rsvd amp Slot Figure 2 5 4U library System Status screen showing media attention status e The Power Supply Status will only appear if redundant power is being utilized wi
158. anage Library Move Media This page allows the user to move tape cartridges within the library The source and destination are selected and then the MOVE button in the center of the screen is clicked to activate the move 16773 3505 Encrypted Encrypted a77ug099 Chapter 5 Operations 5 39 Source Destination Element Volume Serial Volume Serial c slot 15 i Drive 1 1 a c slot 19 1 STxS70L3 Drive 2 2 I O Station 1 I O Station 2 I O Station 3 Slot 1 1 Slot 2 1 Slot 3 1 Slot 4 1 Slot 5 1 Slot 6 1 Slot 7 1 Slot 8 1 Dedicated cleaning slot Move gt efe kele e Si eel Sei Oi i oie a77ug072 a Figure 5 31 Manage Library Move Media page The following elements appear in the Source and Destination screens Element In the Source screen this identifies the library element that contains a cartridge In the Destination screen this identifies the library element that is empty and can receive a cartridge Volume Serial In the Source screen this element displays the serial number of the cartridge In the Destination screen this element contains no information Manage Library Perform Inventory This page allows the library to be re scanned to determine the current media inventory meaa ae E Rescan Figure 5 32 Manage Library Perform Inventory page a77ug076 Manage Library Release Magazine This page allows the user to release
159. ance e Back Minimum of 15 4 cm 6 inches e Front Minimum of 30 8 cm 12 inches e Sides Minimum of 5 08 cm 2 inches Rack requirements Standard 19 inch rack with e 2U 88 90 mm 3 5 in of clearance for a 2U library e 4U 177 8 mm 7 in of clearance for a 4U library Rackmounting the library is optional Unpacking the Library 1 Clear a work surface to unpack the library 2 Before opening and removing the library from the shipping container inspect the container for shipping damage If you notice any damage report it to the shipping company immediately 3 Open the shipping container and carefully remove the shipping materials from the top of the library Remove the accessory package and set it aside Note Once the drive is unpacked save and store the packaging materials for future moves or shipping If you discard the original packaging materials you may need to purchase packaging materials if you wish to move or store your library Read Me documentation may be found with the packaging material containing updated and important unpacking instructions 4 Lift the library out of the carton and remove the bag from the library Remove the foam cushion from the back of the library Save the packaging materials for future use Important Do not place the library on the front panel or the rear panel as this may damage the library The display should NOT be touched during the removal of the unit from the packaging
160. ance Read Write test Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 11 9 If the host tool ITDT cannot detect the drive or library look for problems with the host interface cabling the HBA the device driver or the backup application software Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem i If possible ensure that the library firmware is at the latest level check the current library firmware level using the Operator Control Panel Monitor gt Library gt Identity gt Version or the Web User Interface Monitor Library gt Library Identity then visit http www ibm com storage With library power OFF loosen the two thumb screws which secure the controller card to the library enclosure and slide it out e Inspect the card for any broken components or other anomalies e If the card appears to have no abnormalities reseat the card back in the library tighten the thumb screws and turn library power ON If both the Operator Control Panel and Web User interfaces are inoperable or frozen and the latest firmware has been installed the controller card CRU electronics is the most likely failure If only the Web User Interface has failed please see Isolating Web User Interface Problems before replacing any CRUs If a control card error code has been obtained and reseating power cycling and updating the library firmware did not fix the problem the controller card CRU is the most likely failing CRU refer to
161. and I O station count Also included would be certain library statistics and where appropriate the fault FSC fault symptom code including the severity and description of that fault e Drive Status such as the identification of each drive in the library firmware level serial number and other address and status information e Trap Definitions such as library status change open magazine I O accessed hard fault information drive cleaning requests excessive retries and librar returning to normal operations For additional information refer to SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps on page G 1 e SNMP MIBs The library s Management Information Base MIB contains units of information that specifically describe an aspect of the system such as the system name hardware number or communications configuration Status and error data is also gathered by MIBs and sent to one or more IP addresses defined during the SNMP configuration operation Download the SNMP MIB file for this library from http www ibm com storage sup port Maximum Library Storage Capacity and Data Transfer Rate Maximum library storage capacity and maximum data transfer rates are as follows Table 1 3 Tape drive model and host interface type Tape Drive Model Host Interface Ultrium 4 Full High drives e Ultral60 SCSI LVD depending on drive single ended SE is not recommended as it will severely degrade performance e 4 Gb s Fibre Channel e 3 Gb s
162. and Storing the 8B Elevator blocked p Lock on page 4 5 2 Refer to Isolating a Library Controller Card vs 8C Rotation blocked Accessor Enclosure Problem on page 7 12 Possible Replacement CRUs 8D Sid blocked e Primary Library Enclosure e Secondary Library Controller Card 8 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 8 1 Main Error Codes continued Error Code Description User Action 8E Cannot find gripper block within the expected range 8F Cannot find slider block within the expected range 90 Cannot find elevator block within the expected range 91 Cannot find rotation block within the expected range 92 Cannot find sled block within the expected range 93 Gripper outside range Gripper has reached a position beyond the expected range 94 Slider outside range Slider has reached a position beyond the expected range 95 Elevator outside range Elevator has reached a position beyond the expected range 96 Rotation outside range Refer to Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor Rotation has reached a position beyond Enclosure Problem on page 7 12 Possible Replacement the expected range CRUs 97 Sled outside range e Primary Library Enclosure e Secondary Library Controller Card Sled has reached a position beyond the expected range 98 Cartridge present sensor not found 99 Slider home
163. and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 5 To rewind the tape insert the cartridge manual rewind tool J in Figure 6 10 into the cartridge s hub H and turn it clockwise until the tape becomes taut a67e0056 Figure 6 10 Rewinding the tape into the cartridge 6 Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge 7 If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears useable copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery Discard the mishandled cartridge Reattaching a Leader Pin The first meter of tape in a cartridge is leader tape Once the leader tape has been removed there is a possibility of tape breakage After reattaching the leader pin transfer data from the defective tape cartridge Do not reuse the defective tape cartridge The Leader Pin Reattachment Kit contains three parts e Leader pin attach tool see in Figure 6 11 on page 6 14 A plastic brace that holds the cartridge door open e Cartridge manual rewind tool see H in Figure 6 11 on page 6 14 A device that fits into the cartridge s hub and lets you wind the tape into and out of the cartridge e Pin supplies see in Figure 6 11 on page 6 14 Leader pins and C clips Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 13 Attention e Use only the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit to reattach the leader pin to the tape Other methods of reattaching the pin will damage the tape the
164. and the LED will remain lit until the error state is resolved Note From the Operator Control Panel run Service gt Library Verify If Library Verify runs without error the Error LED turns off If the error persists recycle power Input Modes There are several ways to enter values in the different menu items These values are selectable predefined values toggle values for example ON OFF and numerical values like network addresses Chapter 2 User Interfaces 2 3 Selecting Predefined Values 1 To set the predefined values press the SELECT button to select the menu item 2 Using the UP and DOWN buttons select one of the various predefined values for that item 3 As soon as the Operator Control Panel display shows the correct value press the SELECT button to apply the value Toggling Values Toggle values are used to switch between two different states like ON and OFF 1 After navigating to the menu item press the SELECT button to select the menu item 2 Using the UP and DOWN buttons select one of the various predefined states for that item 3 Press the SELECT button to apply the new state Entering Numerical Values Numerical values are needed for network addresses password entries and other configuration entries 1 After navigating to the menu item the current value is displayed and the cursor highlights the first digit of the value that can be changed 2 For each digit to be changed in the value
165. annel for optimum performance The customization enables compensation for variations in the recording channel transfer function media characteristics and read write head characteristics Power Management The Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive s power management function controls the drive s electronics so that part of the electronics completely turn OFF when circuit functions are not needed for the drive s operation Media The library uses Ultrium Tape Cartridges that provide up to 800 GB native capacity up to 1600 GB with 2 1 hardware data compression for LTO 4 tape drives and up to 400 GB native capacity up to 800 GB with 2 1 hardware data compression for LTO 3 tape drives IBM Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges IBM Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 3 capacities and can also read LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges with improved data rates IBM Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 2 capacities and can also read LTO Ultrium 1 Data Cartridges with improved data rates of up to 20 MB second native data transfer rate 40 MB second with 2 1 compression Ultrium 4 tape drives cannot read Ultrium 1 tapes Supported cartridges include e IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 4 e IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 3 e IBM Write Once Read Many Data Cartridge WORM Ul
166. ansferring an X X X X X X encryption key This setting is dependent upon the encryption method selected BOP policy This indicates whether the Beginning of Partition X X X X X X BOP policy is enabled or disabled Density This setting determines whether the drive shows X X X X X X reporting or masks encryption 5 36 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Drive 1 Status At 10 02 00 Library Time Status Ready Cartridge In Drive None Drive Error Code No Error Drive Activity Ready Drive 3 Status At 10 02 00 Library Time Status Ready Cartridge In Drive None Drive Error Code No Error Drive Activity Ready Port A Status Not ready not connected Speed Hashed SAS 000000 address Port B Status Not ready not connected Speed Hashed SAS 000000 address Encryption Status Encryption method Library managed Key path Default by method BOP policy Int label select Density reporting Other Figure 5 28 The 4U library Monitor Library Drive Status page Monitor Library Inventory a77ug093 This page provides detailed information about the tape inventory in the library A summary of each magazine is shown To get detailed information about the cartridges that reside in a magazine click on the button This will expand the display for the magazine To determine whether a cartridge is encrypted refer to the Comments column in the Cartridge Details screen Chapter 5 Operations
167. ape A mechanism for moving magnetic tape and controlling its movement Drive Not Configured This message occurs during the first boot after a factory settings restore is executed This is not a real issue since it takes the library a while to configure DRV Drive DSE Data security erase DSP Digital signal processor E EBCDIC Extended binary coded decimal interchange code EC Edge connector Engineering change Encryption capable ECC Error correction code ED Encrypted data This term will appear on the Operator Control Panel OCP when encrypted data is contained on a LTO4 cartridge EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read only memory EIA Electronics Industries Association Glossary J 3 EIA unit A unit of measure established by the Electronic Industries Association equal to 44 45 millimeters 1 75 inches eject To remove or force out from within EKM The Encryption Key Manager application EKM Server Settings Maintaining primary and secondary EKM servers is desired for maximum availability of encrypted backup and recovery These settings are required for Library Managed Encryption only electronic mail Correspondence in the form of messages transmitted between user terminals over a computer network email See electronic mail encryption To alter a file for example using a secret code so as to be unintelligible to unauthorized parties An encryption enabled drive contains
168. ape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Figures 1 1 Front panel of a 2U library 1 2 Front panel of a 4U library 1 3 Rear panel of a 2U library with a SCSI drive 1 4 Rear panel of a 4U library with full high Fibre Channel drive and half oe SCSI and SAS drives 1 5 Rear panel of a 2U library with a full high dual port SAS drive p 1 6 Library drive sled without ESD springs SCSI sled shown 1 7 Library drive sled with ESD springs fl SAS sled shown 2 1 Power ON screens 2 2 Web User Interface login page 2 3 2U library System Status screen 2 4 4U library System Status screen 2 5 4U library System Status screen showing media attention status p 2 6 4U library System Status screen showing a power supply failure 3 1 Configuration of a one partition system 3 2 Configuration of a two partition system 3 3 Configuration of a three partition system 3 4 Configuration of a four partition system 3 5 Examples of SCSI element addressing 4 1 Removing the Parae protective sheets from the library 4 2 Installing foot pads on the bottom of ihe library enclosure 4 3 Shipping lock and label 4 4 Removing the Shipping lock and label 4 5 Library shipping lock and label storage location on rear panel of library 4 6 Rack Kit mounting hardware 4 7 Examples of EIA units for round hole a d square hole installations 3 4 8 Rear view of a rack showing the narrow part of the
169. ards on page 10 21 b If power ON is not successful 10 20 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 1 The Error LED E in Figure 10 22 on page 10 23 will turn ON 2 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 3 Contact IBM Technical Support for further instructions Swapping Library Controller Cards IMPORTANT READ ME BEFORE CONTINUING The Library Enclosure contains a copy of the vital product data VPD for your library The VPD contains your current library configuration A primary copy of this VPD is contained within the Library Controller Card A backup copy of this VPD is maintained on the accessor in the enclosure or chassis When the Library Enclosure is replaced the new enclosure electronics should contain zeros 0 s in key VPD locations Upon detection of these zeros the library will automatically write VPD data to the replacement library enclosure from the primary copy of the VPD contained in the Library Controller Card In rare occurrences the replacement library enclosure may contain valid non zero VPD data left over from having been installed previously in another library If this occurs the library firmware which is expecting to see zeros in the VPD area will instead detect valid VPD data and will not know which copy of the VPD is the correct one It will detect this VPD mismatch and display a message entitled VPD Selection on the Operator Control Panel The li
170. artridge memory LTO CM Within each LTO Ultrium data cartridge an embedded electronics and interface module that can store and retrieve a cartridge s historical usage and other information LUN Logical Unit Number The number assigned to a logical unit a SCSI protocol LVD SCSI Bus Low Voltage Differential M MAC Address The Media Access Control address of a computer networking device magnetic tape A tape with a magnetical surface layer on which data can be stored by magnetic recording MAP Maintenance analysis procedure mask A pattern of characters that controls the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of characters To use a pattern of characters to control the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of characters master file A file used as an authority in a given job and that is relatively permanent even though its contents may change Synonymous with main file Maximum Transmission Unit MTU The size of the largest packet that a network protocol can transmit MB Mega Byte usually expressed as data rate in MB s or MB second media capacity The amount of data that can be contained on a storage medium expressed in bytes of data media type identifier Pertaining to the bar code on the bar code label of the IBM Ultrium Tape Cartridge a 2 character code L1 that represents information about the cartridge L identifies the cartridge as one that can be read by de
171. ary configuration General Information Library type TS3100 TS3200 Library Serial Number Library name T O Station Enabled Disabled AutoClean Enabled Disabled Library Network Settings DHCP Enabled Disabled IP Address Netmask Address Gateway Address DNS Servers IP Addresses EKM Servers IP Addresses Encryption Settings Logical Libraries Number in 1 2 3 4 library Mode Random ON OFF Random ON OFF Random ON OFF Random ON OFF Sequential ON OFF Sequential ON OFF Sequential ON OFF Sequential ON OFF Autoload ON OFF Autoload ON OFF Autoload ON OFF Autoload ON OFF Loop ON OFF Loop ON OFF Loop ON OFF Loop ON OFF Magazine Upper Left Upper Left O Upper Left O Upper Left Assignment Lower Left Lower Left C Lower Left C Lower Left Upper Right Upper Right O Upper Right O Upper Right Lower Right Lower Right O Lower Right O Lower Right Number of Active Slots Drive Serial AU Position 4 AU Position 4 4U Position 4 4U Position 4 Numbers AU Position 3 AU Position 3 4U Position 3 4U Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 2U 4U Position 1 2U 4U Position 1 2U 4U Position 1 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 Drive types AU Position 4 AU Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 AU Position 4 4U Position 3
172. as Unknown run Library Verify Service gt Library Verify DRIVE ID SCSI SAS OR FIBRE CHANNEL LOOP Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 5 Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table continued Problem Solution Changed drive ID but the host 4 Ensure that all devices on the same bus network have unique ID numbers server does not recognize the 2 E that l the lib fter changing the ID new ID Ensure that you cycle power on the library after changing the ID 3 Reboot the host server Tape library performance The library is not efficiently backing up data 1 Check the network bandwidth from the host computer If you are backing up data over a network consider comparing to a local only backup 2 Ensure that the library and tape drive are on their own SCSI bus and not daisy chained to another tape drive or to the hard drive being backed up 3 Ensure that the library is connected to a LVDS SCSI bus and there are no single ended SE devices on the same bus because this will cause the entire bus to negotiate down to SE speed 4 Use an Ultra160 SCSI bus and high quality cabling with the library CUSTOMER REPLACEABLE UNITS CRU Drive Sled See Isolating Drive Sled Problems on page 7 10 Power Supply See System Status on page 2 6 and Isolating a Power Supply Problem on page Library Controller Card See Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page
173. as needed to configure the library TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide E 4 r L aed a77ug159 Figure 5 1 2U Library Control Keys Figure 5 2 4U Library Control Keys a77ug160 Table 5 2 Library Control Keys Control Description Keys UP Upper left button Used to scroll upward through menu items CANCEL Upper right button Used to cancel a user action and return to the previous menu screen SELECT Lower right button Used to display a sub menu or force an accessor action Chapter 5 Operations Table 5 2 Library Control Keys continued Control Keys Description DOWN Lower left button Used to scroll downward through menu items 1 Press the UP J or DOWN J keys to enter Interaction Mode The Main Selection Menu will appear The Main Selection screen shows Monitor Control Configure and Service 2 Scroll to your selection then press the SELECT key The sub menu for the selected menu item will appear 3 Use the UP Ff or DOWN J and SELECT K keys to scroll until you get to the area screen you wish to configure 4 Use the CANCEL H key if you wish to move backwards through the menu selections Operator Control Panel Menu Tree The Operator Control Panel Main menu is made up of the following items 5 10 e Monitor e Control e Configure e Service
174. ator Control Panel and if required insert a blank or scratch cartridge into the I O Station when requested All wrap tests require a wrap tool to perform the diagnostic The test will execute If the test PASSES resume normal library operations If the test FAILS an error will be displayed Make note of the error then refer to Remove the cartridge from the I O Station if needed then close the I O Station Press Cancel to exit the screen e Drive Power use this item to turn drive power ON and OFF Service Display Contrast Display Contrast a77ugi70 Figure 5 24 Service Display Contrast menu The following display contrast settings are available in this menu e The numbers 1 through 10 will display with 10 being the lightest shade and 1 being the brightest Service Telnet Service Port The Telnet Service Port menu item is to be used under the direction of the IBM Support Center Refer to Accessing the Library using Telnet on page A 26 Web User Interface Menus The following menus are available on the Web User Interface Table 5 5 Web User Interface Menus H Monitor Library Library Identity Drives Identity Library Status Drives Status 5 30 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 5 5 Web User Interface Menus continued Inventory B Manage Library Move Media Perform Inventory Release Magazine H Configure Library General Lo
175. ator Control Panel and Service Library View Logs on page 5 54 to view logs using the Web User Interface Look up the error code and try to resolve see Chapter 8 Error Codes on page 8 1 and or Appendix D Sense Data on page D 1 FRONT PANEL LEDs Attention LED To determine why the Attention LED is turned ON log in to the Web User Interface and select Service Library gt View Logs gt Warning Log Drive Sled Issues e Refer to Isolating Drive Sled Problems on page 7 10 e Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives being swapped with different form factors i e HH to FH or FH to HH a library configuration change is needed Reconfiguring the library by reassigning the amount of logical libraries will clear this issue Navigate to the Web User Interface Configure Library gt Logical Libraries or to the Operator Control Panel s Configure gt Library section and reassign the logical libraries If you do not want to change your logical library configuration resubmit your current settings e Restore factory defaults Operator Control Panel Configure gt Restore Defaults or Web User Interface Configure Library gt Restore Defaults Media Issues e Avoid contamination by ensuring that the library is installed in a clean contamination free environment Continue cleaning the tape drive as needed Refer to Choosing a Location on page 4 1 e A cartridge sh
176. ault Symptom Code FSC SKSV 1 Field Pointer 18 19 First Error Flag Data 20 Reserved 0 21 CLN Reserved Reserved VolValid 22 28 Volume Label 29 Current Wrap 30 33 Relative LPOS 34 SCSI Address 35 Frame number Drive number Appendix D Sense Data D 11 Table D 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 36 39 Port Identifier Relative Target Port Address Reporting Sense This is the port address of the drive port through which sense is being reported On Fibre Channel drives it is the Fibre Channel Fabric Port Address for example 011E13 or 000026 with byte 36 being reserved On SAS drives it is the Hashed SAS Address of the drive port for example F32A94 with byte 36 being reserved On SCSI bytes 36 through 38 are reserved and byte 39 is set to the port s SCSI address i e byte 39 byte 34 40 Tape Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Relative Tgt Port Reporting Sense Directory Valid 0 Reserved 1 Relative Tgt Port 1 Port 0 2 Relative Tgt Port 2 Port 1 3 Relative Tgt Port 3 Library Port 41 Host Command SCSI Opcode 42 Density Type 0 No media present 1 Gen1 384 track Media Type Vendor Reserved 2 Gen2 512 track 3 Gen3 704 track 43 a Volume Label Cartridge Type 45 48 Logical Block Number Current LBA that would be reported in Read Position command
177. ayer for the Encryption Key Manager application Select an Encryption method for each logical library e Without an encryption license key select None or Application Managed Encryption e With an encryption license key select Library Managed Encryption or System Managed Encryption Select an Encryption policy for each logical library e Encrypt All This is the default policy It encrypts all cartridges using the default data keys specified in the EKM This setting applies to all drives in the 3573 logical library e Internal Label Selective Encryption This policy is based on the internal volume label information Currently the only application that supports this option is Symantec NetBackup Only encrypts cartridges with pool identifiers between 1500 and 9999 inclusive using keys specific to each pool Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive based on the pool identifier for instance key label IL_NBU_1505 would be generated for a cartridge in pool 1505 e Internal Label Encrypt All This policy is based on the internal volume label information Currently the only application that supports this option is Symantec NetBackup Encrypts all cartridges Cartridges with pool identifiers between 2000 and 65535 inclusive are encrypted with keys specific to each pool Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive based on the pool identifier for instance key label IL_NBU_2505 would be generated for a cartridg
178. ays open windows fans and air conditioners Ensure that the machine covers are always kept closed to minimize any contamination from airborne particles Supported Servers Operating Systems and Software The library is supported by a wide variety of servers hosts operating systems and adapters These attachments can change throughout the life cycle of the product To determine the latest supported attachments 1 Visit the web at http www ibm com 2 Point cursor at Support amp downloads then Support by product then point and click System storage 3 Select the appropriate Interoperability link Chapter 1 Product Description 1 11 Supported Device Drivers IBM maintains the latest levels of device drivers and driver documentation for the library on the Internet You can use one of the following procedures to access this material Note If you do not have Internet access and you need information about device drivers contact your Marketing Representative e Using a browser type one of the following http www ibm com storage Ito ftp ftp software ibm com storage devdrvr e Using File Transfer Protocol FTP enter the following specifications FIP site ftp software ibm com IP Addr 207 25 253 26 Userid anonymous Password use your current e mail address Directory storage devdrvr IBM provides Portable Document Format pdf and Postscript ps versions of its devi
179. azine e Logical Library 4 will contain Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine Note For more information about various configurations see The I O Station and slots reserved for cleaning cartridges if any are shared among all logical libraries 1 Click Logical Libraries in the left navigation pane Logical Libraries Number of Logical Peg EAT Currently configured 3 a77ug098 Figure 4 22 The 4U library Configure Library Logical Libraries page 2 Select the number of logical libraries you would like to create in your library 3 Click Submit to create the logical libraries Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key Path Failover is a combination of two previous features Control Path Failover key entered at the library user interface and Data Path Failover key entered at the device driver interface The Path Failover feature is available for select LTO 4 tape drives Path Failover is not supported for half high drives 1 Click Path Failover in the left navigation pane Path Failover Feature Activation Key 7 A Refresh Activate a77ug117 Figure 4 23 The Configure Library Path Failover Feature Activation screen 2 Enter the Control Path Failover 12 digit feature key in the spaces provided Note A single activation key available by purchasing Feature Code 1682 entered at the library user interface now activates both features unless the LTO 3 drive firmware level is equal to or low
180. blems 7 10 Full high Drive Tape Pulled from or Broken near Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor Leader Pin A 9 Enclosure Problem 7 12 Half high Drive Tape Pulled from or Broken Isolating Web User Interface Problems 7 12 near Leader Pin s os a Aali Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems 7 13 Full high Drive Tape Broken i in Mid tape AIB Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems 7 13 Half high Drive Tape Broken in Mid tape A 14 Identifying a Suspect Cartridge 7 14 Full high Drive Tape Tangled along Tape Path A 15 Half high Drive Tape Tangled along Tape Path A 18 vi TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Full high Drive No Apparent Failure or ees to Tape A 19 Half high Dive No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape se we et G A 22 Ending Procedure A 25 Writing a Drive Dump to Flash Memory A 25 Accessing the Library using Telnet A 26 Appendix B SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations B 1 2U Library I O Slot Storage Slots or Drive Slot Element Addresses and Physical Locations B l 4U Library I O Slots Storage Slots and Drive Slots Element Addresses and Physical Locations B 2 Library Partitioning and Element Addressing B 2 Appendix C TapeAlert Flags C 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library Cd TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive C 3 App
181. blems in the drive Attention Do not place any type of mark on the white space at either end of the bar code A mark in this area may prevent the library from reading the label 3 L4 a69i0349 Figure 6 3 Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge The volume serial number LTO123 cartridge type L4 and bar code are printed on the label Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels Apply the following guidelines whenever using bar code labels e Use only IBM approved bar code labels on cartridges to be used in an IBM tape library e Do not reuse a label or reapply a used label over an existing label e Before you apply a new label remove the old label by slowly pulling it at a right angle to the cartridge case e Use peel clean labels that do not leave a residue after being removed If there is glue residue on the cartridge remove it by gently rubbing it with your finger Do not use a sharp object water or a chemical to clean the label area e Examine the label before applying it to the cartridge Do not use the label if it has voids or smears in the printed cha
182. bleshooting Table below be sure to review the Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems on page 7 8 to help confirm the failing CRU The following table is the starting point for all service issues Find the reason which closest resembles the problem you are experiencing and perform the listed action If you are unable to correct the problem create a prioritized list of replacement parts required Select only one CRU at a time starting with the most likely based On the Procechres for Isolating CRU Problems on page 7 8 and or the error code listing After exhausting all troubleshooting efforts refer to Contacting IBM Technical Support on page 9 5 After correcting the problem run Library Verify Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify to ensure that all library components are functioning properly before resuming normal library operations Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table Problem Solution INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION Unable to configure 3 logical libraries with 3 drives 2 half high drives and 1 full high drive installed The 2 half high drives must be in drive positions 1 and 2 the lowest drive positions in the library and the full high drive must be in the remaining drive position For additional information refer to Appendix B SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations on page B 1 Installation and Configuration 1 Refer to
183. brary are usually caused by improper SCSI bus configuration application software configuration errors or an incorrectly configured operating system If the application software that you are using is not communicating with the library after installation check the following e Accessor Ship Lock Key 7 6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Ensure that the Accessor Ship Lock Key on the top cover has been removed before powering on the library Refer to Removing and Storing Lock on page 4 5 Drive SCSI or Loop ID Ensure that the SCSI ID of the Drive or Fibre Channel Loop ID is correct and not the same as other devices that may be on the same bus or loop To determine the SCSI or Loop ID for each SCSI or Fibre Channel drive in your library navigate to Operator Control Panel Monitor gt Drive gt Identity Web User Interface Monitor Library gt Drive gt Identity To change a drive s ID navigate to Operator Control Panel Configure gt Drive gt Drive Interface Web User Interface Configure gt Drive gt Drives Host Bus Adapter HBA Compatibility Ensure that the library is compatible with the HBA For best performance the HBA used for this library should be SCSI 3 LVDS Pay particular attention to any steps describing settings of various jumpers and or switches Refer to HBA LUN 0 1 Support A single ID will address both drive and library since
184. brary will need your input to determine which copy of VPD to write to the replacement library enclosure If you are replacing both the Library enclosure and the Library Controller Card transfer VPD after installing one part before installing the other If the message VPD Selection is displayed at the Operator Control Panel carefully highlight the VPD from Controller option to copy VPD from the controller to the replacement library enclosure before selecting OK Then continue with the procedure 1 Swap the Library Controller Card in the defective library with the Library Controller Card in the replacement library enclosure a Remove the Library Controller Card see Figure 10 21 on page 10 22 in the defective library and in the replacement library enclosure To remove a Library Controller Card 1 Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card 2 Grasp the thumbscrews and pull the card out of the library b Install the Library Controller Card from the defective library in the replacement library enclosure Install the Library Controller Card from the replacement library enclosure in the defective library to return to IBM To install a Library Controller Card 1 Grasp the two blue captive thumbscrews and push the Library Controller Card into the library 2 Tighten the thumbscrews Note You will hear a snap when the Library Controller Card is fully engaged and installed properly Cha
185. cal Locations on page B 2 a77ug105 an a77ug106 Figure 4 39 4U library right magazines 4U Library I O Station The I O Station in a 4U library see Figure 4 40 on page 4 38 is part of the lower left magazine To open the I O Station select Control gt Open I O Station The I O Station will pop open To close the I O Station gently push it back into the lower left magazine Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 37 a77ug103 Figure 4 40 4U library I O Station in the lower left magazine There are finger holes on the back side of the I O Station see in Figure 4 41 that allow the user to push the cartridges out of the I O station a77ug104 Figure 4 41 Finger Holes on back side of 4U Library I O Station Populating the Library with Data Cartridges For information on working with the cartridge magazines see Cartridge Magazines on page 4 35 4 38 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 1 Unlock the cartridge magazines e Using the Operator Control Panel Control gt Magazines e Using the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Release Magazine Note The magazines will relock after 15 seconds if they have not been removed 2 Remove all magazines from the library 3 Insert cartridges in the left magazine s Do not store cartridges in the I O Station or in the dedicated cleaning cartridge slot See 2U Library I O Slot Storage S
186. cartridge from being inserted incorrectly Generation 3 and 4 of the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge have a nominal cartridge life of 20 000 20k load and unload cycles Generation 2 has a nominal cartridge life of 10 000 10k load and unload cycles Generation 1 of the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge has a nominal cartridge life of 5000 5k load and unload cycles Cartridge Compatibility Table 6 1 Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges IBM Ultrium Tape Drive 800 GB 400 GB 200GB 100GB Ultrium Ultrium 4 Ultrium 3 Ultrium 2 1 Ultrium 4 Read Write Read Write Read only Ultrium 3 Read Write Read Write Read only Ultrium 2 Read Write Read Write 6 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 6 1 Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive continued IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges IBM Ultrium Tape A Drive 800 GB 400 GB 200GB 100GB Ultrium Ultrium 4 Ultrium 3 Ultrium 2 1 Ultrium 1 Read Write Capacity Scaling To control the capacity of the cartridge for example to obtain a faster seek time issue the SCSI command SET CAPACITY For information about this command refer to the IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference WORM Write Once Read Many Certain records retention and data security applications require a W
187. cartridge present sensor found 81h 99h No slider home sensor found 81h 9Ah No rotation home sensor found 81h 9Bh No sled position sensor found 81h 9Ch The range of gripper is wrong 81h 9Dh The range of slider is wrong 81h 9Eh The range of elevator is wrong 81h 9Fh The range of rotation is wrong 81h AOh The range of sled is wrong 81h Alh Open import export element failed 81h A2h Locking failed 81h A3h SE2 Block 81h A4h SE2 No Block 81h A5h No Sled2 Home Sensor 81h A6h No Elev Home Sensor Appendix D Sense Data Table D 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description Hardware Error 04 81h BOh Slave robotic controller response timeout continued 81h Bih NACK received from slave robotic controller 81h B2h Slave robotic controller communication failed 81h B3h Slave robotic controller urgent stop 81h B4h Cartridge did not transport completely 81h B5h Slave robotic controller does not respond on command 80h COh Network init 80h C1h Telnet interface 80h C2h Webserver 80h C3h EEPROM parameter 80h C4h Cannot init LAN card 80h CSh Write to EEPROM failed 80h C6h Ping command did not reach target 80h C7h Cannot upgrade from USB 80h DOh ROM error 80h Dih RAM error 80h D2h NVRAM error 80h D3h CTC error 80h D4h UART error 80h D5h Display error 80h D6h Memory error 80h D7h Fatal system error 80h D8
188. ce 10 3 a77ug202 Figure 10 5 Library drive sled with ESD springs 1 SAS sled shown Removing a Tape Drive Sled 1 IT IS IMPORTANT TO PRESERVE A DRIVE DUMP FOR IBM ANALYSIS IF ALL OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS EXIST e Library Error LED is ON e Operator Control Panel is displaying a drive error message e Web User Interface System Status screen is indicating that a drive has failed For instructions on preserving the drive dump refer to to Flash Memory on page A 25 IF NONE OF THE CONDITIONS LISTED ABOVE EXIST PROCEED TO THE NEXT STEP 2 Power OFF the library before removing and or installing a SCSI drive sled Fibre Channel and SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while the library is powered ON 3 If necessary unload the tape cartridge from the drive to be removed e Using the Operator Control Panel Control gt Move Cartridges e Using the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Move Media 4 Remove the host interface cable HW H or H in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 and terminator kJ for SCSI drive sled only 10 4 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a77ug204 Figure 10 6 Drive sled components full high fibre drive in top position half high SCSI drive in middle position half high SAS drive in bottom position on back panel of a 4U library SCSI cable SAS cable SCSI terminator E Fibre Channel cable ess Ethernet
189. ce Action Code Code developed to indicate possible FRU or FRU s to replace to repair the hardware scratch cartridge A data cartridge that contains no useful data but can be written to with new data SCSI Small computer system interface SE Single ended Secure Socket Layer See SSL segment A part sel Select Serial Attached SCSI SAS A drive sled with a SAS interface can be linked directly to controllers SAS is a performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS enables multiple devices up to 128 of different sizes and types to be connected simultaneously with thinner and longer cables its full duplex signal transmission supports 3 0 Gb s In addition SAS drives can be hot plugged serialize To change from parallel by byte to serial by bit serializer A device that converts a space distribution of simultaneous states representing data into a corresponding time sequence of states servo servos An adjective for use in qualifying some part or aspect of a servomechanism servomechanism A feedback control system in which at least one of the system signals represents mechanical motion Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a standard TCP IP protocol to send alerts about conditions such as need for operator intervention over a TCP IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring station Slot Blocker A slot blocker is used to restrict close off a data cell so a data cartridge cannot be placed there Th
190. ce driver documentation in the storage devdrvr Doc directory e IBM_tape_IUG pdf and IBM_tape_IUG ps contain the current version of the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide e IBM_tape_PROGREF pdf and IBM_tape_PROGREF ps contain the current version of the IBM Tape Device Drivers Programming Reference A list of device drivers for each supported server appears at storage devdrvr Note The device driver for System i servers is included in the OS 400 operating system 1 12 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 2 User Interfaces This library has two user interfaces e Operator Control Panel located on the front panel of the library e Web User Interface on page 2 4 accessed via a web browser Operator Control Panel The Operator Control Panel operates in two basic modes e User Interaction mode This mode is employed when a user is pushing buttons on the Operator Control Panel e System Driven mode This is the normal mode of operation In this mode the Operator Control Panel displays status associated with the actions that were caused from commands issued via the drive s internal drive to library serial interface When an Operator Control Panel button is pressed and released the Operator Control Panel automatically transitions to User Interaction mode User Interaction mode will continue until 3 minutes after a user stops pushing buttons
191. ces up 9 Place the leader pin from step 6h into the cavity Figure 6 15 on page 10 6 17 of the leader pin attach tool Attention To prevent the leader pin from rolling into the cartridge in the following step use care when folding the tape over the pin Fold the tape over the leader pin and hold it with your fingers see Figure 6 15 on page 6 17 Note Use care to ensure that the tape is centered over the leader pin Failure to properly center the tape on the pin will cause the repaired cartridge to fail When the tape is properly centered a 0 25 mm 0 01 in gap 6 16 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide exists on both sides of the pin EA A67E0037 Figure 6 15 Attaching the leader pin to the tape Close the pivot arm J of the leader pin attach tool by swinging it over the leader pin so that the C clip snaps onto the pin and the tape Swing the pivot arm open and trim the excess tape E so that it is flush with the reattached leader pin J Use your fingers to remove the leader pin from the cavity in the leader pin attach tool Use the cartridge manual rewind tool to wind the tape back into the cartridge wind the tape clockwise Ensure that the leader pin is latched by the pin retaining spring clips on each end of the leader pin Remove the rewind tool Remove the leader pin attach tool by lifting its end up and a
192. ck marks in the Home Screen but that drive 4 either has a problem or is missing The exclamation mark which shows that there is something wrong with drive 4 will not go away until the drive is either fixed or is replaced At that time the explanation mark will become a check mark Startup Firmware Rev 120R Drives 4 Magazines 4 I O Station empty Idle Rand Accessor Y Idle Rand a77ug030 Figure 2 1 Power ON screens Note about the Front Panel LEDs All LEDs are updated during power ON and reset sequences Upon power ON or software reset the library illuminates all LEDs as soon as POST allows When initialization starts all LEDs are extinguished and the Ready Activity LED flashes at a rate of approximately one second per cycle When the mechanical initialization is complete the Ready Activity LED will stop flashing and be constantly illuminated 2 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide If a library failure occurs the Ready Activity LED will turn OFF and the Error LED illuminates The Operator Control Panel will also display an appropriate error code to help identify the failure The following are additional operational details of LEDs e The Ready Activity LED is illuminated any time the unit is powered ON and functional The Ready Activity LED blinks whenever there is library or drive activity This LED will also blink when the unit is OFFLINE e The Clean L
193. closure e Additional new information includes Save Service Dump iv 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Contents Read This First Minimum Firmware Levels for Common Library Features Accessing Online Technical Support Registering for My Notification Sending Us Your Comments Contacting IBM Technical Support Summary of Changes Figures Tables Safety and Environmental Notices Danger Notice Caution Notice Laser Safety and Compliance g Class I Laser Product Performing the Safety imepsciion Procedure Rack Safety Product Recycling and Disposal Battery Return Program Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS Preface Related Publications Chapter 1 Product PP PNAN Front Panel Rear Panel Bar Code Reader Encryption A Supported Internet Protocols SNMP Messaging SNMP Traps Maximum Library Storage Capacity and Data Transfer Rate She Ultrium Tape Drives Speed Matching Channel Calibration Power ean Media Library Specifications Product Environment Supported Servers Operating Systems and Software bck cae os oF Supported Device Drivers Chapter 2 User Interfaces Operator Control Panel r Operator Control Panel Philosophy Power ON Display Note about the Front Panel LEDs Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 iii iii iii iv iv iv xiii XV XV XV xvii xv
194. closure will power up with the Ready Activity LED in Figure 10 22 on page 10 23 ON 2 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 3 Unplug the power cord from the power source then from the library 4 Proceed to Installing the Replacement Library Enclosure b If power ON is not successful contact IBM Technical Support for further instructions Installing the Replacement Library Enclosure Refer to the appropriate procedure in this section rack or desktop for installing the replacement library enclosure Note If you are shipping the replacement library enclosure to a remote location install the shipping lock and label before shipment Rack Installation 1 Remove the mounting brackets J in Figure 10 27 on page 10 28 and anchors H from each side of the defective library and install them on the replacement library enclosure Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 27 Figure 10 27 Mounting brackets and anchors for securing the library in a rack one bracket and anchor on each side of the library a77ug012 2 With assistance slide the replacement library enclosure onto the metal rails that l are already in position in the rack see Figure 10 28 a77ug196 Figure 10 28 Front view of a rack showing the rails installed 3 Tighten the mounting bracket screws J in Figure 10 15 on page 10 16 to anchor the replacement library enclosure to the rack 4 Proceed to Completing
195. creen The library must be rebooted or the changes will not take place Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 27 NO gt Oo 10 1i Enter the Host Name Enter the Domain Name DNS Primary Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server DNS Secondary Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server Enable SSL for Web If you desire to have SSL Secure Sockets Layer enabled place a check in this box Note If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface you can install the certificate or allow an exception depending on the internet browser you are using SSL is enabled when the URL begins with https and some browsers will show a lock Ethernet Settings You can disable Ethernet settings manually enable them or let another machine enable them by using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP You can also set a specific speed for the Ethernet port or specify the library to automatically negotiate the speed Ethernet Settings choices are Auto the default 10 Mbit Half 10 Mbit Full 100 Mbit Half 100 Mbit Full Enter IPv4 settings if applicable a Enable DHOP Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the DHCP server If you are not using a DHCP server leave unchecked and enter the appropriate information for the IP Address Network Mask and Gateway Address b Static Address An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP
196. ct for both the presence and conditions of the cell prism fiducials Each cell should contain a correctly installed prism with no visible damage Replace any missing or damaged prism fiducials Refer PEZE An error code that will often surface after completing an inventory request or a diagnostic request such as the system Test will be 9B 37 Sled position sensor not found The OCP Error LED will be lit and the Library Status on the web interface will show a Robotic Failure During the extended recovery process by viewing the Standard Trace under the web interface Service Library gt View Logs the same Robotic Failure entries into this log can be viewed as the library enters recovery mode for failure to sense a particular fiducial Proceed to the next step for failure isolation suggestions If there are no prism integrity issues and the library continues to post extended recovery time refer to Library Recovery Problem Determination on and Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page 7 12 Slot Blocker blocking a storage slot See Removing the Slot Blocker 2U Library on page 10 10 MEDIA Cleaning or data cartridge incompatible with drive Ensure that you are using data and cleaning cartridges that are compatible with the drive and model of your library The library automatically unloads incompatible cartridges and the Media Attention LED flashes Export the me
197. ction Threshold Failure Prediction thresholds have been exceeded indicating that a failure may occur soon 5D FF Failure Prediction False A Mode Select command has been used to test for Failure Prediction system 82 82 Drive requires cleaning The drive has detected that a cleaning operation is required to maintain good operation 82 83 Bad Code Detected The data transferred to the drive during a firmware upgrade is corrupt or incompatible with drive hardware Appendix D Sense Data D 9 Table D 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Continued Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC ASCO Sense Key 0 No Sense EE 13 Encryption Key Translate EF 13 Encryption Key Translate EKM Sense Key 3 Medium Error 30 02 Encryption Encryption feature is not enabled so format processing is not supported EE 60 Encryption Proxy Command Error EE DO Encryption Data Read Decryption Failure EE D1 Encryption Data Read after Write Decryption Failure EE EO Encryption Key Translation Failure EE E1 Encryption Key Translation Ambiguous EE FO Encryption Decryption Fenced Read EE F1 Encryption Encryption Fenced Write Sense Key 4 Hardware Error EE OE Encryption Key Service Timeout EE OF Encryption Key Service Failure 40 00 Encryption Failure
198. d Identifying a Suspect Cartridge The amber Attention LED will be lit on the front panel of the library when there has been a failure that indicates a piece of media is bad marginal or invalid It will be cleared when all invalid cartridges have been exported from the library Note The amber LED may 1 ONO also be lit because a power supply or a power supply fan is failing Refer to Isolating a Power Supply Problem on page 7 8 Navigate to Move Cartridges using the Operator Control Panel Control gt Move Cartridges Select Source Scroll through the different slots containing cartridges and look for an exclamation point The exclamation point indicates that the cartridge is bad or was rejected due to wrong format write protected etc Select the marked cartridge as the Source and the I O Station as the Destination Dest Select Move Open the I O Station Control gt I O Station Remove the marked cartridge from the I O Station and dispose of properly Close the I O Station If the amber LED was lit because of bad media the Attention LED will turn OFF If the amber LED is still on check the power supply or the power supply fans See Isolating a Power Supply Problem on page 7 8 7 14 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 8 Error Codes If an error occurs during operation of the library the library stops the current operation and disp
199. d aS Medium error diagnostic tape write Ensure diagnostic tape is not write protected protected 67 Medium error incompatible medium for Replace incorrect cartridge s write operation 70 Currently not used 71 Currently not used 72 Currently not used 73 SCSI overlapped command attempt Refer to your host application documentation for problem 74 SCSI echo buffer overwritten determination information DB External cooling fan error fan motion has stopped The subcode indicates which drive sled fan is affected Subcode 01 drive sled 1 bottom Subcode 02 drive sled 2 Refer to Isolating Drive Sled Problems on page 7 10 Chapter 8 Error Codes 8 11 Table 8 3 Warning Events continued DC LC Bus Failure DD Power Supply x fan has failed Redundancy may be at risk The subcode indicates which power supply fan is affected Refer to Isolating a Power Supply Problem on Subcode 01 1st PS fan from bottom Subcode 02 2nd PS fan from bottom DF Power Good signal changed from 2 to 1 Power Supplies 8 12 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 9 Service Procedures Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots In the event of a severe mechanical problem with the library or if circumstances require you to remove tape cartridges do the following If the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface is still operational 1
200. d TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a82hd004 Figure A 12 Leader Block Assembly LBA 8 9 10 Loader motor worm gear A Leader block assembly LBA Rotate the loader motor worm gear J counterclockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it stops Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray Go to Ending Procedure on page A 25 Full high Drive Tape Broken in Mid tape 1 With the front of the drive facing you pull an arm s length of tape out of the take up reel from the left side of the drive Note If there is less than approximately 5 cm 2 in of tape on the take up reel go to Full high Drive Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin on page A 9 From the supply reel inside the cartridge pull approximately 0 3 m 1 ft of tape From the take up reel thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head rollers on the left side of the drive Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm 0 5 in of the tape end Overlap the tape ends loosely mending them together Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up 6 From the bottom of the drive locate the access hole J in Figure A 13 on page A 14 in the bottom cover Insert a 2 5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle begin spooling tape back into the cartridge by turning
201. d access to contamination of or deletion of a file file transfer protocol FTP In the Internet suite of protocols an application layer protocol that uses TCP and Telnet services to transfer bulk data files between machines or hosts firmware Proprietary code that is usually delivered as microcode as part of an operating system Firmware is more efficient than software loaded from an alterable medium and more adaptable to change than pure hardware circuitry An example of firmware is the Basic Input Output System BIOS in read only memory ROM on a PC motherboard FLASH EEPROM An electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM that can be updated FMR Field microcode replacement format The arrangement or layout of data on a data medium formatter Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that performs data conversion speed matching encoding first level error recovery and interfaces to one or more tape drives FP File protect frayed Damaged as if by an abrasive substance FRU Field replaceable unit FSC Fault symptom code FSI Fault symptom index FTSS Field Technical Sales Support functional microcode Microcode that is resident in the machine during normal customer operation G g Gram GB gigabyte GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter Gbi gigabit J 4 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide gigabit Gbit 1 000 000 000 bits gigabyte GB 1
202. d by functional areas of the drive and information required for manufacturing RAS and engineering W word A character string that is convenient for some purpose to consider as an entity World Wide Node Name WWNN In a fibre channel connected library the Drive ID as listed in the Web User Interface Write Write command WT world trade X XR External register XRA External register address register J 10 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Index A Access PIN Operator Control Panel 4 32 accessibility keyboard H 1 repeat rate of up and down buttons H 1 shortcut keys H 1 accessor 1 4 Accessor A 1 accessory package 4 2 active slots 5 20 5 41 Active Slots 4 20 air quality 4 1 air vents front panel 1 1 AME 5 43 Application Managed Encryption AME 4 23 ASC D 1 ASCQ D 1 auto clean 5 20 5 41 Auto Clean 4 20 Bar code labels ordering 6 20 Bar Code Labels 6 5 guidelines for using 6 6 bar code reader 1 4 bootcode firmware current level 5 31 BOP 5 35 Border Gateway Protocol BGP 1 5 C cable host interface 4 12 Cartridge 1 9 6 1 capacity scaling 6 1 6 3 cleaning 6 4 compatibility 6 2 data 6 1 disposal of 6 18 leader pin 6 11 memory chip 6 4 ordering 6 18 proper handling 6 7 specifications 6 17 Write Protect Switch 6 7 cartridge magazines 1 1 4 35 A 1 Cartridge environment 6 9 cartridge suspect 2 2 cartridges inserting in
203. d failed 08 10 09 14 01 10 29 LIB ERR lt 98 63 gt HE cartridge detection failed Return status command failed a77ug120 Figure 5 49 Service Library View Logs page Service Library View Drive Logs This menu item allows the user to view a drive log View Drive Logs Select Drive 1 Log Type Error z Total Number Of Entries lo Start Entry Number Of Entries Per Page T a77ug096 View Figure 5 50 Service Library View Drive Logs screen Service Library Save Drive Dump This menu item allows a drive dump to be saved to the host computer Once the Save Drive Dump button is clicked the user will have the option of saving the drive dump to their hard drive The progress status for the drive dump is shown on the System Status screen to the right of the main Web User Interface screen Note Ensure that all the pop up facilities on the web browser are set to enable pop up boxes to appear For example on the Microsoft Internet Explorer under Tools ensure that the Pop up Blocker is turned OFF and Internet Options gt Security gt Custom Level gt Downloads gt Automatic Prompting for file Downloads and File Downloads are both Enabled Once saved on the hard drive it can be e mailed to Tech Support for analysis if needed Note The dump may take as long as 20 minutes to complete The System Status portion of the screen shows Drive Dump in Progress with the number of Chapter 5 Operations 5
204. d sending to robotic failed 33 Error during elevator movement in FLMoveRotation function 34 Error during rotation in FLMoveRotation function 35 Error during elevator movement in FLMoveSled function 36 Error during sled movement in FLMoveSled function 37 Error during sled positioning to sensor in FLMoveSled function Chapter 8 Error Codes 8 7 Table 8 2 Sub error codes continued 38 Error during sled positioning to mail slot in FLMoveSled function 39 Error during sled positioning without sensor 3A Error during elevator movement without sensor 3B Error slot position sensor not found 40 Movement to from slot failed 41 Error during first slider movement 42 Error during first gripper movement 43 Error during second slider movement 44 Error during second gripper movement get range failed 45 Error during third slider movement move home failed 50 Preposition to drive failed 51 Elevator movement to home sensor failed 52 Sled movement to home sensor failed 53 Error during sled movement to drive position 54 Error during rotation to drive position 55 Error during elevator movement in drive position 56 Error during sled movement to rotation position 57 Error during rotation to end position 60 Move from to drive failed 61 Error during first slider movement 62 Error during first gripper movement 63 Error
205. d to Configuring the Tape Drive e If the test fails an error code will be displayed Make note of the error then refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide GA32 0545 for additional instructions Configuring the Tape Drive 1 Log on to the Web User Interface Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 9 2 Verify that you are running the latest version of Library firmware and drive firmware library firmware Monitor Library gt Library Identity drive firmware Monitor Library gt Drive Identity Upgrade if necessary Service Library gt Upgrade Firmware 3 Restore defaults Configure Library gt Restore Defaults Refer to Table 5 4 on for a list of factory default settings 4 Reconfigure your library using the OCP to configure your network settings then using the Web UI to complete your library configuration 5 Save your library configuration to your host computer or to a USB device 6 Update your Library Configuration Form with the new drive and configuration information 7 Resume normal library operations Removing the Slot Blocker 2U Library Earlier versions of the 2U library may have a slot blocker in the upper right cell of the left magazine A slot blocker is used to close off restrict a data cell so a data cartridge cannot be placed there For 2U libraries using library firmware of 1 9
206. data unit C capacity The amount of data that can be contained on storage media and expressed in bytes of data cartridge manual rewind tool A device that can be fitted into the reel of a cartridge and used to rewind tape into or out of the cartridge cartridge storage slot Individual slot located within a magazine that is used to house tape cartridges caution notice A word to call attention to possible personal harm to people Contrast with attention and danger CE Customer engineer field engineer service representative centimeter cm One one hundredth of a meter 0 01 m Approximately 0 39 inch channel command An instruction that directs a data channel control unit or device to perform an operation or set of operations char Character CHK Check cleaning cartridge A tape cartridge that is used to clean the heads of a tape drive Contrast with data cartridge command A control signal that initiates an action or the start of a sequence of actions compact disc CD A disc usually 4 75 inches in diameter from which data is read optically by means of a laser compression The process of eliminating gaps empty fields redundancies and unnecessary data to shorten the length of records or blocks concurrent Refers to diagnostic procedures that can be run on one control unit while the rest of the subsystem remains available for customer applications contingent connection A connection b
207. ddress where SNMP traps are to be sent Target 2 IP Address Enter an optional 2nd IP address where SNMP traps are to be sent or leave as 0 0 0 0 Target 3 IP Address Enter an optional 3rd IP address where SNMP traps are to be sent or leave as 0 0 0 0 Version The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol v1 v2 and v3 Select a version for each Target IP Address Community Name An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as a password to authenticate messages sent between the SNMP remote management application and the library Enter your preferred name or leave as public Security User Name In order to receive traps via SNMPv3 the SNMP client needs to be logged in properly This is provided by this user name Currently this field may not be changed Configure Library User Access This page allows the user to add and modify user accounts See Login on page 2 5 for information on user types Roles O visable Superuser Disable User Passwords Role New Password Enter Up To Ten Characters User v Repeat Password coccccccce Support Contact Support Name Support Phone 7 Support Email a77ug082 Figure 5 43 Configure Library User Access page The following elements are displayed on the User Access page Role The name associated with the chosen Access Level Check the Disable Superuser checkbox if you do not want Super
208. de single character display and Y refers to the drive position in the library x values 4 firmware or hardware error e 5 hardware error e 6 hardware or media error e A recoverable hardware error F4 Drive Load Timeout Drive has run in a timeout while loading a tape The subcode indicates which drive is affected Example Subcode 02 drive 2 F5 Drive Unload Timeout Drive has run in a timeout while unloading a tape The subcode indicates which drive is affected Example subcode 02 drive 2 Refer to Isolating Drive Sled Problems on page 7 10 Chapter 8 Error Codes 8 5 Table 8 1 Main Error Codes continued Error Code Description User Action F6 No drive installed A drive has never been installed F7 Support ticket download from drive not possible F8 Invalid drive command F9 Invalid drive parameter Refer to Isolating Drive Sled Problems on page 7 10 FA SDCI microcode error FB Drive logged out FC Internal SCSI command failed with check condition FD Internal SCSI command timeout Sub Error Codes Table 8 2 Sub error codes Error Code Description Robotics 00 No sub error code 01 Mechanical initialization failure 02 Connection to slave robotic failed 03 Error motor initialization 04 Error during gripper close 05 Error slider home positioning 06 Error
209. dentity Monitor Library gt Library Identity Monitor ibrary Librar F IP Address modify Configure gt Network gt IP Address Configure Library gt Network Configure ibrary i Library current status Logical libraries configure Monitor gt Library gt Status Configure gt Logical Libraries Monitor Library gt Library Status Configure Library gt Logical Libraries Monitor tatus on page 34 Configure Library Logical Libraries oni oe onl Logs library view Monitor gt Library gt Error Log Service Library gt View Logs Service Library View Logs on Magazines graphical representation Monitor gt Inventory gt Magazines Monitor Library gt Inventory nventory on Magazines Unlock 5 6 Control gt Magazines Manage Library gt Release Magazine TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide ibrary Release s uy Magazine on page 5 40 Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Menu Navigation Shortcuts Information For More Activity Operator Control Panel Info Web User Interface For More Info Mode library Configure gt Library Settings gt Configure Library gt change Mode Library on General Mode library current Monitor gt Libra
210. dentity page elements continued Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS Speed For each Fibre Channel drive click on the drop X X down list and select Automatic 1Gb s 2Gb s or 4 Gb s Selecting Automatic will allow library speed to automatically negotiate to the current server speed Port Type For each Fibre Channel drive click LN Port X X L Port or N Port Loop ID This is the loop position number if the drive is in X X an arbitrated loop configuration Port B Configuration Port B is supported for SAS full high drives only X X Drives PTA ET E R 2 Power On Control Path Note SAS drives do not require user configuration Drive 2 Logical ary 2 Power On Control Path an Drive 3 Logical ary 3 Power On Control Path Port A Configuration Port Type LN Port Port B Configuration Port not available a77ug095 Figure 5 40 The Configure Library Drive page for a 4U library Configure Library Network This page shows the current network configuration of the library and allows modification to the configuration When a change is requested a pop up box checks to confirm the changes 1 Click Network in the left navigation pane to display the Network page Chapter 5 Operations 5 47 Network Protocol Stack IPv4 only tins Namn LIB1006DD Domain Name Enable SSL For Web EJ Ethernet Settings Auto Iv IPv4 Enable DHCP E On E S
211. dia in order to clear the state Refer to Cartridge Compatibility on page 6 2 Cannot write to or read from tape 7 8 Ensure that the cartridge write protect switch is in the write enabled position see Write Protect Switch on page 6 7 Ensure that you have the appropriate data cartridge for your library model Ensure that you are using an Ultrium cartridge that has not been degaussed Do not degauss Ultrium cartridges Ensure that the cartridge has not been exposed to harsh environmental or electrical conditions and is not physically damaged in any way Refer to and Many backup applications do not read or write to cartridges that were created using a different backup application In this case you may have to perform an erase reformat or label replacement operation on the cartridge Ensure that you understand any data protection or overwrite protection schemes that your backup application may be using which could prevent you from writing to a given cartridge Retry the operation with a different known good cartridge Clean the drive See Service Library Clean Drive on page 5 53 Cartridge VOLSER is reported as unknown Probable cause cartridge with no label or damaged label Ensure that cartridge is properly labelled If cartridge is properly labelled unload the cartridge from drive and perform an inventory Manage Library gt Perform Inventory If VOLSER is again reported
212. drive or both e Use this procedure on your tape cartridge only when the leader pin detaches from the magnetic tape and you must copy the cartridge s data onto another cartridge Destroy the damaged cartridge after you copy the data This procedure may affect the performance of the leader pin during threading and unloading operations e Touch only the end of the tape Touching the tape in an area other than the end can damage the tape s surface or edges which may interfere with read or write reliability N t 3 W lt Figure 6 11 Leader Pin Reattachment Kit The following procedure describes how to reattach a leader pin To reattach a leader pin by using the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit 1 Attach the leader pin attach tool J in Figure 6 12 on page 6 15 to the cartridge H so that the tool s hook J latches into the cartridge s door J Pull the tool back to hold the door open then slide the tool onto the cartridge Open the tool s pivot arm H 6 14 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide A67E0033 Figure 6 12 Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the cartridge To hold the cartridge door open hook the tool into the door and pull the tool back 2 To find the end of the tape inside the cartridge attach the cartridge manual rewind ool Ba ih eure 6 15 on pave 6 16 the cantides s tub El by fitting the tool s teet
213. drive and the cartridge Repositioning a Leader Pin A leader pin that is improperly seated inside a cartridge can interfere with the operation of the drive Figure 6 8 on page 6 12 shows a leader pin in the incorrect and correct H positions To place the leader pin in its proper position you will need the following tools e Plastic or blunt end tweezers e Cartridge manual rewind tool from Leader Pin Reattachment Kit part number 08L9129 Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 11 t a67e0057 Figure 6 8 Leader pin in the incorrect and correct positions The cartridge door is open and the leader pin is visible inside the cartridge To reposition the leader pin perform the following steps 1 Slide open the cartridge door E in Figure 6 9 and locate the leader pin H you may need to shake the cartridge gently to roll the pin toward the door 2 With plastic or blunt end tweezers grasp the leader pin and position it in the pin retaining spring clips EJ 3 Press the leader pin gently into the clips until it snaps into place and is firmly seated 4 Close the cartridge door ru i fh il I Id a a67e0058 Figure 6 9 Placing the dislodged leader pin into the correct position The cartridge door is open to show the leader pin 6 12 153100 Tape Library
214. drive slot Left Magazine Library Right Magazine lt Front of 2U library Rear Panel Front of 2U library Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 23 Slot 22 Slot 21 Slot 20 4103 4104 4105 4106 4118 4117 4116 4115 0x1007 0x1008 0x1009 0x100A 0x1016 0x1015 0x1014 0x1013 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Drive 1 Slot 19 Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 4099 4100 4101 4102 256 4114 4113 4112 4111 0x1003 0x1004 0x1005 0x1006 0x100 0x1012 0x1011 0x1010 0x100F I O slot Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 16 4096 4097 4098 4110 4109 4108 4107 0x10 0x1000 0x1001 0x1002 0x100E 0x100D 0x100C 0x100B Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 B 1 4U Library I O Slots Storage Slots and Drive Slots Element Addresses and Physical Locations For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing see Library Partitioning and Element Addressing The following table contains the physical location Slot x and SCSI element address in decimal 4xxx and in hexadecimal 0x10xx of the I O slots storage slots and drive slots in the 4U library containing only two drive sleds In older 4U libraries where the Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS is in a fixed location slot 9 and elected to be retained as a DCS option to delete DCS is available in library firmware greater than 1 95 the above slot numbering and element address changes starting with slot 10 In 4U librari
215. during second slider movement 64 Error during second gripper movement get range failed 65 Error during third slider movement move home failed 70 Release magazine failed 71 Error during sled movement to rotation position 72 Error during rotation to unlock position 73 Error during move sled to block 80 Opening I O slot failed 81 Error during movement to I O slot open position 82 Error during moving back sensor was found 90 Movement to home position failed 91 Elevator movement to home position failed 92 Error during sled movement to rotation position 93 Error during rotation to home or far position 94 Sled movement to home sensor position failed 8 8 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 8 2 Sub error codes continued 95 Sled movement to transport position failed AO Movement of I O slot failed Al Sled movement to sensor failed A2 Sled movement to rotation position failed A3 Elevator movement to home position failed A4 Error during rotation to far position A5 Sled movement to I O slot position failed A6 Error during elevator movement to position BO EEPROM on robotics controller not accessible or error during Read Write operation LIBRARY 81 Drive wake up failed 88 Error accessing slot status 90 Accessor load not reached Cartridge Present sensor 91 No activity after Load command 9
216. e Library configuration files saved with the Save Library Config menu do not include the Access PIN Set Access PIN a77ug057 Figure 5 17 Configure Set Access PIN menu Configure Restore Defaults Use this menu item to restore the factory default settings Restore Default Restore Passwords Restore All Restore Library Config Save Library Config a77ug045 Figure 5 18 Configure Restore Defaults menu e Restore Passwords This menu item restores the factory default RMU Admin user access password Chapter 5 Operations 5 25 e Restore all This menu item restores all factory default settings refer to fable 54 e Restore Library Config This menu item restores your saved library configuration from a USB device If you have more than one saved configuration file dbb on your USB device press Select then use the up and down keys to move between the different files When the correct configuration file is displayed press Select again e Save Library Config This menu item saves your library configuration to a USB device Note Ensure the USB device is formatted for FAT12 FAT16 or FAT32 and does not use autorun files Note Configuration files saved with one version of library firmware may not be compatible with other versions of firmware It is recommended to save a configuration file each time the library firmware is upgraded Restore the
217. e The maximum bus lengths stated in this table include the internal length of the bus For maximum performance multiple SCSI buses may be required see Using Multiple SCSI Buses and IBM Ultrium Tape Drives must be the only target devices that are active on the bus Note Daisy chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus performance SCSI cables connectors and host bus adapters Note For maximum performance the quantity of tape drives that you can attach to one SCSI bus is limited and is based on the type of bus that you have and the amount of data compression achieved Ultra160 SCSI buses have a bandwidth of 160 MB per second The table below lists the types of SCSI buses and gives the recommended maximum quantity of drives that you can attach Table 3 3 Recommended maximum quantity of drives per SCSI bus Type of Drive Ultra 160 SCSI Bus LVD Ultrium 3 1 drive at 2 1 compression Using Multiple SCSI Buses The library has two SCSI connectors for each tape drive in the library Each drive can be daisy chained using a SCSI bus jumper 3 8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Note Daisy chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus performance SCSI cables connectors and host bus adapters Removal of any jumpers will create a SCSI bus for each drive installed in your library for attachment to multiple servers or to m
218. e 5 47 Diagnostics run drive Head test Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Service Library gt Perform Diagnostics Service Library on Diagnostics run drive Media test Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Service Library gt Perform Diagnostics Diagnostics on Diagnostics run drive Normal Read Write test Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Service Library gt Perform Diagnostics Diagnostics run drive POST Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Service Library gt Perform Diagnostics 5 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Information Activity Menu Navigation Shortcuts Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info Diagnostics run drive wrap test Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Service Library gt Perform Diagnostics Service Library Diagnostics on Diagnostics run Key Path diagnostics Not available with this interface Service Library gt Perform Key Path Diagnostics Service Library Perform Ke Diag ostics on Diagnostics run Library Verify test Service gt Library Verify Not available with this interface Diagnostics run Slot to Slot test Diagnostics run System Test Service gt Run Tes
219. e ACTIVITY line on the Operator Panel posting Recovery Prism integrity verification can be done by releasing the magazines and inspecting the cell prisms Normal initialization or inventory time for a 2U library once the picker mechanism starts its operation should be approximately 1 to 2 minutes For a 4U library 2 to 3 minutes A single missing or damaged prism can add 1 to 2 minutes If the accessor tray sensor emitter is inoperable or several prisms are missing or damaged initialization or inventory could exceed 30 minutes or longer Refer to Troubleshooting table Cartridge Movement Problems Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems Isolating a Power Supply Problem Note Not all power supplies have LEDs The original power supply for the 2U library did not have LEDs though any power supplies replaced will likely have LEDs The 4U library has power supplies with LEDs 7 8 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a77ug136 Figure 7 1 A 250w power supply with LEDs o 2 a77ug198 Figure 7 2 A 80w power supply without LEDs Table 7 2 Power Supply LED Meanings If the blue LED is lit AC voltage is available If the amber LED is lit there is a possible fan problem or other power supply issue The power supply will need replacement If the green LED is lit DC power is OK and active Cooling Fan Grill omaga
220. e LTO 4 cartridge does not cartridge currently residing in i contain encrypted data slot ED encrypted data The LTO 4 cartridge does contain encrypted data Control Menu The Control Menu contains the following items e Open I O Station e Move Cartridges e Magazine e Re Inventory 5 16 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Control Open I O Station Use this menu item to open the I O Station Open I O Station a77ug052 Figure 5 9 Control I O Station menu Attention After closing the I O Station you must wait for the library to complete its inventory before proceeding with normal library operations Control Move Cartridges Use this menu item to move cartridges in the library Move Cartridges Source Source Volume Destination Destination Type Serial Type a Figure 5 10 Control Move Cartridges menu To move a cartridge from point A to point B you must make the following choices e Source Type Drive I O station magazine Only the source type s that contain cartridges will be listed e Source the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and then advances through all available choices Note If the Attention LED is ON due to a suspect cartridge that cartridge will be identified by an exclamation point when scrolling through the source cartridges e Volume Seria
221. e Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Appendix B SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations The following tables contain element addresses for the 2U library and the 4U library Table B 1 2U library SCSI Element Types and Element Addresses Element Type Element Address Range Media Transport Accessor Element MTE 1 0x01 I O Station Element IEE 16 0x10 Data Transfer Drive Element DTE 256 0x100 257 0x101 Storage Elements STE 4096 0x1000 4117 0x1015 Table B 2 4U library SCSI Element Types and Element Addresses Element Type Element Address Range Media Transport Accessor Element MTE 1 0x01 I O Station Elements IEE 16 0x10 17 0x11 18 0x12 Data Transfer Drives Elements DTE 256 0x100 257 0x101 258 0x102 259 0x103 Storage Elements STE 4096 0x1000 4139 0x102B 2U Library I O Slot Storage Slots and Drive Slot Element Addresses and Physical Locations ny For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing see The following table contains the physical location and SCSI element address decimal and hexadecimal of the I O slot storage slots and drive slot in the 2U library containing only one drive If a second drive were installed it would be located at address 257 0x101 Table B 3 2U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and
222. e The 2U library has an elective 1 slot I O Station e The 4U library has an elective 3 slot I O Station 1 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Rear Panel N ie N D N oO a77ug233 5 Figure 1 4 Rear panel of a 4U library with full high Fibre Channel drive and half high SCSI and SAS drives a77ug234 Figure 1 5 Rear panel of a 2U library with a full high dual port SAS drive Chapter 1 Product Description 1 3 Table 1 2 2U library and 4U library rear panel descriptions Number Item Description Power connector s Both libraries require a 110 220 volt AC power connection e The 2U library has one power supply e The 4U library has a minimum of one power supply but has the capability of adding a redundant power supply 2 Host interface The library has one or more of the following host interface connectors on the drive connectors sled e a 68 pin HD SCSI connector e a Fibre Channel connector e a SFF 8088 mini SAS connector Tape drive sled This library supports the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 tape drive The tape drive in the library is packaged in a container called a drive sled Drive sleds come in a full high or half high configuration The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit CRU and is hot pluggable which is designed for easy removal and replacement 4 Shipping lock and The shipping lock which secures the accessor d
223. e applications users manual or the hardware users manual for specific instructions on redoing the library inventory 25d Media It is set when it receives unsupported SCSI opcodes Changer 27d Cooling FAN One or more fans inside the library have failed This flag is cleared when Failure all fans are working again 32d Unreadable The library was unable to read the barcode on a cartridge Bar Code Labels C 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide e D Decimal e I Informational suggestion to user e C Critical immediate remedial action is required e W Warning Remedial action is advised Performance of data may be at risk TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive Table C 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive failure failure is detected on the loaded tape cartridge Flag Number Flag Description Action Required 3 Hard error Set for any unrecoverable read write See the Action Required column for or positioning error This flag is set in Flag Number 4 5 or 6 in this table conjunction with flags 4 5 or 6 4 Media Set for any unrecoverable read write Replace the tape cartridge or positioning error that is due to a faulty tape cartridge 5 Read failure Set for any unrecoverable read error If Flag 4 is also set the cartridge is where isolation is uncertain and defective Replace the
224. e defective library on a clean and sturdy work surface 6 Proceed to Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Library Enclosure Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Library Enclosure Before installing the replacement library enclosure it is important to verify that the enclosure is functioning properly 1 Unpack the replacement library enclosure and place it on a sturdy and clean work surface near the defective library Save all packaging materials for returning the failing part s to IBM 2 Choose one of the options below for installing the foot pads Important Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads may damage your library or cause it not to function properly a For a rack mounted library 1 Lift the replacement library enclosure slightly above the work surface have another person place a foot pad under each corner of the library and on each side of the library halfway between the front and back 2 Gently set the replacement library enclosure on top of the feet Adjust foot pad placement as necessary to stabilize the library Do not permanently attach the foot pads to the library b For a desktop library 1 Carefully lay the library on its side 2 Peel the adhesive from the back of each of the six foot pads 3 Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing each foot into one of the six areas J as shown in Figure 10 16 on 10 16 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape
225. e from an empty drive e Any error detected by the library or drive controller and not recoverable through predetermined firmware algorithms will be considered as fatal An error code will be displayed on the Operator Control Panel display and the error LED will Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 2 1 become illuminated The error code remains on the Operator Control Panel until a push button is pressed which causes the Operator Control Panel to return to the Home Screen e Numeric error codes are only used for unrecoverable fatal errors otherwise text status messages are displayed Power ON Display When the library powers ON or resets it goes through several internally controlled processes that allow it to get initialized and running These processes are called Power On Self Test POST During the POST the Operator Control Panel displays information that may be meaningless until POST is complete When the POST is finished the library displays the Startup screen then the Home screen The Startup screen is the first screen that appears after powering ON the library It contains the following information e Firmware Rev the current level of library firmware e Drives the total number of drives that the library can support e Magazines the total number of magazines in the library e I O Station the current status of the I O Station The Home screen example below shows that the Accessor and Drives 1 through 3 are OK as shown by the che
226. e in pool 2505 A primary and secondary EKM server can be set for each logical library Each partition has its own Encryption and EKM settings Maintaining primary and Chapter 5 Operations 5 45 secondary EKM servers is desired for maximum availability of encrypted backup and recovery These settings are required for Library Managed Encryption only Enter the EKM Server Setting information e Primary IP address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the IP address of the primary EKM server Primary TCP port After entering the Primary IP address the library will automatically set the value of the Primary TCP port e Secondary IP address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the IP address of the secondary EKM server e Secondary TCP port After entering the Secondary IP address the library will automatically set the value of the Secondary TCP port Note The Default Port for TCP SSL disabled is 3801 The Default Port for SSL is 443 These values are the default values set by the library They can be changed depending on the user configuration but the user has to make sure they match the EKM properties file Note The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering Support only 11 Click Activate to apply the changes 12 Record the Feature Activation Key or apply one of the labels on the Appendix G Library Configuration Form on page G 1 for future reference It is important to save your extra Feature Activation Key labels in a secure location
227. e user of issues that may become a problem Example Invalid Media Configuration Change Trace Logs any configuration changes made such as changing adding partitions changing SCSI addresses removing a DCS etc Standard Trace Logs all library operations Note Ensure that all the pop up facilities on the web browser are set to enable pop up boxes to appear For example on Microsoft Internet Explorer under Tools ensure that the Pop up Blocker is turned OFF and Internet Options gt Security gt Custom Level gt Downloads gt Automatic Promptingfor file Downloads and File Downloads are both Enabled Total Number of Entries e Start Entry e Number of Entries per Page e View e Clear Log Clears the log you are viewing e Dump Log Dumps the log you are viewing e Save Service Dump Creates a DPA Dump All log output that can be viewed or saved to a file 5 54 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide View Logs en Error Trace v Total Number Of Entries 5 Start Entry hoo Number Of Entries Per Page 08 10 10 10 01 31 50 LIB ERR lt F4 98 gt HE drive load timeout 08 10 09 15 07 08 99 LIB ERR lt 98 63 gt HE cartridge detection failed Return status command failed 08 10 09 14 57 10 07 LIB ERR lt 98 63 gt HE cartridge detection failed Return status command failed 08 10 09 14 50 36 87 LIB ERR lt 98 63 gt HE cartridge detection failed Return status comman
228. eb de IBM hittp vww ibm com ibm environment products index shtml Notice This mark applies only to countries within the European Union EU and Norway Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002 96 EC concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable throughout the European Union This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive Remarque Cette marque s applique uniquement aux pays de l Union Europ enne et a la Norv ge L etiquette du syst me respecte la Directive europ enne 2002 96 EC en mati re de D chets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques DEEE qui d termine les dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux syst mes utilis s travers l Union europ enne Conform ment a la directive ladite tiquette pr cise que le produit sur lequel elle est appos e ne doit pas tre jet mais tre r cup r en fin de vie Safety and Environmental Notices XXi ER COV TIt EU MBBLUS POT ICKEWCTOARBRENET IDRC EU MB ic et 4 RE FRE PF 2002 96 EC WEEE DF rH GH T WEFT CORT EVUBECBATSERAARBBOEMEVTLINOBRFEEDT ET TOFALI EMAAR ORM CBRE CME RMB TURD kE AStZk Miche ONA SK TIED In accordance with the European WEEE Directive electrical and electronic equipment EEE
229. ectronics reside on the library controller card CRU 1 Ensure that the ethernet cable is securely plugged in the rear of the library at the ethernet port See on the Rear Panel on page 1 3 Ensure that the correct IP Netmask and Gateway addresses are keyed into the network parameters From the Operator Control Panel navigate to Configure gt Network 7 12 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Ensure that the correct IP address is being used on the web browser If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface you can install the certificate or allow an exception depending on the internet browser you are using Even though with some browsers you will still receive a security certificate warning error each time you log in to the Web User Interface your transmission is secure SSL is enabled when the URL to your library begins with https and some browsers will show a lock If the ethernet connection is a direct connection between the PC and the library a special crossover ethernet cable needs to be used Note On newer PCs either straight through or crossover ethernet cables may be used since the crossover requirement is provided internally Check the ethernet cable carefully or try another cable and if the cable is connected to a network hub or switch try a different port If the Web User Interface is still malfunctioning replace the Library
230. ects a failure Go tq Contacting IBM Technical that requires diagnostics for isolation Support on page 9 5 C 4 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table C 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive continued Flag Number Flag Description Action Required 51 Tape directory invalid at Set when the tape directory on the Use your backup software to unload tape cartridge that was previously rebuild the tape directory by unloaded is corrupted The file search reading all the data performance is degraded 52 Tape system area write Set when the tape cartridge that was Copy the data to another tape failure previously unloaded could not write cartridge then discard the old its system area successfully cartridge 53 Tape system area read Set when the tape system area could Copy the data to another tape failure not be read successfully at load time cartridge then discard the old cartridge 55 Loading Failure When loading a tape into a drive a Take this action if the tape cartridge hardware malfunction can prevent the will not load in the drive tape from being loaded into the drive 1 Remove the tape cartridge from or the tape may actually get stuck in the library and inspect it for the drive damage If damaged discard it 2 Try another cartridge in that tape drive If it still fails replace the drive sled See
231. ed inside the cartridge Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut The tape must remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Turn the supply reel J A 14 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 10 additional turns Ensure that you do not stretch the tape a82hd002 Figure A 14 Rewinding tape into cartridge Loader motor worm gear Takeup reel motor A Outer guide rail g Supply reel motor WARNING Do Not Touch 7 Go to Ending Procedure on page A 25 Full high Drive Tape Tangled along Tape Path Note If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY COPY data i e there is no backup eject commands issued at the host fail to unload the tape and power cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Call Technical Support and open a PMR if one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery 1 Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle Note If you find the tape to be broken go to one of the following appropriate procedures Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 15 2 Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up
232. ed to have a maximum of one drive per SCSI bus Only use the maximum system to device cable length of 25 m 82 ft when attaching directly to one device a point to point interconnection Note Daisy chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus performance SCSI cables connectors and host bus adapters Physical Characteristics of the SCSI Interface The library operates as a set of SCSI 3 devices The Ultrium Tape Drives attach to servers using an LVD Ultra160 SCSI interface Each SCSI drive sled uses shielded HD68 pin connectors and can attach directly to a 2 byte wide SCSI cable Any combination of up to two initiators servers and up to four targets devices is allowed on a single SCSI bus if the following conditions are met e The SCSI bus is terminated properly at each end e Cable restrictions are followed according to the SCSI 3 specification Under the SCSI 3 protocol this type of attachment allows cable lengths of up to 25 m 81 ft with the appropriate cable and terminator The table below gives the maximum bus length between terminators for the LVD interface For information about cable connectors see SCSI Connectors and Adapters on page 3 9 Table 3 2 Maximum bus length between terminators Maximum Bus Length Between Terminators in Type of Interconnection meters Point to point 1 server and 1 drive 25 Multi drop daisy chain 1 server and 12 LVD multiple drives Not
233. em Methods of Ordering Order by Machine Type Model and Feature Code through IBM Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Cartridge with an IBM authorized distributor attached labels IBM TotalStorage 3589 Model 028 Feature Code 2820 is a 20 pack of WORM cartridges labeled with starting volume serial information and optionally packed in individual jewel cases Attached labels have been preprinted with a Bar Code that ends with LT where L stands for LTO and T identifies the cartridge as a WORM cartridge This media can be used with LTO 3 drives read write Order by Machine Type Model and Feature Code through IBM Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Cartridge an IBM authorized distributor without attached labels IBM TotalStorage 3589 Model 029 Feature Code 2920 is a 20 pack of WORM cartridges packed in individual jewel cases with unattached blank labels This media can be used with LTO 3 drives read write i Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine Type 3589 Model 006 Specify VOLSER characters you want Bar code labels are pre applied to cartridges Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine Type 3589 Model 007 Order VOLSER labels separately see Code Labels IBM LTO Ultrium 100 GB Data Ca
234. ement Address Magazine Magazine 256 1 3 Drive 1 Element Address 256 Front side a77ug164 Figure B 4 Configuration of a four partition system B 4 T53100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide SCSI Element Addressing Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element start address default value 256 It will be incremented from the bottom to the top slots for every drive slot There is one exception to this addressing scheme to accommodate libraries currently in the field A 4U library which contains only full high drives will continue to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257 thus causing no interruptions to their operation Drive slots will still be incremented by 1 for each drive slot position Note Exchanging drives with different form factors will result in the library needing to be reconfigured 4U Unit with only FH drives 1 logical library SCSI Element Slot 4 257 3 2 256 1 4U Unit with FH and HH drives 1 logical library SCSI Element Slot 4 258 3 257 2 256 1 Figure B 5 Examples of SCSI element addressing The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing Special handling is needed for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification Also temporarily removed drives need to have their addresses preserved to not confuse
235. endix D Sense Data D 1 Library Sense Data D 1 Drive Sense Data D 6 Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host E 1 Retrieving from an IBM System p p or IBM Pons System with AIX Dy E 1 SCSI Sense Data Definition E 2 SCSI Sense Data Library Error E 2 SCSI Sense Data Drive Error E 3 Retrieving from a Sun System E 4 Retrieving from an HP UX System E 5 Retrieving from an IBM System i or IBM Power System with IBM i OS E 5 Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps F 1 Appendix G ape pan Form Get Appendix H Accessibility H 1 Notices 2 A Trademarks Se nays Heke at Ge ec eee E Electronic Emission Notices ei 1 2 Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement 12 European Union EU Flectromagnetic Compatibility Directive 1 3 People s Republic of China Chass A Electronic Emission Statement fee er op TES Taiwan Class A compliance statement gt a s a DES Taiwan Contact Information 14 Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement 14 Industry Canada Compliance Statement 14 Avis de conformit a la r glementation d Industrie Canada A Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 1 4 Korean Class A Electronic Emission Siatement Il 5 Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement Il 5 Glossary J 1 Index X 1 Contents vii viii 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 T
236. enya Korea Lebanon Luxembourg Macau Malagasy Mali Martinique Mauritania Mauritius Monaco Morocco Mozambique Netherlands Netherlands Antilles New Caledonia Niger Norway Poland Portugal Romania Russia Saudi Arabia Senegal Spain Sweden Sudan Syria Togo Tunisia Turkey Yugoslavia Zaire Zimbabwe Vietnam 11 4 TS 3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 11 3 Power Cords continued Description Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 11 1 on page 11 7 FC and Part Number Reference PN Denmark DK2 5A Denmark 5 e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9821 PN 39M5130 South Africa SABS 164 Bangladesh Burma Pakistan 6 e 2 8 m 250V South Africa Sri Lanka e FC 9829 e PN 39M5144 United Kingdom BS 1363 Antigua Bahrain Bermuda 7 2 8m 250V Brunei Channel Islands lt FC 9825 o Hong Kong S A R yprus Fiji Ghana Guyana e PN 39M5151 India Iraq Ireland Jordan Kenya Kuwait Malaysia Malawi Malta Nepal Nigeria Oman Polynesia Qatar Sierra Leone Singapore Tanzania Uganda UK United Arab Emirate Dubai Yemen Zambia Switzerland SEV SN 416534 Liechtenstein Switzerland 8 e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9828 e PN 39M5158 Italy CEI 23 16 Chile Ethiopia Italy Libya 9 e 2 8 m 250V Somalia e FC 9830 e PN 39M5165 Israel 11 32 1971 Israel 10 e 2 8 m 250V e FC 9827 e PN 39M5172
237. equential Auto Clean Autoload I O Station s Mode enabled Remove Loop DCS No Random Sequential Active Slots Autoload Auto Clean Loop I O Station s enabled t Active Slots Host Label i Length Host Label 9 Length 5 Figure 5 14 Configure Library menu The following library configuration items are in this menu e Mode Random In random mode the library allows the server s host s application software to select any data cartridge in any order 5 20 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Sequential In sequential mode the library s firmware predefines the selection of the cartridges After initialization the firmware causes the library to select the first available cartridge found counting from the I O Station through slot 23 for loading into the drive Important If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than one drive only the first drive in the Logical Library will be utilized Autoload Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available cartridge slot with the lowest numerical value that contains a cartridge automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive Loop Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest numerical slot after the cartridge in the highest numerical slot has been filled and sent back to its home slot This allows endless backup operations without user interaction Star
238. er than 73P5 and or the 4 22 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide library firmware is equal to or lower than 1 95 For either or both of these two cases the device driver interface Data Path Failover key activation will still be required 3 Click Activate to save the feature key The following screen will display if you have correctly entered the feature key Path Failover Feature Activation Key Path Failover is currently activated on this Tape Library License enables the library failover capability User must ensure that the Library Host and Backup a77ug118 Figure 4 24 Feature Key verification screen Setting Up Encryption Note Application Managed Encryption AME does not require a key Library Managed Encryption LME and System Managed Encryption SME require a license key which is available by purchasing Feature Code 5900 Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive Full High or Half High Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge Library firmware level 4 0 or higher Drive firmware level 74H4 or higher Encryption Key Manager application Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption and System Managed Encryption Feature Code 5900 Transparent LTO Encryption SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive Full High or Half High Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge Library firmware level 4 0 or higher Drive firmware level 74H4 or h
239. er tray guide bearing E Figure A 16 on page A 17 12 Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray 13 Go to Ending Procedure on page A 25 Half high Drive Tape Tangled along Tape Path Note If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY i COPY data i e there is no backup eject commands issued at the host fail to unload the tape and power cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Call Technical Support and open a PMR if one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle Note If you find the tape to be broken go to one of the following appropriate procedures 2 Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up A 18 1TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a82hd002 Figure A 18 Rewinding tape into cartridge Loader motor worm gear Takeup reel motor A Outer guide rail g Supply reel motor WARNING Do Not Touch 3 Turn the supply reel E clockwise 4 Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Turn the supply reel f 10 turns Ensure that you do not st
240. ervice Guide Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Menu Navigation Shortcuts Information For More Activity Operator Control Panel Info Web User Interface For More Info Encryption Not available with this Monitor Library gt Drive Monitor determine interface Status gt Encryption method method current method tatus on page 3 e7 TA Ethernet settings Configure gt Drive gt Ethernet Configure Library gt Ethernet Event notifications add modify and delete Not available with this interface Configure Library gt Event Notification Library Event Notification on Error log view Monitor gt Library gt Error log Monitor Service Library gt View logs Service Library View Logs onl Error logs and traces set mode Not available with this interface Configure Library gt Logs amp Traces Library Logs amp Traces on page Factory Default settings restore Configure gt Restore Default Configure Library gt Restore Defaults Configure Library Fibre Channel speed Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Drive n Speed Monitor Library gt Drive Status Fibre Channel topology Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Drive n Topology Monitor Library gt Drive Status Fibre Channel link status Monitor gt Drive gt Statu
241. ervices or features discussed in this document in other countries or regions Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product program or service IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country or region where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states or regions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this s
242. es with a DCS the information shown in slot 9 below moves to slot 10 and so forth through the remaining magazine slots The final slot is slot 44 instead of slot 45 for libraries without a DCS See Configuring I O Stations and Reserving Slots on page 5 60 for information on how to delete the dedicated cleaning slot Once the DCS is deleted you cannot get it back You will have to create a reserved slot if you want to clean the drive s Table B 4 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot Upper Left Magazine Library Upper Right Magazine lt Front of 4U library Rear Panel Front of 4U library gt Slot 18 Slot 19 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 45 Slot 44 Slot 43 Slot 42 4113 4114 4115 4116 4140 4139 4138 4137 0x1011 0x1012 0x1013 0x1014 0x102C 0x102B 0x102A 0x1029 Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Drive 2 Slot 41 Slot 40 Slot 39 Slot 38 4109 4110 4111 4112 257 4136 4135 4134 4133 0x100D 0x100E 0x100F 0x1010 0x101 0x1028 0x1027 0x1026 0x1025 Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 37 Slot 36 Slot 35 Slot 34 4105 4106 4107 4108 4132 4131 4130 4129 0x1009 0x100A 0x100B 0x100C 0x1024 0x1023 0x1022 0x1021 Lower Left Magazine Lower Right Magazine T O Slot 3 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 33 Slot 32 Slot 31 Slot 30 18 4102 4103 4104 4128 4127 4126 4125 0x12 0x1006 0x1007 0x1008 ane 0x1020 0x101F 0x101E 0x101D rive T O Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot
243. escription 2U 4U Status Library status is displayed using icons with text A checkmark with the word Ready indicates the library is functioning properly An exclamation point with the word Caution indicates the library can function but is experiencing a problems An X with the word Error indicates the library is not functioning because of a serious problem Cartridge in Transport None is displayed if no cartridge is being moved This identifies a cartridge that is currently being moved by the accessor 5 34 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 5 8 Library Status page elements continued Present Menu Item Description 2U 4U Number of Moves This is the number of times the accessor has moved a cartridge from X X Point A to Point B for example from a storage slot to a drive Total Power On This is the total amount of time that the library has been powered ON X X Time Accessor Status This is the current status of the accessor X X Left Magazine This displays whether the left magazine is Present or Not Present X Right Magazine This displays whether the right magazine is Present or Not Present X 1 Left Magazine This displays whether the lower left magazine is Present or Not X Present 1 Right Magazine This displays whether the lower right magazine is Present or Not X
244. ese SCSI assignments to change between boots Some operating systems do not guarantee that devices will always be allocated the same SCSI target ID after rebooting Also some software depends on this association so you do not want it to change The issue of SCSI ID assignment is addressed by persistent binding Persistent binding is an HBA function that allows a subset of discovered targets to be bound between a server and device Implemented by a World Wide Node Name WWNN or World Wide Port Name WWPN persistent binding causes a tape drive s WWNN to be bound to a specific SCSI target ID After a configuration has been set it survives reboots and any hardware configuration changes because the information is preserved If a drive needs to be replaced the new drive TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide assumes the WWNN of the old drive because the WWNN for the drive is location dependent within the library Because the WWNN does not change persistent binding does not need to be changed thus preventing a potential outage Logical Unit Number LUN Scanning The library uses a single SCSI or Loop ID per drive and dual LUNs to control the tape drive LUN 0 and library accessor LUN 1 The library requires a Host Bus Adapter HBA that supports LUN scanning If it is not enabled your host system will not scan beyond LUN 0 and will fail to discover the library It will only see the tape drive
245. ess the library TELNET clients are used often when diagnosing problems to manually talk to other services without specialized client software TH Thermal thread load operation A procedure that places tape along the tape path TM Tapemark U UART Universal asynchronous receiver transmitter unload Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from the drive USB Universal Serial Bus A serial bus standard to interface devices to a host computer USB was designed to allow many peripherals to be connected using a single standardized interface socket and to improve the plug and play capabilities by allowing hot swapping that is by allowing devices to be connected and disconnected without rebooting the computer or turning off the device Other convenient features include providing power to low consumption devices without the need for an external power supply and allowing many devices to be used without requiring manufacturer specific individual device drivers to be installed utilities Utility programs utility programs A computer program in general support of the processes of a computer for instance a diagnostic program Glossary J 9 uv Under voltage V VOLSER Volume serial number volume A certain portion of data together with its data carrier that can be handled conveniently as a unit VPD Vital product data The information contained within the tape drive that requires nonvolatile storage use
246. est Close the I O Station by pushing it back into the library Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen Resume normal library operations e If the test fails an error code will be displayed Make note of the error then refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in this document for additional instructions 10 Package the failed drive sled in the same packaging in which the new sled was shipped to you and return to IBM Fill out the Warranty Redemption form and return it in the package with the drive sled 10 8 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Important If the failed drive was configured for encryption to ensure the replacement drive receives the proper encryption parameters resubmit the encryption choices listed on Configure Library gt Encryption for that particular drive or logical library even if the encryption settings did not change Adding a Tape Drive Sled Use these instructions to add a new tape drive to your 2U or 4U Tape Library Refer toJAppendix B SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations on page B 1 for more information Note Power OFF the library before installing a SCSI drive sled Fibre Channel and SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while the library is powered ON Complete the following procedure to add a new tape drive to your library 1 Before installing the new drive sled
247. etween a channel path and a drive caused when a unit check occurs during an I O operation controller A device that provides the interface between a system and one or more tape drives control path drive A drive that communicates messages from the host computer to the library in which the drive is installed CP Circuit protector ctrl Control CU Control unit D danger notice A word to call attention to possible lethal harm to people Contrast with attention and caution data Any representations such as characters or analog quantities to which meaning is or might be assigned data buffer The storage buffer in the control unit This buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate between the control unit and the channel data cartridge A tape cartridge dedicated to storing data Contrast with cleaning cartridge data check A synchronous or asynchronous indication of a condition caused by invalid data or incorrect positioning of data dc Direct current DCS Designated Cleaning Slot J 2 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide degauss To make a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by means of electrical coils carrying currents that neutralize the magnetism of the tape degausser A device that makes magnetic tape nonmagnetic degradation A decrease in quality of output or throughput or an increase in machine error rate degraded Decreased in quality of output or th
248. ews and push the replacement Library Controller Card into the library Tighten the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card Connect the power cord to the power supply or supplies at the back of the library then to the electrical source Power ON the library using the power button on the front panel After power is restored to the Library Controller Card the library will automatically restore the VPD on the new Library Controller Card from the Library Enclosure If a VPD Selection message is displayed in the Operator Control Panel see the Read Me before Continuing section earlier in this procedure to determine how to respond to the message Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version See Run the Library Verify test refer to EAE Tibrexy Verify on page 5 28 Note Use care when selecting the appropriate VPD to restore from to An error in selection here could cause a long downtime Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 13 13 Package the failed Library Controller Card in the same packaging in which the new control board was shipped to you and return to IBM Fill out the Warranty Redemption form and return it in the package with the Library Controller Card Replacing Cartridge Magazines To replace a cartridge magazine refer to one of the following procedures e Using the Web User Interface refer to Manage Library Release Magazine on page 5 40
249. f the 4 digit Access PIN Use the UP and DOWN buttons to select each digit Press the SELECT button to move to the next digit Repeat these steps for repeating the Access PIN PaRON After entering the final digit press the DOWN button and select one of the following e Save to apply your settings e Cancel to delete your settings Note In Figure 4 34 on page 4 33 menus with the pound sign are the only menus accessible when the Access PIN is enabled but entered incorrectly 4 32 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide or before it is entered To gain access to all menus disable the Access PIN or enter the correct PIN number when requested 7 Logical Library Open I O Station branes Library Verify Drive Move Cartridges Library Run Tests Settings i i i Inventory Magazines Drive Service Drives i i Re Inventory Network Display Contrast Set Access PIN Telnet Service Port i Restore Default Set Date and Time i Path Failover a77ug231 Figure 4 34 Pound sign shows accessible menus when access PIN is enabled but before it is entered Configuring Your Library using the Operator Control Panel I Configure Menu on page 5 18 for information on configuring the following items f you choose to u
250. facturer en ee ERER IBM Machine Type and Model ULT3573 TD4 Serial NUMDEr cers vic ue creiseets 1300000680 Device Specific FW 74H44 Firmware Level Loadable Microcode Level A1700D5C Description TAPE DRIVE FAILURE Probable Causes TAPE DRIVE Failure Causes TAPE TAPE DRIVE Recommended Actions PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES Detail Data SENSE DATA 0600 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0102 0000 7100 0400 0000 0058 0000 0000 5300 0702 F402 0000 0001 0110 0001 0000 0000 0000 0200 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2800 01E0 0000 0000 0000 4133 3820 2020 2000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Were 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Figure E 2 AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example Table E 2 AIX ERRPT Drive Sense Data Hex Description 71 Valid Sense Data Follows 04 Sense Key Hardware Problem 5300 ASC ASQQ additional sense code additional sense code qualifier F401 FSC fault symptom code in this case Drive Load Timeout Likely a drive problem Retrieving from a Sun System The Sun System provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or library in system errolog var adm messages When you have located the error information go to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting on page 7 1 E 4 T53100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Retr
251. from the half high internal drive 4 Inspect the drive to decide which of the following conditions most closely matches the symptom on the drive e Tape spooled off the supply reel All the tape appears to be on the take up reel and no tape is on the supply reel inside the cartridge Test the drive after the procedure is completed e Tape pulled from leader pin or broken at the front end All the tape appears to be on the supply reel inside the cartridge and very little or no tape appears to be on the take up reel The leader block is positioned in the take up reel Return the drive after the procedure is completed e Tape broken in mid tape Tape appears to be on both the supply reel inside the cartridge and take up reel Test the drive after the procedure is completed e Tape tangled along tape path Tape appears to be tangled and damaged but intact Return the drive after the procedure is completed OR No damage to tape or no apparent failure There appears to be no damage or slack to the tape Return the drive after the procedure is completed Full high Drive Tape Spooled Off Supply Reel Note If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY COPY data i e there is no backup eject commands issued at the host fail to unload the tape and power cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Call Technical Support and open a PMR if
252. gazine facing rear of library 10 24 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Ce N Q D 5 N oO a77ug024 Figure 10 24 Access hole for the right magazine facing rear of library b Push the end of a straightened paper clip into the access hole for each magazine at the back of the library DO NOT push the paper clip in more than 4 inch While holding the paper clip have a second person pull the magazine out of the front of the unit Note Do not remove the other components from the defective library at this time Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 25 N D 5 A N oO Figure 10 25 Left magazines pulled out of a 4U library facing front of library 2 Insert the cartridge magazines removed from the defective library into the same positions in the replacement library enclosure 3 Insert the cartridge magazines removed from the replacement library enclosure into the same positions in the defective library to return to IBM 4 Wait for inventory of the magazines to complete a If inventory is successful 1 The replacement library enclosure will complete with the Ready Activity LED Ef in Figure 10 22 on page 10 23 ON 2 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 3 Proceed to Swapping Power Supplies b If inventory is not successful 1 The Error LED Jj in Figure 10 22 on page 10 23 will turn ON 2 Power OFF the enclosure 3 Con
253. ge elements Library Status page elements Drive Status page elements Configure Library General page elements Configure Library Specific page elements Drive Identity page elements Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 iii XXiv 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 7 2 9 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 3 7 3 8 3 8 4 1 5 9 5 16 5 26 5 30 5 32 9733 5 34 2 5 35 5 41 5 41 5 46 6 2 6 2 6 4 6 5 6 7 7 1 7 2 8 2 8 3 10 1 11 1 11 2 11 3 A 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 D 1 D 2 E 1 F 1 Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape drives and libraries Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive Location of the write protect switch Environment for operating storing and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge Media supplies Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels Troubleshooting table Power Supply LED Meanings Main Error Codes Sub error codes Warning Events Shipping Lock Shipping Label Optional Features Replacement Parts Power Cords Internal view description 2U library SCSI Element Types a d Element Addresses 4U library SCSI Hlement Types and Fjement Bl Addresses i 2U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage slo
254. ged Note The SAS signal cable also contains the power cable Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 5 Note The RS 422 cable is very delicate Use your fingernails to work the cable loose before unplugging it d Remove the drive brick from the sled Removing the Drive Cover 1 Ground yourself to the drive by using an ESD Kit 2 Remove the cover of the full high drive by performing the following steps a Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the three screws and washers see in Figure A 5 that secure the bezel H to the internal drive then remove the bezel b Remove the cover of the internal drive by performing the following steps 1 Remove the four cover mounting screws and washers J 2 Remove the cover by lifting it up a82ru007 Figure A 5 Removing the bezel and the cover from the 4U internal drive 3 Remove the cover of the half high drive by performing the following steps a To remove the drive bezel pull the right side of the bezel E from the front of the drive then pull the left side of the bezel out of the frame of the drive b Remove the cover of the internal drive by performing the following steps 1 Remove the four cover mounting screws H Two screws are located on each side of the drive 2 Remove the cover by lifting it up A 6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a82hd001 Figure A 6 Removing the bezel and the cover
255. ges or 11 data cartridges and the elective 1 slot I O Station The right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges e The 4U library contains four cartridge magazines The upper left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges The lower left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges or 9 data cartridges and the elective 3 slot I O Station The upper right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges The lower right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges Air vents These vents draw cooler air into the library enclosure and allow warm air to escape which helps keep the library at a normal operating temperature Control keys e UP The upper left button is used to scroll upward through menu items e DOWN The lower left button is used to scroll downward through menu items e CANCEL X The upper right button is used to cancel a user action and return to the previous menu screen e SELECT The lower right button is used to display a sub menu or force an accessor action Machine type Model number and Serial Number label The machine type model number and serial number of the library are located on this label This serial number is the number that links the library to your warranty Operator Control Panel display This component is a 128 X 64 monochrome graphic display I O Station The Input Output I O Station is used to import and export cartridges into and out of the library
256. get C7 Cannot Upgrade from USB Not supported DO ROM error ROM checksum incorrect Refer to Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor D1 RAM error Power on Self Test POST meeste Problem on page 7 12 Possible Replacement has failed Primary Library Controller Card D2 NVRAM Non Volatile Random Access eae ae i y cen Memory error Read Write operation to Secondary Library Enclosure NVRAM has failed D7 Fatal System error can occur due to an D3 CTC Channel to Channel Error Timer over temperature condition Ensure the environment meets unit has failed during POST eae hae Bee Ea onmenal Spectiications refer to Environmental pecifications on page 1 10 D4 UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Las Transmitter Error Frame overrun or TIf you receive a D8 error while restoring your library Parity Error on serial Interface configuration from the OCP or Web UI verify that your file D5 Display Error extension is dbb If the extension is correct your file may have been corrupted during the save Reconfigure then Communication to display failed save your library configuration D F Sandik fl Note Configuration files saved with one version of library Memory Error Stack and heap overflow firmware may not be compatible with other versions of D7 Fatal system error firmware It is recommended to save a configuration file de each time the library firmware is upgraded Restore the D8 Data base error library using
257. gical Libraries Path Failover Encryption Drives Network User Access Date amp Time Logs amp Traces Event Notification Restore Defaults H Service Library Clean Drive Advanced Diagnostics for Service Personnel only View Logs View Drive Logs Save Drive Dump Perform Diagnostics Key Path Diagnostics Upgrade Firmware Reboot Monitor Library Menu The Monitor Library menu contains the following sub menu items e Monitor Library Library Identity e Monitor Library Drive Identity on page 5 32 e Monitor Library Drive Status on page 5 35 e Monitor Library Inventory on page 5 37 Monitor Library Library Identity This page provides access to the static information about the library No changes can be made from this page Table 5 6 on page 5 32 lists all available elements on the Library Identity page An X indicates that the element displays for the specified library type Chapter 5 Operations 5 31 Table 5 6 Library Identity page elements Menu Item Description 2U 4U Serial Number This is the unique identification number assigned by the manufacturer X X Product ID This is the SCSI inquiry string of the library X X Currently This is the current level of firmware installed on the library To ensure X X Installed Library you are running the latest version of firmware visit http www ibm com Firmware For information on updating your firmware refer to Upgrade Firmware
258. ging on page and Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps on page TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a Enabled If you desire to have SNMP traps sent to an IP address of your choosing place a check in this box b Target 1 IP Address If SNMP traps are enabled enter an IP address where SNMP traps are to be sent c Target 2 IP Address Enter an optional 2nd IP address where SNMP traps are to be sent or leave as 0 0 0 0 d Target 3 IP Address Enter an optional 3rd IP address where SNMP traps are to be sent or leave as 0 0 0 0 e Version The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol v1 v2 and v3 Select a version for each Target IP Address f Community Name An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as a password to authenticate messages sent between the SNMP remote management application and the library Enter your preferred name or leave as public g Security User Name In order to receive traps via SNMPv3 the SNMP client needs to be logged in properly This is provided by this user name Currently this field may not be changed Entering User Access Information using the Web User Interface This function other than the Access PIN is not available on the Operator Control Panel 1 Click User Access in the left navigation pane Roles C Disable Superuser C Disable User Passwords Role User b New Password Ente
259. gn an I O device with a request to the operator MP Microprocessor ms Millisecond MSG Message multipath Pertaining to using more than one path N N A Not applicable Network Address Translation NAT NAT involves rewriting the source and or destination addresses of IP packets as they pass through a Router or firewall Most systems using NAT do so in order to enable multiple hosts on a private network to access the Internet using a single public IP address node In a network a point at which one or more functional units connect channels or data circuits NVS Nonvolatile storage A storage device whose contents are not lost when power is cut off O OCP Operator Control Panel oersted The unit of magnetic field strength in the unrationalized centimeter gram second cgs electromagnetic system The oersted is the magnetic field strength in the interior of an elongated uniformly wound solenoid that is excited with a linear current density in its winding of one abampere per 4r centimeters of axial length offline Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit without the continual control of a computer Contrast with online online Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit that is under the continual control of a computer Contrast with offline OPER Operation ov Over voltage overrun Loss of data because a receiving device is unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted overtig
260. gs that are supported by the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drives TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library Parameter Code d decimal Flag name Type Action Required 01d C The media changer mechanism is having difficulty communicating with Hardware A the drive Power cycle the library and try the operation again e If the problem is corrected run Library Verify before resuming normal library operations Refer to Service Library Verify on page 5 28 e If the problem persists go to Contacting IBM Technical Support oni page 95 02d W There is a problem with the media changer mechanism Power cycle the Hardware B library and try the operation again If the problem is corrected run Library Verify before resuming normal library operations Refer to Service Library Verify on page 5 28 e If the problem persists go to Contacting IBM Technical Support oni page 2 5 Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 C 1 03d Library The media changer has a hardware fault Hardware C e Ensure that the media changer and drives are not being used by any host then reset the library from the front panel e If the problem persists go to Contacting IBM Technical Support oni page 9 5 04d Library e Ensure that the media changer and drives are not being used by any Hardware D host then reset the library from the front panel e If the problem
261. h The drive is not enabled 04h 88h The drive is busy 04h 89h The drive is not empty 04h 9Ah Drive fibre down 04h 8Eh The media changer is in sequential mode 30h 03h Cleaning in progress 3Bh 12h Magazine removed Medium Error 03 30h 00h Incompatible media installed 30h 03h Cleaning tape installed 30h 07h Cleaning failure D 2 T 3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table D 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description Hardware Error 04 81h 80h Cannot initialize bar code reader 81h 81h No response from bar code reader 81h 82h No response from EEPROM 81h 83h Slave robotic generic problem 81h 84h Setting of gripper pic value failed 81h 85h Setting of slider pic value failed 81h 86h Setting of elevator pic value failed 81h 87h Setting of rotation pic value failed 81h 88h Setting of sled pic value failed 81h 89h Gripper blocked 81h 8Ah Slider blocked 81h 8Bh Elevator blocked 81h 8Ch Rotation blocked 81h 8Dh Sled blocked 81h 8Eh Cannot find gripper block 81h 8Fh Cannot find slider block 81h 90h Cannot find elevator block 81h 91h Cannot find rotation block 81h 92h Cannot find sled block 81h 93h Gripper outside range 81h 94h Slider outside range 81h 95h Elevator outside range 81h 96h Rotation outside range 81h 97h Sled outside range 81h 98h No
262. h between the teeth of the hub Turn the tool clockwise until you see the end of the tape inside the cartridge Then slowly turn the rewind tool counterclockwise to bring the tape edge toward the cartridge door 3 Continue to turn the rewind tool counterclockwise until approximately 13 cm 5 in of tape hangs from the cartridge door If necessary grasp the tape and pull gently to unwind it from the cartridge 4 Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge Set the tool and the cartridge aside Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 15 A67E0035 Figure 6 13 Winding the tape out of the cartridge Turn the cartridge manual rewind tool clockwise to see the end of the tape then turn it counterclockwise to bring the tape to the cartridge door 5 oS On the leader pin F in Figure 6 14 locate the open side of the C clip H The C clip is a small black part that secures the tape to the pin Remove the C clip from the leader pin by using your fingers to push the clip away from the pin Set the pin aside and discard the clip A67E0036 Figure 6 14 Removing the C clip from the leader pin Use your fingers to push the C clip from the leader pin re Position the tape in the alignment groove of the leader pin attach tool see in Figure 6 15 on page 6 17 Place a new C clip into the retention groove H Figure 6 15 on page 6 17 on the leader pin attachment tool and make sure that the clip s open side fa
263. h dBase error 80h D9h No SCSI IC detected 80h DAh Different bar code labels 80h DBh External cooling fan failure 80h DCh Internal I2C bus error 80h DFh Power Good failed 80h E0h Incompatible Magazine 82h FOh Over temperature problem 82h Flh Drive communication error 82h F2h Drive sled not present 82h F3h Drive broken needs repair 82h F4h Drive load timeout 82h F5h Drive unload timeout 82h F6h Drive never present 82h F7h Drive support ticket error D 4 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table D 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description Illegal Request 05h 1Ah 00h Parameter length error 20h 00h Invalid command operation code 21h Olh Invalid element address 24h 00h Invalid field CDB 3Dh 00h SCSI invalid ID message 25h 00h Invalid LUN 2Ch 00h Command sequence error 26h 00h Invalid field in parameter list 26h Olh Parameter list error parameter not supported 26h 02h Parameter value invalid 26h 90h Wrong firmware image does not fit boot code 26h 91h Wrong personality firmware image 26h 93h Wrong firmware image checksum error 39h 00h Saving parameters not supported 3Bh 0Dh Medium destination element full 3Bh OEh Medium source element empty 3Bh 11h Medium magazine not accessible 3Bh 81h Cartridge of other partition 3Bh AOh Medium
264. have a list of errors logged by the library The errors will be displayed beginning with the most recent error Under Monitor gt Library gt Network are the following items IP Stack the internet protocol currently being used by the library DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol records whether DHCP is ON or OFF IP Addresses the internet addresses of the library Netmask the Network Mask Address of the library Gateway the Gateway Address of the library Ethernet the speed of the ethernet interface Stateless auto configuration indicates whether or not stateless auto configuration is enabled Prefix Length the length of the IP Address prefix Static IPv6 Address the static Pv6 address of the library Link Local IPv6 Address local link only IPv6 address of the library Router assigned IPv6 Address IPv6 address es discovered by the network router Monitor Drive This menu item displays drive information and settings Chapter 5 Operations 5 13 Drive Status Identity Drive n Drive n Status Firmware Rev Activity Vendor ID Source Product ID Encryption Serial Number Topology PortA PID t Status WWNN A SCSI ID Speed Speed i i A A Topology PID i t t B Loop ID Hashed A Address A Speed A Po
265. hite label through an IBM authorized distributor Specify the VOLSER characters that you want 20 PACK IBM Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM Tape Cartridge without attached labels Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine Type 3589 Model 033 Order as part number 95P4461 through an IBM authorized distributor Specify the VOLSER characters that you want IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Bar code labels are pre applied to cartridges Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine Type 3589 Model 008 Specify the VOLSER characters that you want Order as part number 96Pxxxx color label or 96Pxxxx black and white label through an IBM authorized distributor Specify the VOLSER characters that you want IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Order VOLSER labels separately Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine Type 3589 Model 009 Order as part number 24Rxxxx through an IBM authorized distributor Specify the VOLSER characters that you want 5 PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Order as part number 95P2020 through an IBM authorized distributor Specify the VOLSER characters that you want Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 19 Table 6 6 Media supplies continued Supply It
266. htening To tighten too much P parameter A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and that may denote the application p bit Parity bit PC Parity check PCC Power control compartment PDE Portable Document Format PE Parity error Product engineer pick Pertaining to the library to remove by means of a robotic device a tape cartridge from a storage slot or drive picker See Accessor PM Preventive maintenance POR Power on reset port A physical connection for communication between the drive library and the host processor Portable Document Format PDF A standard specified by Adobe Systems Incorporated for the electronic distribution of documents PDF files are compact can be distributed globally via e mail the Web intranets or CD ROM and can be viewed with the Acrobat Reader which is software from Adobe Systems that can be downloaded at no cost from the Adobe Systems home page PROM Programmable read only memory PS Power supply PTF Program temporary fix a single bugfix or group of bugfixes distributed in a form ready to install for customers PWR Power Glossary J 7 Q Quiesce Stop all commands to the library drives R rack A unit that houses the components of a storage subsystem such as the library rackmount kit A packaged collection of articles used to install the rack mounted version of the library RAM Random access memory Ra
267. ibrary loosen the blue captive thumbscrews on the drive If necessary remove the conductive tape from the drive sled c Pull straight back on the tape drive handle to remove it from the library On the rear of the replacement library enclosure extend the black pull out tab located underneath the lower right corner of the lowest drive sled position Slowly insert each tape drive into the replacement library enclosure in the same drive slot as it was positioned in the defective library Align with the connectors on the library while supporting the drive assembly Ensure that the black pull out tab remains extended when inserting a drive sled in the lowest drive position in the library Push in on the tape drive handle while supporting the bottom of the tape drive until it is properly seated Important Damage to the connector pins may occur if this procedure is not followed Push the tape drive slowly into the drive slot until the drive is seated against the back of the library Tighten the captive thumbscrews until the drive is secure If installing a drive sled without ESD springs see Figure 10 19 conductive tape as shown in Figure 10 20 on page 10 20 apply Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 19 2U Library 4U Library EP 2 NZ 2 pal NZ Oe oe
268. ibrary between systems Configurations can be created that enable the library to process commands from multiple heterogeneous applications such as an IBM System p application and a Windows NT application and multiple homogeneous applications for example the same application run by several System p servers From the library s Web User Interface or Operator Control Panel the following actions can be performed e Configure the library so that it is partitioned into separate logical libraries that independently communicate with separate applications through separate control paths This configuration requires no special capabilities from the server or application For more information see Using Multiple Logical Libraries for Library Sharing on page 3 2 e Configure any single logical library including the entire physical library so that it is shared by two or more servers that are running the same application Depending on the capabilities of the server and application there are several ways to set up this type of configuration Three typical ways include Configuring one server host to communicate with the library through a single control path all other servers send requests to that server through a network This configuration is used by Tivoli Storage Manager TSM Configuring all of the servers to communicate with the library through a single common control path This configuration is used in high availabil
269. ication problems have been resolved 2 Check the operation of the tape drive by resetting the drive Operator Control Panel Service gt Service gt Drive Power and running POST e Refer to the error code displayed on the Operator Control Panel if the drive resets and POST fails e Retry the encryption operation if the drive reset and POST complete without errors 3 Check the media e Ensure the correct media is being used Data encryption is supported with LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges only e Retry the encryption operation with the tape cartridge in another encryption enabled drive Replace the media if the problem repeats with the same tape cartridge in multiple drives If the problem occurred while the tape drive was running POST or diagnostics replace the drive The error code clears with the first attempted write read after the encryption key is changed or when the drive is placed in maintenance mode Encryption related error is posted Check the EKM application s error logs device driver logs tape library error logs and tape drive error logs for entries that are related to encryption See Library View Logs on page 5 54 Service Library View Drive Logs on page Chapter 8 Error Codes on page 8 1 and Drive Sense Data on page D 6 Connection problem with the Encryption Key Manager EKM fails a problem could exist with the IP address the Ethernet cable or the EKM server Perf
270. idge Do not write protect scratch blank cartridges the tape drive will not be able to write new data to them If you must manually set the write protect switch slide it left or right to the desired position A67E0026 Figure 6 4 Setting the write protect switch Table 6 4 Location of the write protect switch Write Protect Switch Handling the Cartridges Attention Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into the drive A damaged cartridge can interfere with the reliability of a drive and may void the warranties of the drive and the cartridge Before inserting a tape cartridge inspect the cartridge case cartridge door and write protect switch for breaks Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 7 Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage cartridges or their magnetic tape To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the continued high reliability of your IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drives use the following guidelines Provide Training e Post procedures that describe proper media handling in places where people gather e Ensure that anyone who handles tape has been properly trained in handling and shipping procedures This includes operators users programmers archival services and shipping personnel e Ensure that any service or contract personnel who perform archiving are properly trained in media handling procedures e Include media handling procedures as part of any services contract e Define a
271. ieving from an HP UX System The HP UX system provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or library in syslog var adm syslog 1log When you have located the error information go to Retrieving from an IBM System i or IBM Power System with IBM i OS IBM device drivers for the System i system logs error information when an error occurs on a tape drive or library The error information includes the following 1 Device VPD 2 SCSI command parameters 3 SCSI sense data if available To gain access to the System i problem logs and error logs sign on at any available workstation using the QSRV logon and its security password QSRV After signing on the proper access authorizations will be granted and the System i MAIN MENU displays 1 Type STRSST Start System Service Tools command on the command entry line on the System i Main Menu and press Enter 2 On the System Service Tool SST screen select Start a service tool and press Enter 3 On the Start a Service Tool screen select Product activity log and press Enter 4 On the Product activity log screen select Analyze log and press Enter 5 On the Select Subsystem Data screen select Magnetic media enter the From and To time period for searching the error log and press Enter 6 On the Select Analysis Report Options screen select the following and press Enter a Report type scs sssssssssicia 1 b Op
272. ified of library warnings via email To Email Address Enter the email address of the individual you would like to receive the errors and or warnings SMTP Server Address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the address of the email server of the individual you would like to receive the errors and or warnings This can be an IPv4 or IPv6 address or a host name and domain If a host name and domain is listed the IPv4 or IPv6 address will be resolved from the DNS using that name and the address will be stored rather than the name If the address changes a new name or a new address will need to be entered Domain Name Enter the Domain Name for your library This field cannot be blank when using event notification Note If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain Name a warning message will appear It will say If you are using Event Notification then a value is required for the Domain Name Configure Library Restore Defaults This page allows the library configuration to be reset to the factory defaults For information on factory default settings see Configure Restore Defaults on page 5 25 Be aware that when you restore your library to factory defaults all configuration data in the library will be lost and will need to be reestablished 5 52 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Saving and restoring configuration data can be done using the Remote Management Unit RMU and or the Operator Cont
273. ify this by going to Settings gt Control Panel gt System gt Hardware gt Device Manager gt Tape Drive and or Medium Changer For more information on verifying the connection of SCSI devices see the operating system documentation 4 34 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Cartridge Magazines The library has removable magazines Magazine access is password protected For safety reasons the accessor motion is stopped when a magazine is removed The magazines can be released using the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface In case the Operator Control Panel or Web User Interface initiated process has failed or the library no longer has power a manual emergency release is available Important To manually release a magazine see Releasing the Magazines Manually on page 9 1 anually on page 9 1 This manual process should only be used if the magazine cannot be released using the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface 2U Library Cartridge Magazines The 2U library has two cartridge magazines The left cartridge magazine see Figure 4 35 has eleven storage slots and houses the elective 1 slot I O Station The right magazine see Figure 4 36 on page 4 36 has twelve storage slots For information about Element Addressing see 2U Library I O Slot Storage Slots and Drive Slot Element Addresses and Physical Locations on page B 1 Note On some 2U
274. igher Encryption Key Manager application Setting a Drive s Method of Encryption Click Encryption Configure Library gt Encryption in the left navigation pane Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 23 Encryption is not supported for this Logical Library Encryption Feature Activation Key a77ug199 Figure 4 25 Feature Activation Key screen 2 On the Encryption screen enter the Feature Activation Key to make available the library managed and the system managed encryption options 3 Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for additional encryption settings Encryption Feature Activation Key Encryption is currently licensed on this library Enable SSL for EKM Encryption Setting for Logical Library 1 Encryption method None w Encryption policy EKM Server Setting Primary IP address f IPv4 JUN IPv4 address or Host name and domain Primary TCP port ang Secondary IP address FTES IPv4 UU IPv4 address or Host name and domain Secondary TCP port 20N4 Advanced Encryption Settings for Engineering Support use only Encryption method No Advanced Setting x Eeri oi No Advanced Setting x Encryption density No Advanced Setting x Encryption key path No Advanced Setting a77ug150 Figure 4 26 Configure Library Encryption Activation screen 4 Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets Layer for the Encryption Key Manager a
275. ii xvii xviii XX Xxii xxiii XXV XXV 165 1 9 1 11 1 11 1 12 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 Input Modes 2 3 Power ON OFF 2 4 Web User Interface 2 4 Login 2 5 System Status 2 6 Web User Interface Help Pages 2 8 Logging out of the Web User Interface 2 8 Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 1 Determining the Number of Logical Libraries 3 1 Basic Guidelines 3 1 Library Sharing 3 1 Using Multiple Logical Libraries for Library Sharing ao Bm uk 3 2 Using Multiple Control Paths 3 2 Using Multiple Control Paths for System i i iSeries and AS 400 Attachment 3 2 Using Multiple Control Paths for Path Failover 3 2 Library Partitioning and Element Addressing 3 3 Using Persistent Binding to Ensure SCSI ID Assignment ef 3 6 Logical Unit Number LUN Scanning 3 7 Host Interfaces 3 7 SCSI Interface 3 7 SAS Interface 3 9 Fibre Channel Interface 3 10 Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 1 Using the Library E Poi 4 1 Installing Your Library 4 1 Choosing a Location 4 1 Unpacking the Library 4 2 Verifying the Shipment 4 3 Installing the Library Foot Pads d r Desktop Installation ONLY 44 Removing and Storing the Shipping Lok 4 5 Rackmounting the Library for Rack Installation ONLY 46 Connecting the Host Interface Cable 4 12 Connecting a Power Cord 4 14 Configuring Your Library 4 1
276. in the library is packaged in a container called a drive sled The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit CRU and is designed for quick removal and replacement in the library The Ultrium 4 Full High Tape Drives support LVD Ultra160 Serial Attached SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel interfaces It features two SFF 8088 SAS connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector The Ultrium 4 Half High Tape Drive supports one SAS SFF 8088 connector The Ultrium 3 Full High Tape Drive supports LVD Ultra160 or Fibre Channel interfaces It features two HD68 connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector The Ultrium 3 Half High Drive supports one SAS SFF 8088 connector or two HD68 SCSI connectors Chapter 1 Product Description 1 7 a77ug008 Figure 1 6 Library drive sled without ESD springs SCSI sled shown a77ug202 Figure 1 7 Library drive sled with ESD springs 1 SAS sled shown Note Ultrium 3 and 4 SCSI SAS and Fibre Channel drives are allowed in the same physical and logical library Speed Matching To improve system performance the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive uses a technique called speed matching to dynamically adjust its native uncompressed data rate to the slower data rate of the attached server 1 8 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Channel Calibration The channel calibration feature of the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive customizes each read write data ch
277. ing 3 11 3 12 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Note Review the information in Installation Planning before installing your library The IBM TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library is a customer installed unit The customer is responsible for the setup and maintenance of the tape library Customers will be charged for service if a service contract is not in place To install a desktop or rack mounted 2U library or 4U library perform the procedures in this chapter in the order they are presented Using the Library Configuration Form Before beginning the installation and configuration of your library make a copy of the Appendix G Library Configuration Form on page G 1 Enter library information such as serial numbers types of drives etc and configuration settings on the Library Configuration Form and store in a safe location for future reference Be sure to update this form any time changes are made to your library hardware or configuration Installing Your Library Complete these procedures to install your library hardware Choosing a Location Unpacking the Library on page 4 2 Verifying the Shipment on page 4 3 Installing the Library Foot Pads for Desktop Installation ONLY on page 4 4 and Storing the Shipping Rackmounting the Library for Rack Installation ONLY on p
278. ion screen The Configure Library Drive screen Configure Library Network Page Warning Screen The Configure Library User Access screen The Configure Library Date and Time screen F The Configure Library Logs and Traces screen The Configure Library Event Notification screen Pound sign shows accessible menus when access PIN is enabled but before it is entered 2U library left magazine 2U library right magazine 2U library I O Station in the left magazine 4U library left magazines 4U library right magazines 4U library I O Station in the lower left magazine Finger Holes on back side of 4U Library I O Station A ee 2U Library Control Keys 4U Library Control Keys Operator Control Panel Menu Tree Monitor Library menu Monitor Drive menu Example of a 4U Monitor Inventory 1 menu Overview of inventoried cartridges Lower Left Magazine of a 4U Library Detailed information on es residing in a magazine A Control I O Station menu Control Move Cartridges menu Control Magazine menu Control Re Inventory menu Configure Logical Libraries menu Configure Library menu Configure Drive menu Configure Network menu Configure Set Access PIN menu Configure Restore Defaults menu Configure Set Date and Time menu Configure Path Failover Service Library Verify menu Service Run Tests menu 4 21 4 22 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 24 4 26 4 27
279. ion Key on page 4 22 Setting Up E on De 4 23 Entering ibrar a Settings on page 4 26 Entering User Access Information using the Web User Interface on page 11 Entering Date and Time using the Web User Interface on page 4 30 page ES 16 Logging out of the Web User Interface on page 2 8 17 i Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN using the Operator Control anel on page 4 32 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Establishing Remote Access to Your Library Static library network settings must be entered using the Operator Control Panel before the library can be accessed remotely using the Web User Interface If your system is serviced by DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server the network parameters will be automatically set Once remote access has been established you can complete the configuration of your library using the Web User Interface ie w Access the Configure menu using the Operator Control Panel a From the screen that shows the library logo Home screen press either the UP or DOWN button to get to the Main Menu b Press the DOWN button to select Configure c Press the SELECT button to display the Configure menu Press the DOWN button to highlight the Network menu Press the SELECT button to display the Network screen Select IP STACK to change Internet Protocols Choose I
280. ion and above Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack cabinet Ensure that there are no empty U levels between devices installed in the rack cabinet below the 32U level If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets detach the rack cabinet from the suite e Inspect the route that you plan to take to eliminate potential hazards e Verify the route that you choose can hold the weight of the loaded rack cabinet Refer to the documentation that comes with your rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded rack cabinet e Verify that all door openings are at least 762 x 2032 mm 30 x 80 inches Ensure that all devices shelves drawers doors and cables are secure Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinet during movement Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees Once the rack cabinet is in the new location do the following Lower the four leveling pads Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet If you remove any of the devices from the rack cabinet repopulate the rack cabinet from the lowest position to the highest position If a long distance relocation is required restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it Pack the rack cabinet in the original packaging material or
281. is blocker can easily be removed Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI A standard used by computer manufacturers for attaching peripheral devices such as tape drives hard disks CD ROM players printers and scanners to computers servers Pronounced scuzzy Variations of the SCSI J 8 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide interface provide for faster data transmission rates than standard serial and parallel ports up to 160 megabytes per second The variations include e Fast Wide SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of up to 20 MBps e SCSI 1 Uses an 8 bit bus and supports data rates of 4 MBps e SCSI 2 Same as SCSI 1 but uses a 50 pin connector instead of a 25 pin connector and supports multiple devices Ultra SCSI Uses an 8 or 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 20 or 40 MBps e Ultra2 SCSI Uses an 8 or 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 40 or 80 MBps Ultra3 SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps e Ultral60 SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps SME System Managed Encryption SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol a standard TCP IP protocol to send alerts about conditions such as need for operator intervention over a TCP IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring station SNS Sense special feature A feature that can be ordered to enhance the capability storage capacity or
282. is documented in the IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference In addition to device drivers other methods exist for obtaining sense data and error information The sections that follow describe alternatives for gathering such information from the IBM System i and System p servers Library Sense Data The following table lists the Additional Sense Codes ASC and Additional Sense Code Qualifiers ASCQ associated with the reported Sense Keys A sense key of 00h no sense has no ASC ASCQ associated with it A few ASC ASCQs can be associated with more than one sense key The sense keys that can give a particular ASC ASCQ are indicated within the Sense Key column ASC ASCQs that can indicate an abnormal element state as part of element descriptor Table D 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ Sense Key ASC ASCQ _ Description Recovered Error 01 OAh 00h Error log overflow 47h 00h SCSI parity error Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 D 1 Table D 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description Not Ready 02 00h 17h Drive cleaning requested 04h 00h Cause not reportable 04h olh In progress becoming ready scanning magazines etc 04h 02h Initializing command required 04h 03h Manual intervention required 04h 07h Operation in progress 04h 12h Offline 04h 83h Door open 04h 85h Firmware upgrade in progress 04h 87
283. is to be collected separately and to be reused recycled or recovered at end of life Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the WEEE Directive as shown above must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste but use the collection framework available to customers for the return recycling and recovery of WEEE Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE For proper collection and treatment contact your local IBM representative Battery Return Program xxii This product may contain sealed lead acid nickel cadmium nickel metal hydride lithium or a lithium ion battery Consult your user manual or service manual for specific battery information The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly Recycling facilities may not be available in your area For information on disposal of batteries outside the United States go to http www ibm com ibm environment products index shtml or contact your local waste disposal facility In the United States IBM has established a return process for reuse recycling or proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid nickel cadmium nickel metal hydride and other battery packs from IBM Equipment For information on proper disposal of these batteries contact IBM at 1 800 426 4333 Please have the IBM part number listed on the battery available prior
284. ity environments such as IBM s High Availability Clustered Microprocessing HACMP and Microsoft s Systems Management Server SMS and Clustered Server Environments Multi initiator configurations are only supported by certain adapters and independent software vendors ISVs Check with your ISV Configuring a single logical library to communicate with multiple servers through multiple control paths This configuration requires that control paths Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 3 1 be added see Using Multiple Control Paths It is used by Backup Recovery and Media Services BRMS Library configuration is not limited to the examples given above Many configurations are possible and can be designed according to your business needs For additional information refer to your host application documentation Using Multiple Logical Libraries for Library Sharing Multiple logical libraries are an effective way for the library to simultaneously back up and restore data from heterogeneous applications For example the library can be partitioned so that it processes e Commands from Application A about Department X in Logical Library 1 e Commands from Application B about Department Y in Logical Library 2 In this configuration the storage slots and drives in each logical library are dedicated to that library and are not shared among other libraries Commands issued by the applications travel to the library through two unique c
285. ity features for the HTML version of this document e You can use screen reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what is displayed on the screen The following screen readers have been tested WebKing and Window Eyes e You can operate all features using the keyboard instead of the mouse Navigating by keyboard You can use keys or key combinations to perform operations and initiate many menu actions that can also be done through mouse actions You can navigate the HTML version of the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide help system from the keyboard by using the following key combinations e To traverse to the next link button or topic press Tab inside a frame page e To move to the previous topic node press or Shift Tab e To scroll all the way up or down press Home or End respectively e To print the current page or active frame press Ctrl P e To select press Enter Accessing the publications You can view the publications for this library in Adobe Portable Document Format PDF using the Adobe Acrobat Reader The PDFs are provided at the following Web site http www ibm com storage support Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 H 1 H 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A IBM may not offer the products s
286. ivation Key screen 5 44 Configure Library Encryption Feature configuration screen 5 45 The Configure Library Drive page for a 4U library oe 5 47 Configure Library Network Page 5 48 Warning Screen 5 48 Configure Library User Access page 5 50 The Configure Library Date amp Time page 5 51 Configure Library Logs amp Traces page 5 51 Configure Library Event Notification page 5 52 Configure Library Restore Defaults page 5 53 Service Library Clean Drive page 5 54 Service Library View Logs page 5 55 Service Library View Drive Logs screen 5 55 Service Save Drive Dump 5 56 Service Library Perform Diagnostics page 5 56 Service Library Perform Key Path Diagnostics page f 5 57 The 2U library Service Library Upgrade Firmware page 5 58 The 4U library Service Library Upgrade Firmware page 5 58 Service Library Reboot page i 5 59 The IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge 2 OL Ultrium WORM Tape Cartridge eo 63 Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge 66 Setting the write protect switch lt a 67 Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase 6 8 Double boxing tape cartridges for shipping 6 9 Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge 6 10 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 7 1 7 2 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16
287. k for confirmation Many changes will also require a library reboot Table 5 10 Configure Library General page elements Menu Item Description 2U 4U Library Name Enter the name of the library X X I O Station The I O Station defaults to I O Station Enabled Choosing Disabled no X X Enabled checkmark adds one more storage slot to the 2U library and 3 more storage slots to the 4U library When the I O Station is disabled removing or adding media to the library must be performed by releasing the left and or right magazine s Auto Clean Auto Clean defaults to Disabled For Auto Clean to function a cleaning X X Enabled cartridge CLNxxxLx must be resident in a reserved library slot and Auto Clean must be enabled turned on Bar Code Label Length Reported To Host The default bar code label length is 8 but can be set to 6 The bar code X X label length is a reported length This setting will cause the host computer to only see the first 6 characters of the label or all 8 characters This setting does not affect the bar code label that is shown on any of the library user interfaces always shows all 8 characters Table 5 11 Configure Library Specific page elements Menu Item Description 2U 4U Library Mode Choices are Random and Sequential If you choose Sequential you may X X also activate Autoload and or Loop If there is more than one logical library there is a Library Mode en
288. k cabinet e Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanical loading always install the heaviest devices in the bottom of the rack cabinet Always install servers and optional devices starting from the bottom of the rack cabinet e Rack mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or work space Do not place any object on top of rack mounted devices e Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord Ensure that all power cords in the rack cabinet are disconnected before servicing any device in the rack cabinet Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to power devices installed in the same rack cabinet Do not plug a power cord from a device installed in one rack cabinet into a power device installed in a different rack cabinet An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on the metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock xviii TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide CAUTION Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures WILL exceed the manufacturer s recommended ambient temperature for all your rack mounted devices Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compro
289. l the serial number of the cartridge e Dest Type the destination Drive I O station magazine e Dest the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and then advances through all available choices Control Magazine Use this menu item to unlock the cartridge magazines Chapter 5 Operations 5 17 Magazine Left Right i o Left magazine Right magazine 3 unlocking unlocking Figure 5 11 Control Magazine menu Choose Left or Right to unlock the corresponding cartridge magazine s The magazines can now be removed from the library by gently pulling each magazine out of the library To replace a magazine insert the back of the magazine into the front of the library and gently push the magazine into the library The magazine will lock when inserted into the library Attention After inserting the magazines into the library you must wait for the library to complete its inventory before proceeding with normal library operations If the magazines are not pulled out of the library within 15 seconds after they are unlocked the command will cancel and you will have to repeat the process to unlock the magazines Control Re Inventory Use this menu item to initiate a scan of the cartridges currently in the library Re Inventory a77ug055 Figure 5 12 Control Re Inventory menu Note It may take up to five minutes to complete the library in
290. l Technical Support and open a PMR if one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery These procedures must be performed only by a trained IBM service provider SSRs should claim their time against service code 33 ECA 013 when performing this procedure Inform the customer the following procedure has high risk of damaging the drive and high risk of not being able to recover the data Recommended Tools 1 Phillips screwdriver ESD Kit Flashlight optional 1 Flathead screwdriver optional Before You Begin 1 If you have not already done so attempt to remove the cartridge with the device power ON and using library manager a host application or the unload button When using the Unload button press and hold the button for 12 seconds This will cause the drive to eject the cartridge when it has completed the midtape recovery If you have not already done so ensure the operator has issued the appropriate application commands to perform a rewind and unload of the cartridge This is to ensure that the stuck cartridge is not due to a hang condition in the application If you have not already done so attempt to remove the cartridge by power cycling the drive Look for the drive to attempt a midtape recovery A 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Note It can take 5 minutes to 1 hour depending on cartridge type
291. l high drive is Drive 1 When using half high drives the first half high drive position will be called Drive 1 The second half high drive position will be called Drive 2 Partitioning of 4U Libraries When one or more half high drives are added to a 4U library the drive naming will change Currently the first full high drive is Drive 1 and the second full high drive is Drive 2 When you consider that each full high drive slot may contain one or two half high drives there are four potential drives in the space that used to occupy two As a result the first half high drive position or the first full high drive position will be called Drive 1 The second half high drive position will be called Drive 2 The third half high drive position or the second full high drive position will be called Drive 3 The fourth half high drive position will be called Drive 4 Mixing of Drives The library will support a mix of full high and half high drives in the same physical library and the same logical library They will support a mix of Gen 3 and Gen 4 drives in the same physical library and the same logical library They will also support a mix of SCSI SAS and Fibre Channel in the same physical library and the same logical library however mixing drive interface types in the same logical library is not recommended Configuration of a 1 Partition System A one partition system configured for a 4U library contains any and
292. langes of the tape guiding rollers Turn the supply reel f 10 additional turns Ensure that you do not stretch the tape 7 Go to Ending Procedure on page A 25 Full high Drive Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 9 a82ru009 Figure A 9 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train Heo N 5 Loader motor worm gear 6 Threader mechanism gear Cartridge loader tray guide Levei bearing Rotator stub 8 Loader mechanism gear Threader motor worm gear Threader intermediate gear From the left side of the drive pull out tape from the take up reel Note If there is more than approximately 0 6 m 2 ft of tape on the take up reel go to Pull high Drive Tape Broken in Mid tape on If there is less than approximately 0 6 m 2 ft of tape on the take up reel cut off the excess tape as close to the leader pin as possible Locate the threader motor worm gear J the rear of the drive Use your finger to rotate the threader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear clockwise This rotates the threader motor worm gear EJ clockwise drawing the tape leader block assembly LBA into the cartridge As the LBA is secured in the cartridge you should hear the LBA retention spring clips click into place If you do not hear the click continue rolling until the
293. lays an error code on the LCD screen Unless otherwise noted in Error Codes on page 8 2 try to resolve the error by cycling power to the library and retrying the last operation If the error persists contact technical support Example Error Code EVENT 6 8D 07 Where e 6 indicates the position in sequence list 0 being the most recent 8D 07 indicates the error code 8D sled blocked The event log with the library also includes a date stamp for each event Press SELECT to display the associated time stamp in the following format yy mm dd hh mm ss HH Where e yy is the year e mm is the month e dd is the current day e hh is hours e mis minutes e ss is seconds e HH is 1 100 second The time stamp is set to zero at system start A description of each error code and possible solution is provided in Error Codes on page 8 2 Preparing to Resolve an Error Code 1 Record the error information that is displayed on the Operator Control Panel display or Web User Interface screen 2 If possible cycle library power and retry operation If the error reoccurs refer to Error Codes on page 8 2 for information on resolving the error e If the error does not reoccur run Library Verify before continuing with normal library operation Complete the steps in Preparing to Resolve an Error Code before completing the User Action listed in Error Codes on page 8 2 Copyright IBM Corp 20
294. library 5 12 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Status Identity Error Log Network Status Serial Number IP Stack Act Cart Version DHCP OFF DHCP OFF i i DHCP ON IPv4 amp IPv4 IPv6 IPv6 On Time Vendor ID i IP Address Siaicless autoconfig Slots Empty Product ID ji f Netmask Prefix Length Cycles IP Address Static IPv6 ii Address I O Station Active Slots i Link Local IPv6 Gateway Address Date Time WWNN i Ethernet peau a IPv6 Library Mode 4 Act Cart the serial number of the cartridge currently active in the library On Time the amount of time the library has been powered ON Slots Empty the number of empty slots in the library total number of active slots in the library Cycles the total number of cartridge moves carried out by the library accessor I O Station indicates whether the I O Station is open or closed Date Time gives the current date and time set in the library Under Monitor gt Library gt Identity are the following items Serial Number the serial number of the library Version the current level of library firmware installed Vendor ID IBM Product ID library inquiry string IP Address current library IP address Active Slots number of active slots in each logical library WWNN World Wide Node Name of the library Library Mode current library mode Random or Sequential Under Monitor gt Library gt Error Log you will
295. library on a magazine boundary The entire magazine must be part of one logical library only In a fully populated 4U library with four logical libraries resource assignments will be as follows e Logical Library 1 will contain Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazines e Logical Library 2 will contain Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazines e Logical Library 3 will contain Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge magazine e Logical Library 4 will contain Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine The I O Station and the reserved slot or dedicated cleaning slot DCS if one is assigned are shared among all logical libraries Note When reducing the number of drives in your library update the Logical Library configuration This will remove the Attention LED on the front panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen indicating that a drive is missing Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element addressing and drive numbering Replacing LTO half high drives with full high drives may require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the drive element addressing and drive numbering See Configure Library Restore Defaults on page 5 52 5 42 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Logical Libraries ber of Logical Pria E Currently configured 3 a77ug098 Figure 5 35 The 4U library Configure Library Logical Libraries
296. library using a configuration file that was saved with the same version of firmware currently installed in the library Important Restoring factory defaults will wipe out all the previous configuration data Table 5 4 Factory Default Settings Restored Item Default Setting Comments Autoclean Disabled Logical Libraries 1 Active Slots Maximum number of slots in library minus I O Station I O Station Enabled 2U library has 1 slot I O Station 4U library has 3 slot I O Station Encryption None License Key is protected if previously entered Ethernet Setting Auto DHCP Enabled Note DNS server addresses if available will be automatically assigned If the DHCP server does not find any DNS server the DNS fields will be set to 0 0 0 0 Network IP Mode IPv4 Only Bar Code Label Length Reported to 8 Host SNMP Disabled Event Notification Disabled User Access Restore from Operator Control Panel or Web User Interface Admin secure default Library Mode Random Library Name Blank Host Name Depends on MAC Address Logs amp Traces Error Log Mode Continuous 5 26 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 5 4 Factory Default Settings continued Restored Item Default Setting Comments Path Failover Key No change License Key is protected if previously entered OC
297. ll open Using the left navigation pane select the desired Help page To close the Help page click the red X in the upper right corner of the screen Logging out of the Web User Interface It is important to log out of the Web User Interface before using the Operator Control panel To log out of the Web User Interface click Logout in the upper right corner of the current screen Important If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser window you will not log out of the Web User Interface 2 8 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 3 Installation Planning Before installing your library take time to review the following information Determining the Number of Logical Libraries You can partition the library into as many logical libraries as there are drives in the library Basic Guidelines e Each logical library must contain at least one drive e A library configuration of exactly one logical library equals the entire physical library e The library issues a warning to the user if media is moved across logical libraries Library Sharing The library s default configuration allows a single application to operate the library through a single control path Often it is advantageous to be able to share a single library between heterogeneous dissimilar or homogeneous similar applications Some applications and some servers do not allow for sharing a l
298. lots and Drive Slot Element Addresses and Physical Locations on page B llor 4U Library I O Slots Storage Slots and Drive Slots Element Addresses and Physical Locations on page B 2 for determining slot location 4 Insert cartridges in the right magazine s 5 Put all magazines back into the library The library will automatically start up and perform an inventory check Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge See the Note below for 4U libraries with a Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS The following criteria must be followed for Auto Clean to function 1 The Auto Clean function must be configured On or Enabled e Operator Control Panel Configure gt Library Settings gt Enabled e Web User Interface Configure Library gt General gt Auto Clean gt checkmark Note Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS This DCS can be retained and is supported by future library firmware updates However library firmware later than 1 95 will allow removal of the DCS thus enabling this slot to be used as a storage slot Once the DCS is removed the Auto Clean cleaning cartridge slot must be configured as described below If the DCS has been removed it can only be reinstated by restoring factory default settings To remove the DCS perform the following procedure using the Operator Control Panel OCP OCP gt Configure gt Library Settings gt General gt Remove DCS gt No Yes gt Save
299. ls installed Proper placement of the Repair Identification RID Tag Types of Receptacles Internal view of the library Drive connection card showing screws and plastic cover Half high drive with ihe connection card moved to the side showing the screws The drive brick showing the cables to be unplugged Removing the bezel and the cover front the 4U internal drive Removing the bezel and fhe cover front the half high internal drive Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge Rewinding tape into cartridge Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train 10 25 10 26 10 27 10 28 10 28 10 29 11 7 A 1 A 4 A 5 Ab A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A 10 A 10 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 18 A 19 A 20 A 21 A 22 A 23 A 24 B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 E 1 E 2 Leader Block Assembly LBA Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train Leader Block Assembly LBA Using hex wrench to rewind ue into cartridge Rewinding tape into cartridge Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train Leader Block Assembly LBA Rewinding tape into cartridge Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge Drive with cover iemoved io reveal pear train Leader Block Assembly LBA Rewinding tape into cartridge Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train
300. m Configuration of a 4 Partition System A four partition system must have four drives Each partition contains one drive and one magazine Drive 4 Element Address 256 Drive 3 Element Address 256 Drive 2 Element Address 256 Drive 1 Element Address 256 Magazine Magazine 2 4 Magazine Magazine 1 3 t d 3 Front side N Figure 3 4 Configuration of a four partition system SCSI Element Addressing Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element start address default value 256 It will be incremented from the bottom to the top slots for every drive slot There is one exception to this addressing scheme to accommodate libraries currently in the field A 4U library containing only full high drives will continue to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257 thus causing no interruptions to their operation Drive slots will still be incremented by 1 for each drive slot position Note Exchanging drives with different form factors will result in the library needing to be reconfigured Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 5 4U Unit with only FH drives 1 logical library SCSI Element Slot 4 257 3 2 256 1 4U Unit with FH and HH drives 1 logical library SCSI Element Slot 4 258 3 257 2 256 1 oO Figure 3 5 Examples of SCSI element addressing 3 6 Using
301. magazine and the first drive The second partition will contain the second magazine and the second drive The I O station if configured as I O will be shared as is done with the partitioned 4U library One full high drive is Drive 1 When using half high drives the first half high drive position will be called Drive 1 The second half high drive position will be called Drive 2 Partitioning of 4U Libraries When one or more half high drives are added to a 4U library the drive naming will change Currently the first full high drive is Drive 1 and the second full high drive is Drive 2 When you consider that each full high drive slot may contain one or two half high drives there are four potential drives in the space that used to occupy two As a result the first half high drive position or the first full high drive position will be called Drive 1 The second half high drive Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 3 position will be called Drive 2 The third half high drive position or the second full high drive position will be called Drive 3 The fourth half high drive position will be called Drive 4 Mixing of Drives The library supports a mix of full high and half high drives in the same physical library and the same logical library They support a mix of Gen 3 and Gen 4 drives in the same physical library and the same logical library They will also support a mix of SCSI SAS and Fibre Channel in the sa
302. mation on all of the functions available on our library using both the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface see Chapter 5 Operations on page 5 1 For default library settings see Restore Defaults on page 5 25 Choosing Your Configuration Method If you choose to use the factory defaults for your library configuration go to If you choose to use the Web User Interface for configuring your library go to Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface on page 4 16 Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 15 Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration The table below shows the main default library settings If you wish to use the defaults no other changes need to be made before using your library Item Default Setting Logical Libraries 1 Active Slots Maximum I O Slots Enabled DHCP Enabled Internet Protocol IPv4 Only Bar Code Label Length 8 Library Mode Random AutoClean Disabled Encryption None IPv6 Stateless Autoconfig Off For a full list of factory defaults see Configure Restore Defaults on page 5 25 Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface To configure your library using the Web User Interface complete the following procedures 1 Establishing Remote Access to Your Library on page 4 17 Logging on to the Web User Interface on page 4 18 SOMNATAR WD Entering Path Failover Feature Activat
303. me physical library and the same logical library however mixing drive interface types in the same logical library is not recommended Configuration of a 1 Partition System A one partition system configured for a 4U library contains any and all drives present in any drive positions and it will contain all four magazines Drive 4 Drive 4 Drive 2 Element Address Dea Element Address 259 rive 259 i i Element Address Dri Element Address Magazine al 257 rive 3 258 Drive 3 Element Address Element Address 258 258 Drive 2 Drive 2 i Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3 Element Address Element Address Dri z 256 256 rive 1 Drive 1 5 Element Address Element Address x 256 256 Front side Figure 3 1 Configuration of a one partition system Configuration of a 2 Partition System A two partition system must have at least two drives installed One drive must be installed in either drive position 1 or drive position 2 and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4 Partition 1 contains any drives in drive position 1 and drive position 2 Partition 1 will also contain magazine 1 and magazine 2 Partition 2 contains any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4 Partition 2 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4 Drive 4 Drive 4 Drive 2 Element Address Ba
304. microprogram load Incomp Mag Incompatible Magazine This message appears on the Operator Control Panel during library initializing It occurs during factory restore or VPD This is not a real issue since it takes the library a while to configure initial microprogram load IML The action of loading a microprogram from an external storage to writable control storage initiator The component that executes a command The initiator can be the host system or the tape control unit INST Installation interface A shared boundary An interface might be a hardware component to link two devices or it might be a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer programs Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 A network layer protocol for packet switched internetworks IPv4 supports 2 about 4 3 billion addresses Internet Protocol version 6 IPv6 A network layer protocol for packet switched internetworks It is designated as the successor of IPv4 the current version of the Internet Protocol for general use on the Internet The main improvement brought by IPv6 is the increase in the number of addresses available for networked devices allowing for example each mobile phone and mobile electronic device to have its own address interposer The part used to convert a 68 pin connector to a 50 pin D shell connector intervention required Manual action is needed INTRO Introduction I O Input output IOP In
305. mised Ensure that air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side of the unit Connect the equipment to the supply circuit such that overloading of the circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrent protection To provide the correct power connection to a rack refer to the rating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine the total power requirement of the supply circuit For sliding drawers Do not pull out or install any drawer or feature if the rack stabilizer brackets are not attached to the rack Do not pull out more than one drawer at a time The rack may become unstable if you pull out more than one drawer at a time For fixed drawers Do not move a fixed drawer Attempting to move the drawer partially or completely out of the rack may cause the rack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the rack R001 Safety and Environmental Notices X X CAUTION Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves rack stability during relocation Follow the general guidelines as listed below whenever you relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building e Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting at the top of the rack cabinet When possible restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it If this configuration is not known you must do the following Remove all devices in the 32U posit
306. mp Figure 4 21 Example The 4U library Configure Library General screen 3 If your library has more than one drive proceed to Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for Your Library If your library has one drive proceed to Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Ke Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for Your Library Note Review the information in Determining the Number of Logical Libraries lon page 3 1 before completing the procedure in this section If you have a 2U or 4U library with only_one drive or do not wish to partition our library proceed to the next section Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key on page 4 22 Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 21 One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries If you partition a multi drive library each of the magazines must be assigned to a logical library on a magazine boundary The entire magazine must be part of one logical library only Note If you have a 2U library with two drives you have the capability to have two logical libraries In a fully populated 4U library with four half high drives and four logical libraries resource assignments will be as follows e Logical Library 1 will contain Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazine e Logical Library 2 will contain Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazine e Logical Library 3 will contain Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge mag
307. n SME require a license key which is available by purchasing Feature Code 5900 In addition to the feature license key SME and LME require the implementation of an external Encryption Key Manager EKM to provide and manage encryption keys With AME encryption key management is handled by the application Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption Chapter 5 Operations 5 43 SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive Full High or Half High Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge Library firmware level 4 0 or higher Drive firmware level 74H4 or higher Application capable of managing encryption keys Note At the publication of this manual the only application with this capability is Tivoli Storage Manager Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption and System Managed Encryption Feature Code 5900 Transparent LTO Encryption SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive Full High or Half High Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge Library firmware level 4 0 or higher Drive firmware level 74H4 or higher Encryption Key Manager application EKM applications include the following Encryption Key Manager EKM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager TKLM Unless specifically stated otherwise this manual will use the term EKM to infer the Encryption Key Manager or the Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Setting or Changing a Drive s Method of Encryption 1 w Enter your library s IP Address in an internet browser address field and pre
308. n D Thumb Screws Power Receptacle Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 9 If the Library does not power on 1 With library power OFF and the power cord unplugged loosen the three thumb screws H grasp two of the thumb screws pull the power supply out half way reseat the power supply and tighten the three thumb screws Ensure the power cord is plugged in at the power supply M and at the electrical outlet then turn library power ON a For power supplies with LED s the Blue LED will be lit if AC power is good b If your power supply does not have LED s feel for air flowing out of the cooling fan grill on the rear of the library H AC is good if air is flowing from the cooling fan grill If power appears to be missing a Plug the power cord into another electrical outlet b If power is still missing plug another device into the outlet to test c If the outlet tests OK try another power cord with the library For power supplies with LED s if the Amber LED is lit replace the power supply refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 1 If your power supply has no LED s and you have verified that the electrical outlet works properly but the power supply is still failing replace it refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 11 If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library Operator Control Panel and front panel LED s may be functioning howe
309. n each vertical rail in your rack Note A 2U library requires 2U 3 5 in two EIA of rack space A 4U library requires 4U 7 in four EIA of rack space a77ug133 oe Figure 4 7 Examples of EIA units for round hole and square hole installations Two EIA units for round hole and Wide Gaps within the EIA unit 2 square hole installation 4 Narrow Gaps between EIA units 3 Remove the adhesive security tape on the backside of the rails Using the screws for your rack type round holes or square holes and a 2 Phillips 4 8 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide screwdriver and ensuring that the flange on each rail points toward each other to form a shelf secure one rail to each side of the rack in your chosen rack location Secure both the front and back of each rail to the rack then tighten all 8 screws The narrow end of each rail goes to the rear of the rack The rails extend to fit a_variety of rack depths Each rail requires 2 EIA units of rack space J in Figure 4 8 a Q O je 5 N oO l Figure 4 8 Rear view of a rack showing the narrow part of the rail l l j Figure 4 9 Front view of a rack showing the rails installed l a77ug196 4 Using the Torx wrench included in your shipment remove the screws Ml as shown in Figure 4 10 on page 4 10 Screw locations on the
310. n more about IPv6 visit http www ipv6 org Chapter 1 Product Description 1 5 SNMP Messaging Occasionally the library may encounter a situation that you want to know about such as an open magazine or a fault that causes the library to stop The library provides a standard TCP IP protocol called Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP to send alerts about conditions such as need for operator intervention over a TCP IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring station These alerts are called SNMP traps Using the information supplied in each SNMP trap the monitoring station together with customer supplied software can alert operations personnel of possible problems or operator interventions that occur SNMP Traps SNMP traps are alerts or status messages that can be collected monitored and used to proactively manage attached libraries using SNMP protocol with the host server s In summary each trap provides the following information e Product Identification such as product name description manufacturer model number firmware level and the URL that the trap is designated for e Product Status such as the severity of the trap status current and previous and the time the trap occurred e Library State physical device status such as identification and status of devices that are monitored In the case of the library it would include enclosure power supply controller magazine status drive count cartridge slot count
311. n this form Comments Thank you for your support Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form If you would like a response from IBM please fill in the following information Name Address Company or Organization Phone No E mail address Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You GA32 0545 07 Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 40 ARMONK NEW YORK POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE International Business Machines Corporation Information Development Department GZW 9000 South Rita Road Tucson Arizona U S A 85775 4401 NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES Fold and Tape GA32 0545 07 Please do not staple Fold and Tape a a a a E EENEN a a ee Cut or Fold Along Line Cut or Fold Along Line Part Number 45E6627 Printed in USA 1P P N 4566627 GA32 0545 07 ELSE eddy ouryor sy IPMA MAIG pure oye10d dnjog Areiqry oder QOZESL pue Leaqry edey OOLESL Arerqry odey OOZESL pur reaqrT ode OOLESL e8eI01g weysks WAT gt UOLPEWIOJUL BULAS
312. naccessible during operation or is within Class I limits External safety agencies have reviewed the library and have obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply Performing the Safety Inspection Procedure Before you service the unit perform the following safety inspection procedure 1 2 Stop all the activities between the host and the library s tape drives Turn off the power to the library by pushing in on the Power button 1 shown in Figure 1 1 on Page 1 1 for 4 seconds If drives are SCSI attached disconnect the SCSI cable and check the SCSI bus terminator for damage Unplug the library s power cord or cords from the electrical outlet and the library power supply Check the library s power cord for damage such as a pinched cut or frayed cord If drives are SCSI attached check the tape drive s SCSI bus signal cable for damage If drives are FC SAS attached check the tape drive s FC SAS cable for damage Check the cover of the library for sharp edges damage or alterations that expose its internal parts Check the cover of the library for proper fit It should be in place and secure Check the product label at the rear of the library to make sure that it matches the voltage at your outlet Safety and Environmental Notices xvii Rack Safety The following general safety information should be used for all rack mounted devices DANGER e Always lower the leveling pads on the rac
313. nada Avis de conformit la r glementation d Industrie Canada Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conform la norme NMB 003 du Canada Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis Hinweis f r Ger te der Klasse A EU Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertr glichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU Richtlinie 2004 108 EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit in den EU Mitgliedsstaaten und h lt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein Um dieses sicherzustellen sind die Ger te wie in den Handb chern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben Des Weiteren d rfen auch nur von der IBM empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden IBM bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der IBM ver ndert bzw wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt eingebaut werden EN 55022 Klasse A Ger te m ssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden Warnung Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A Diese Einrichtung kann im I 4 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Wohnbereich Funk St6rungen verursachen in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden angemessene Mafsnahmen zu ergreifen und daf r aufzukommen Deutschland Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertr
314. nce key label IL_NBU_2505 would be generated for a cartridge in pool 2505 7 A primary and secondary EKM server can be set for each logical library Each partition has its own Encryption and EKM settings Maintaining primary and secondary EKM servers is desired for maximum availability of encrypted backup and recovery These settings are required for Library Managed Encryption only Enter the EKM Server Setting information e Primary IP address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the IP address of the primary EKM server e Primary TCP port After entering the Primary IP address the library will automatically set the value of the Primary TCP port e Secondary IP address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the IP address of the secondary EKM server e Secondary TCP port After entering the Secondary IP address the library will automatically set the value of the Secondary TCP port Note The Default Port for TCP SSL disabled is 3801 The Default Port for SSL is 443 These values are the default values set by the library They can be changed depending on the user configuration but the user has to make sure they match the EKM properties file Note The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering Support only 8 Click Activate to apply the changes 9 Record the Feature Activation Key or apply one of the labels on the Appendix G Library Configuration Form on page G 1 for future reference It is important to save your extra Feature Activation Key labels in
315. nd make personnel aware of data recovery procedures Ensure Proper Packaging e When shipping a cartridge use the original or better packaging e Always ship or store a cartridge in a jewel case e Use only a recommended shipping container that securely holds the cartridge in its jewel case during transportation Ultrium Turtlecases by Perm A Store have been tested and found to be satisfactory see Figure 6 5 They are available at http www turtlecase com a69i0077 Figure 6 5 Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase e Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope Always place it in a box or package e If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material ensure the following Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from dust moisture and other contaminants Pack the cartridge snugly do not allow it to move around 6 8 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Double box the cartridge place it inside a box then place that box inside the shipping box and add padding between the two boxes see Figure 6 6 a69i0076 Figure 6 6 Double boxing tape cartridges for shipping Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions Before you use a tape cartridge acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive the time will vary depending on
316. ndom access memory A storage device into which data is entered and from which data is retrieved in a nonsequential manner RAS Reliability availability and serviceability record A collection of related data or words treated as a unit recording density The number of bits in a single linear track measured per unit of length of the recording medium recoverable error An error condition that allows continued execution of a program ref Reference reg Register re inventory To inventory again retention The process or function of tightening the tape onto the cartridge if it is sensed that the tape has a loose wrap on the cartridge RFC Request for Comments Request for Comments RFC documents are a series of memoranda encompassing new research innovations and methodologies applicable to Internet technologies RH Relative humidity RMU Remote Management Unit An Ethernet interface that allows remote administration The RMU performs many of the same functions as the front panel interface These functions include moving tapes system operations options networking options security options running diagnostic tests and performing system updates robot Accessor robotics Accessor assembly Router Assigned IPv6 Address IPv6 addresses created by the network router and assigned to the library similar to DHCP RPQ Request for price quotation R W Read write S s Seconds of time SAC Servi
317. nection is directly attached to a server or laptop a crossover ethernet cable may be required Note It is the customer s responsibility to supply the crossover ethernet cable if one is required Installing a Fibre Channel Interposer Feature Code 5096 For a list of supported adapters and required interposers go to the Technical Support section on the web at http www ibm com storage To install the interposer refer to the procedure below Host Fibre Channel Network 11P1373 Library Fibre Channel Drive Connector a67m0276 Figure 4 17 Interposer installation 1 Connect the host SC fibre cable to the matching side of the interposer 2 Connect the drive LC fibre side of the interposer to the drive library Connecting a Power Cord Attention This product can ONLY be used with an approved power cord for your specific geographic region Use of an unapproved power cord may result in e not meeting individual country specific safety requirements e overheating with potential personal injury and or property damage and e a fracture resulting in the internal contacts being exposed which potentially could subject the user to a shock hazard For every power supply in the library complete the following steps 1 Remove the protective label from the power receptacle on your library 4 14 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a77ug197 Figure
318. nfig Test This test confirms that a drive is correctly configured in the EKM to service key requests To run the Key Path Diagnostic complete the following procedure 1 Log on to the Web User Interface Refer to 2 Quiesce all drives then unload all drives 3 Click Service then Key Path Diagnostics Kay Path Diagnostics Drive IP Address Drive Test EthernetTest EKMPathTest EKM Config Test 9 11 221 224 Passed Peassed Failed N A 9 11 221 242 Passed Passed In Progress 2 MA IN A 8 z 9 11 221 204 Passed Passed Failed N A 9 11 221 224 Peassed Pessed In Progress 5 01 02 2008 15 25 40 Figure 5 53 Service Library Perform Key Path Diagnostics page 4 Click Start Tests Note If you have just enabled encryption on your library wait for all LME drives to be displayed in the table and the Start Tests button to become active Each test will show a result of Passed or Failed Test results will clear e When the test is rerun e When the library is rebooted The time and date of the last test will appear below the Key Path Diagnostics screen If any of the tests fail refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting on page a additional information Service Library Upgrade Firmware TM Note The IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library is a customer installed unit The customer is responsible for the setup and maintenance of the tape library The customer will be charged for
319. ng Ultrium Media 6 9 a69i0078 Figure 6 7 Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge e Check that the leader pin is properly seated see H in Figure 6 8 on page 6 12 e If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery Discard the mishandled cartridge e Review handling and shipping procedures Handle the Cartridge Carefully e Do not drop the cartridge If the cartridge drops slide the cartridge door back and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pin retaining spring clips see FA in Figure 6 8 on page 6 12 If the leader pin has become dislodged go to Repositioning or e amp a Leader Pin on e Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge Handling the tape can damage the tape s surface or edges which may interfere with read or write reliability Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake mechanism in the cartridge e Do not stack more than six cartridges e Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse Degaussing makes the tape unusable Examples of Cartridge Problems Example Split Cartridge Case see Figure 6 7 The cartridge s case is damaged There is a high possibility of media damage and potential loss Perform the following steps 1 Look for cartridge mishandling 2 Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit part number 0
320. ng activities have been performed 7 10 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide BEFORE POWERING OFF THE LIBRARY write the drive dump to flash It is important to preserve the drive dump on the drive for analysis by IBM Technical Support For instructions refer to Writing a Drive Dump to Flash Memory on page A 25 Note If you are instructed by IBM Technical Support to copy the drive dump to your host computer use one of the following methods e Web Use Tetere Retenta Service Library Save Dave Damp nl TEDT Refer to TEM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Toot TDI of 2 Ensure that the drive firmware is at the latest level visit http www ibm com storage To determine current library and drive firmware levels using the Operator Control Panel e Library firmware Monitor gt Library gt Identity gt Version e Drive firmware Monitor gt Drives gt Identity select a drive gt Firmware Rev Try reseating the drive sled library See Cycle power to the library If air does not flow from the drive sled cooling fan grill on the rear of the library replace the drive sled CRU Several library error codes also point to ait roblems See Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled on page 10 3 If the drive is experiencing permanent or temporary errors or if the amber Clean LED is lit on the front panel of the library select Clean Drive from the Ope
321. ng cartridge bar code labels The library stores the customized inventory data in memory Library firmware supports a 6 or 8 character volume serial number VOLSER on the bar code label on the tape cartridge 1 4 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Encryption The LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive supports host Application Managed Encryption AME Library Managed Encryption LME and System Managed Encryption SME using T10 encryption methods for SAS and Fibre Channel drives only Data encryption is supported with LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges only Encryption is also supported with library firmware version 4 0 or higher The encryption enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to encrypt and decrypt host tape application data Encryption policy and encryption keys are provided by the host application or host server A drive digital certificate is installed at manufacturing time Each drive receives a unique serial number and certificate The T10 application may validate each drive instance by checking the drive s digital certificate The LTO Ultrium 4 encryption environment is complex and requires knowledge beyond that of product trained Service Support Representatives SSRs The Encryption function on tape drives desktop stand alone and within libraries is configured and managed by the customer In some instances SSRs are required to enable encryption at a hardware level when
322. ng up A 22 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a82hd002 Figure A 22 Rewinding tape into cartridge Loader motor worm gear Takeup reel motor A Outer guide rail B Supply reel motor WARNING Do Not Touch 2 Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the supply reel motor J clockwise 3 Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Ensure that you do not stretch the tape Continue spooling until all tape is removed from the takeup reel 4 Locate the threader intermediate gear J near the rear of the drive You can use your finger to rotate the threader intermediate gear J and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear H clockwise This draws the tape leader block assembly LBA into the cartridge Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 23 y a82hd003 Figure A 23 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train Threader A Threader mechanism Loader motor worm intermediate gear gear gear 5 As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge you should hear the leader pin retention spring clips click into place If you do not hear the click continue rolling until the threader intermediate gear F stops The LBA is in the correct position Note Be sure to kee
323. ntity of data that can be stored without compression In 2 1 compression twice as much data can be stored with compression as can be stored without compression A A Ampere ac Alternating current access method A technique for moving data between main storage and input or output devices accessor This component contains the library robot and bar code reader The accessor moves cartridges to and from the I O Station storage slots and tape drives adapter card A circuit board that adds function to a computer adj Adjustment AH The Authentication Header AH is intended to guarantee connectionless integrity and data origin authentication of IP datagrams Further it can optionally protect against replay attacks by using the sliding window technique and discarding old packets AIX Advanced Interactive Executive IBM s implementation of the UNIX operating system The System p system among others uses AIX as it s operating system alphanumeric Pertaining to a character set that contains letters numerals and usually other characters such as punctuation marks alter To change ambient temperature The temperature of air or other media in a designated area particularly the area surrounding equipment AME Application Managed Encryption Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 ampere A A unit of measure for electric current that is equivalent to a flow of one coulomb per second or to the current prod
324. number of the cartridge X X X X currently in the drive If the drive does not contain a cartridge None is displayed Chapter 5 Operations 5 35 Table 5 9 Drive Status page elements continued Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library SCSI Fibre SAS SCSI Fibre SAS Drive Error If the drive has generated an error code it is X X X X X X Code displayed here If the drive has not generated an error No Error will be displayed Drive This indicates whether or not the drive is X X X X X X Activity operating Port A This indicates whether Port A is logged on or out X X X X Status Port Name This is the name assigned to Port A on the drive X X Speed This is the current speed setting of the drive X X Choices are Auto where the drive will automatically negotiate the speed of the drive to match that of the server 1Gb s 2Gb s or 4Gb s Topology This is the type of connection to the host N Port X X ID FC AL Loop This is the Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop ID of X X ID the drive Hashed SAS The Hashed SAS address is a value which is X X Address calculated from the WWID for use on the SAS interface Encryption This shows the status of any encryption that is X X X X X X Status enabled on the drive Encryption This is the type of encryption that is enabled on X X X X X X method the drive Key path This is the path used for tr
325. of Partition See BOP bezel Decorative and safety cover bicolored Having two colors bit Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary numbering system J 1 BOM or bill of materials A list of specific types and amounts of direct materials expected to be used to produce a given job or quantity of output BOP BOP Beginning of Partition is a SCSI term which in a single partition format is the same as beginning of tape It means that policy is determined on writes at LB logical block zero the first block in the partition Appending to a tape or overwriting at a non zero LB does not change the policy already in use for that tape Border Gateway Protocol BGP BGP is the core routing protocol of the Internet It works by maintaining a table of IP networks or prefixes which designate network reachability among autonomous systems AS browser A client program that initiates requests to a Web server and displays the information that the server returns buffer A routine or storage used to compensate for a difference in rate of flow of data or time of occurrence of events when transferring data from one device to another bus A facility for transferring data between several devices located between two end points only one device being able to transmit at a given moment byte A string consisting of a certain number of bits usually 8 that are treated as a unit and represent a character A fundamental
326. omments by e E mailing IBM Internet or IBMLink from US starpubs us ibm com IBMLink from Canada STARPUBS at TORIBM Include the following information in your e mail Exact publication title Form number for example GA32 1234 04 or part number located on the back cover of the publication Page number to which you are referring e Using the Readers Comments form at the back of this publication e Mailing your comments to International Business Machines Corporation Information Development Department GZW 9000 South Rita Road Tucson AZ 85747 0001 USA Contacting IBM Technical Support In the USA Call 1 800 IBM_SERV 1 800 426 7378 Note Before calling complete all the steps in Contacting IBM Technical Support in chapter 9 All other Countries Regions Visit http www ibm com To open a Service Request online Under Support amp downloads click on Open a service request Summary of Changes The following information has been added to the GA32 0545 06 edition e SNMP Messaging Management Information Base MIB e Updated Remove Replace Tape Drive Sled chapter e Updated Drive Sense Data e Updated and Additional Error Codes e Accessibility Information The following information has been added to the GA32 0545 07 edition e DNS addressing e Save Restore to library USB port using OCP e Save Restore file to computer using library web UI e Revised Remove Replace procedure for library en
327. ompression interface Identity gt Data ibrary Drive ON OFF Compression Drive Fibre Worldwide Node Name Monitor gt Drive gt Identity gt Drive n WWNN Monitor Library gt Drive Status Drive Hashed SAS Address Not available with this interface Monitor Library gt Drive Status gt Hashed SAS Address Drive Interface type Configure gt Drive gt Drive Interface Configure Configure Library gt Drive Drive SCSI Inquiry string Monitor gt Drive gt Identity gt Drive n Product ID Monitor Library gt Drive Identity Drive turn power ON OFF Service gt Service gt Drive Power Configure Library gt Drive Drive activity current Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Drive n Activity Monitor Library gt Drive Status Drive fan status Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Drive n Cooling Monitor Library gt Drive Status Drive Dump save Not available with this interface Service Library gt Save Drive Dump Encryption Not available with this Configure Library gt activate interface Encryption Encryption Not available with this Configure Library gt configure interface Encryption Encryption Not available with this Service Library gt Perform testing interface Key Path Diagnostics configuration 5 4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and S
328. onfiguring I O Stations mwd Reserving Slots 5 60 Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled 10 3 Removing a Tape Drive Sled 10 4 Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 1 pees re Se eee ing a Tape Drive Sled 10 9 Data Cartridges 1 e 20 Removing the Slot Blocker 2U Library 10 10 peri pas pally a re rn ar Replacing a Power Supply a oo 10 11 a oe ys Replacing a Library Controller Card 2 10 12 WORM Write Once Read Many do aoe a nea Reblacing Ci Magazines 10 14 WORM Media Nee oe ioa Replacing Magazine Fiducials 10 14 Data Security on WORM Media soa toa pea Replacing the Library Enclosure 10 15 WORM Media Errors Se aot Preparing the Defective Library for Requirements for WORM Capability 6 4 Replacement 10 15 Cleaning Cartridge sa bA Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Cartridge Memory Chip LTO CM 2 we OA Library Enclosure 10 16 Bar Code Label E Installing Your Drive s in the Replacement Guidelines for Using Bar Code ab ls 6 6 Library Enclosure 10 18 Write Protect Switch butor e koan t oa s a 67 Swapping Library Controller Card woe oe 10 21 Handling the Cartridges 1 2 67 Swapping Cartridge Magazines 10 23 Provide Training So wa o 2 ey 27668 Swapping Power Supplies 10 26 Ensure Proper Packaging lt a 6 8 Installing the Replacement Library Phelacute 10 2
329. ontrol Panel to determine the IP Address assigned to your library Navigate to Monitor gt Library gt Identity Scroll down to IP Address and make note of the address Enter the IP Address in your internet browser address field to access your library with the Web User Interface For IPv4 enter your library s static IP Address using the 0 0 0 0 format four octets For IPv6 enter your library s static IP Address or Router Assigned IP Address using the following format http 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 To determine your Router Assigned IP Address navigate to Monitor gt Library gt Network on the Operator Control Panel For the IPv6 Router Assigned Addresses to be displayed on the Operator Control Panel the Network must be configured to IPv6 Only and the Stateless Autoconfig on the must be set to ON For Dual Stack IPv4 IPv6 enter your library s information for both IPv4 and IPv6 4 When the login screen appears a b Select admin for a User ID Enter secure for a Password 4 18 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide User ID Admin Password a77ug070 Log in Figure 4 19 Log in screen on the Web User Interface Verifying Updating Firmware It is important to run the latest level of firmware To ensure that you are running the latest levels of library firmware drive firmware and SNMP MIB Management Information Base file complete this procedure 1 Ve
330. ontrol paths Thus the data processing for e Department X is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 1 e Department Y is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 2 Using Multiple Control Paths In addition to creating multiple logical libraries any logical library can be configured to have more than one control path When configuring additional control paths additional library sharing configurations and availability options are made possible Access to the logical library is on a first come first served basis and each control path for a logical library can accept commands while the library is in use by another control path By default only the first drive in a logical library will be LUN 1 enabled Note Microsoft Windows 2000 and Microsoft Windows 2003 Removable Storage Manager RSM does not support multiple control paths within a logical library It is recommended that RSM be disabled to use this feature For a particular logical library you can enable as many control paths as there are drives in that logical library Using Multiple Control Paths for System i iSeries and AS 400 Attachment The use of control paths for the System i iSeries and AS 400 servers is unique In general every iSeries adapter must recognize the control path that is associated with the drives to which it is connected For the iSeries and AS 400 servers one to six drives are supported by LVD and Fibre Channel
331. or and Service Guide Login For static IP Addresses only After establishing a connection to the library open any HTML browser and enter the IP address of the library To configure the Web User Interface ou must first set the IP address using the Operator Control Panel Configure Network on page 5 23 or Configure Library Network on Important Some options of the Web User Interface take the library OFFLINE This inactive mode can interfere with host based application software causing data loss Make sure the library is idle before attempting to perform any remote operations that will take the library OFFLINE To login select the Role type and enter the correct password There are four levels of access e User Normal user level The User only has access to Monitor Library menus e Superuser The Superuser has access to the Monitor Library and Manage Library sections e Admin Admin user level The Admin user has access to all menus except those restricted to Service only e Service Service personnel user level Access to this level is for Service personnel only Service personnel have access to all menus Note Passwords are case sensitive Use the following password for logging in as an Admin user secure Each level affects which areas you have access to and what actions you can initiate from those areas For DHCP use the Operator Control Panel to determine the IP Address assigned to your library Navigate
332. or the requested accessor action stops whichever is longer At which time the Operator Control Panel will return to System Driven mode If necessary the Operator Control Panel automatically transitions to the System Driven mode When this occurs the library must remember the previous function before the display mode changed Therefore the next button pressed only transitions the Operator Control Panel to the User Interaction mode from the System Driven mode In case of the activated user security feature the User Interaction mode is restricted to Login and Monitor menu items until a user logs in with a correct password Operator Control Panel Philosophy Operator Control Panel operation must obey some basic rules These rules of operation constitute a philosophy e Any operational conflict between commands received over the host interface or the Web User Interface and those entered via the Operator Control Panel will be avoided with a reservation mechanism on a first come first served basis Any reservation by the Operator Control Panel is canceled by an Operator Control Panel logout or a timeout which cancels the User Interaction Mode e Library firmware will not allow a user to select an impossible request Those situations will include but are not limited to Moving a cartridge from any source to a full slot Moving a cartridge from an empty slot Loading a cartridge from any source to a full drive Unloading a cartridg
333. orm the following 1 Check the Ethernet connection between the library and the EKM server 2 Check the TCP IP configuration of the library and the server 3 Check that the EKM is correctly installed and configured and that the EKM application is properly started refer to your EKM documentation 4 Ensure that the tape drive is registered in the EKM refer to your EKM documentation 5 Ensure that a default key label is defined in the EKM refer to your EKM documentation If you are using application managed encryption or system managed encryption check your key proxy server s documentation for a similar test Lost Encryption Feature Activation Key Refer to Contacting IBM Technical Support on Changed drive type or position in library LME capable drive does not exercise Key Path Diagnostics Resubmit encryption settings under Configure Library gt Encryption even if the settings do not change ERROR CODES 7 2 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table continued Problem Solution There is an error code in the error log Most library or drive errors will result in an error code or error message on the Operator Control Panel_display An error code history is maintained in the library or drive error log See Service Library View Drive Logs on page 5 55 for how to get the error log over the Oper
334. ould be acclimated for at least 24 hours before being used particularly if it has been stored at a substantially different temperature or level of humidity than the library Refer to Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions on page 6 9 e Any cartridge that is suspected of being defective or contaminated should NOT be reused in any drive Power Supply or Fan Issues Check the power supply or redundant power supply for failure and also check any power supply fans Replace any defective units Refer to for a redundant power supply failure on a 4U library and Isolating al Power Supply Problem on page 7 8 Clean Drive LED e Ensure that you are using an Ultrium universal cleaning cartridge see Cleaning Cartridge on page 6 4 Ensure that the cleaning cartridge has not expired A drive will automatically eject an expired cleaning cartridge A cleaning cartridge is good for 50 cleans If our cleaning cartridge has expired refer to Ordering Media Supplies on page 6 19 for information on ordering a new cleaning cartridge e If the problem still exists refer to Contacting IBM Technical Support on page 9 5 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 3 Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table continued Problem Solution Error LED If the Error LED remains ON after completing any user action listed for the error code in Chapter 8 Error Codes on
335. our entries Press the DOWN button to select Gateway For Pv4 enter only an IPv4 Gateway address For IPv6 enter only an IPv6 Gateway address For IPv4 amp IPv6 enter a Gateway address for both IPv4 and IPv6 a Press the SELECT button to highlight the Gateway field b Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit s in your library s Gateway address Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 17 Cc Press the SELECT button to apply your entries 9 Press the DOWN button to select Ethernet a 22900 Press the DOWN button to highlight the Ethernet field Press the SELECT button to change the Ethernet setting Press the DOWN button to select a new setting Press the SELECT button to apply the new setting Press the DOWN button and select one of the following e Save to apply your new configuration e Cancel to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were 10 Press the CANCEL button until the Home screen displays 11 Press the CANCEL button to return to the home screen 12 Power cycle the library to initialize your configuration Logging on to the Web User Interface To complete the configuration of your library using the Web User Interface follow the steps below 1 Return to the Home screen on the Operator Control Panel 2 On your host computer open an Internet browser 3 In the browser address field enter your library s IP Address a For DHCP use the Operator C
336. p program on your host computer use the program to run an audit of the library after cartridges have been removed to update the backup program Configuring I O Stations and Reserving Slots 2U libraries usually have 1 slot for an I O Station while 4U libraries have 3 slots assigned as an I O Station These slots can be configured as storage if needed To configure the I O Station using the Web User Interface follow these steps e Go to Configure Library gt General e To enable the I O Station place a check mark in the I O Station Enabled box If it is checked as enabled the first 3 physical slots in the lower left magazine in a 4U or the first physical slot in the left magazine in a 2U is configured as an I O station If the I O Station Enabled box is not checked the slots are configured as storage Dedicated Cleaning Slot Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS This DCS can be retained and is supported by future library firmware updates Library firmware after 1 95 will allow removal of the DCS thus enabling this slot to be used as a storage slot To remove the DCS perform the following procedures using the Operator Control Panel OCP 1 Navigate to the Library Settings Logical Library Settings screen Configure gt Library Settings or Logical Library Settings Select General Scroll down to Remove DCS Select No or Yes Select Save then press the Enter button oR ON 5 6
337. p tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge 6 Rotate the loader intermediate gear J clockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it stops This releases the LBA leader pin 7 Rotate the threader motor worm gear K counterclockwise until the leader block is in front of the Read Write head This moves the LBA out of the cartridge a82hd004 Figure A 24 Leader Block Assembly LBA Loader motor worm gear H Leader block assembly LBA 8 Rotate the loader motor worm gear K counterclockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it stops A 24 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 9 Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray 10 Go to Ending Procedure Ending Procedure 1 Reassemble the drive brick by reversing the steps in Cover on page A 6 2 Reassemble the drive sled by performing the following steps a Reinstall the drive brick into the sled by performing the following steps e Plug in the RS 422 cable the power cable if applicable and the signal cable e Push the drive brick fully into the sled e Align the two screws holes on each side of the sled with the screw holes on each side of the drive brick DO NOT TIGHTEN THE SCREWS COMPLETELY e After verifying that the drive and sled are properly aligned fully tighten the screws b If necessary perform the following steps to reinstall the connection ca
338. page Configure Library Path Failover This page allows the user to enter the Path Failover feature activation key Path Failover is a combination of two previous features Control Path Failover key entered at the library user interface and Data Path Failover key entered at the device driver interface A single activation key entered at the library user interface now activates both features unless the LTO 3 drive firmware level is equal to or lower than 73P5 and or the library firmware is equal to or lower than 1 95 For either or both of these two cases the device driver interface Data Path Failover key activation will still be required The Path Failover feature is available for select LTO 4 tape drives Path Failover is not supported for half high drives Path Failover Feature Activation Key 7 z a Refresh Activate a77ug117 Figure 5 36 The 4U library Configure Library Path Failover page After clicking Activate this page will display if you have entered the feature key correctly Path Failover Feature Activation Key Path Failover is currently activated on this Tape Library License enables the library failover capability User must ensure that the Library Host and Backup App a77ug118 Figure 5 37 Path Failover license verification page Configure Library Encryption Note Application Managed Encryption AME does not require a license key Library Managed Encryption LME and System Managed Encryptio
339. place the cleaning cartridge cleaning cartridge that has expired 23 Invalid cleaning tape Set when the drive expects a cleaning Use a valid cleaning cartridge cartridge and the loaded cartridge is not a cleaning cartridge 30 Hardware A Set when a hardware failure occurs Go tq Contacting IBM Technical that requires that you reset the tape Support on page 9 5 drive to recover 31 Hardware B Set when the tape drive fails its Note the error code on the internal Power On Self Tests single character display then go tq Contacting IBM Technical 32 Interface Set when the tape drive detects a Go tq Contacting IBM Technical problem with the host interface 33 Eject media Set when a failure occurs that requires Unload the tape cartridge then you to unload the cartridge from the reinsert it and restart the operation drive 34 Download fail Set when an FMR image is Ensure that it is the correct FMR unsuccessfully downloaded to the image Download the FMR image tape drive through the host interface again 37 Drive voltage Set when the drive detects that the Go tq Contacting IBM Technical externally supplied voltages are either Support on page 9 5 approaching the specified voltage limits or are outside the voltage limits 38 Predictive failure of Set when a hardware failure of the Go tq Contacting IBM Technical drive hardware tape drive is predicted Support on page 9 5 39 Diagnostics required Set when the drive det
340. pplication 5 Select an Encryption method for each logical library e Without an encryption license key select None or Application Managed Encryption e With an encryption license key select Library Managed Encryption or System Managed Encryption 6 Select an Encryption policy for each logical library e Encrypt All This is the default policy It encrypts all cartridges using the default data keys specified in the EKM This setting applies to all drives in a 3573 logical library e Internal Label Selective Encryption This policy is based on the internal volume label information Currently the only application that supports this 4 24 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide option is Symantec NetBackup It only encrypts cartridges with pool identifiers between 1500 and 9999 inclusive using keys specific to each pool Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive based on the pool identifier for instance key label IL_LNBU_1505 would be generated for a cartridge in pool 1505 e Internal Label Encrypt All This policy is based on the internal volume label information Currently the only application that supports this option is Symantec NetBackup It encrypts all cartridges Cartridges with pool identifiers between 2000 and 65535 inclusive are encrypted with keys specific to each pool Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive based on the pool identifier for insta
341. pter Ensure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the Fibre Channel HBA if installing a library with a Fibre Channel drive Ensure that SAS support is enabled on the SAS HBA if installing a library with a SAS drive For library managed or system managed encryption capability install the Encryption Key Manager EKM application on your host Refer to the EKM documentation for detailed instructions For a list of the EKM documents see Related Publications in the Preface Verifying the Connection 1 Depending on the server configuration you may need to change the SCSI ID or Fibre Channel Loop ID of the library if the current ID is the same as another device on the bus When the host server is powered ON install the software and or driver s that are compatible with the library Backup software packages may require additional software or licensing to communicate with the library accessor If this is a SCSI attachment ensure the library is properly terminated If the library is the only SCSI device other than the SCSI host adapter on the selected SCSI bus it must be terminated Likewise if the library is physically the last SCSI device on the SCSI bus it must be terminated Only the devices physically located at the beginning and end of the SCSI bus should be terminated Confirm that the host server operating system recognized the library In Microsoft Windows XP Windows Server 2003 or in Windows 2000 you can ver
342. pter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 21 a66mi097 Figure 10 21 Removing a Library Controller Card from the library Note If you power on the replacement library without first swapping the Library Controller Card from the original defective library enclosure the following message will appear on the Operator Control Panel shortly after applying power New library detected Please remove library power and insert Library Controller Card from old Library The library requires the library serial number and other library attributes from the original library which is located in the VPD on the original Library Controller Card in order to continue library initialization See Important Read Me Before Continuing message listed above As a further Note if the replacement library does not complete library initialization successfully after swapping in the original Library Controller Card be sure to retain the original Library Controller Card so it can be swapped into the new replacement library enclosure which will have to be ordered 2 Plug one end of the power cord removed earlier from the defective library into the rear panel of the replacement library enclosure and plug the other end into a power source 3 Power ON the replacement library enclosure a If power ON is successful 1 The Ready Activity LED Hf will turn ON indicating that all components are functioning properly 2 After power is restored to the
343. put output processor IP address An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP IP network Networks using the TCP IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the destination The format of an IP address is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be zero to 255 For example 1 160 10 240 could be an IP address IPL Initial program load IPsec IPsec or Internet Protocol Security provides an additional level of security for IPv6 users IP Stack The IP Stack manages static IP addresses IPv4 A network layer protocol for packet switched internetworks IPv4 supports 2 about 4 3 billion addresses IPv6 A network layer protocol for packet switched internetworks It is designated as the successor of IPv4 the current version of the Internet Protocol for general use on the Internet IPv6 supports approximately 5x10 addresses for each of the roughly 6 5 billion people alive today ISV Independent software vendor ITST Idle time self test Glossary J 5 K Key Path This is the path used for transferring an encryption key This setting is dependent upon the encryption method selected kilogram kg One thousand grams approximately 2 2 pounds km kilometer 1000 Meters Approximately 5 8 mile L LAN Local area network A computer network within a limited area LCD See liquid crystal display LED Light emitting diode Library recovery The 2
344. r Up To Ten Characters corr Repeat Password Coe Support Contact Support Name Support Phone J Support Email a77ug082 Figure 4 30 The Configure Library User Access screen 2 Check the Disable Superuser checkbox to disable the Superuser role for this library Check the Disable User checkbox to disable the User role for this library Uncheck these boxes to allow these roles access to your library 3 Choose a Role e User if enabled e Superuser if enabled e Admin e Service Note Only one password can be set for each Role 4 Enter the New Password up to 10 alphanumeric characters 5 In Repeat Password enter the new password again Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 29 6 In Support Name enter the name of the person that will be able to offer the user help with the library Note Only one support person can be configured for the entire tape library The support person may or may not be one of the user superuser or admin account holders 7 In Support Phone enter the phone number of the person that will be able to offer the user help with the library 8 In Support Email enter the email address of the person that will be able to offer the user help with the library 9 Click one of the following e Refresh to update the current screen e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Entering Date and Time using the Web User Interface 1 Click Date amp Time in the left na
345. racters or bar code a library s inventory operation will take much longer if the bar code label is not readable e Remove the label from the label sheet carefully Do not stretch the label or cause the edges to curl aa the label within the recessed label area see J in Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 With light finger pressure smooth the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist on its surface 6 6 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide e Verify that the label is smooth and parallel and has no roll up or roll over The label must be flat to within 0 5 mm 0 02 in over the length of the label and have no folds missing pieces or smudges e Do not place other machine readable labels on other surfaces of the cartridge They may interfere with the ability of the drive to load the cartridge Write Protect Switch The position of the write protect switch on the tape cartridge see F determines whether you can write to the tape If the switch is set to a e The locked position solid red data cannot be written to the tape e The unlocked position black void data can be written to the tape If possible use your server s application software to write protect your cartridges rather than manually setting the write protect switch This allows the server s software to identify a cartridge that no longer contains current data and is eligible to become a scratch blank data cartr
346. rail pog 4 9 Front view of a rack showing ihe rails installed 4 10 2U library side screws to remove 4 11 2U library rack anchors and mounting brackets 4 12 Sliding the 2U library into the rack 4 13 Sliding the 4U library into the rack 4 14 Securing the 2U library to the rack 4 15 Securing the 4U library to the rack 4 16 Attaching SCSI 1 Fibre Channel 4 and SAS 2 cables to the 4U library 4 17 Interposer installation 4 18 Removing the protective label fom the power receptacle 4 19 Log in screen on the Web User Interface 4 20 The 2U library iia alin General screen a ee Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 8 2 6 2 7 2 7 3 4 3 4 3 5 3 5 3 6 43 4 5 4 6 4 6 4 8 4 9 4 9 4 10 4 10 4 11 4 11 4 12 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 19 4 21 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 4 36 4 37 4 38 4 39 4 40 4 41 5 1 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 Example The 4U library Configure Library General screen The 4U library Configure Library Logical Libraries page The Configure Library Path Failover Feature Activation screen Feature Key verification screen Feature Activation Key screen Configure Library CRN Activat
347. raries have an Auto Clean function which when enabled will prompt the library to retrieve the cleaning cartridge that resides in the library insert it in the drive that needs cleaning clean the drive then return the cleaning cartridge to its home slot Note The drive will automatically eject an expired cleaning cartridge The IBM Cleaning Cartridges are valid for 50 uses The cartridge s LTO CM chip tracks the number of times that the cartridge is used Cartridge Memory Chip LTO CM All generations of the IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges include a Linear Tape Open Cartridge Memory LTO CM chip aoa that contains information about the cartridge and the tape such as the name of the manufacturer that created the tape as well as statistical information about the cartridge s use The LTO CM enhances the efficiency of the cartridge For example the LTO CM stores the end of data location which when the next time this cartridge is inserted and the Write command is issued enables the drive to quickly locate the recording area and begin recording The LTO CM also aids in determining the reliability of the cartridge by storing data about its age how many times it has been loaded and how many errors it has accumulated Whenever a tape cartridge is unloaded the tape drive writes any pertinent information to the cartridge memory The storage capacity of the LTO Generation 4 LTO CM is 8160 bytes LTO Generations 1 2 and 3
348. rary and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table D 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 12 13 Sense Key 6 Unit Attention EE 12 Encryption Key Change Detected FE 18 Encryption Changed Read FE 19 Encryption Changed Write EE 40 Encryption EKM Identifier Changed EE 41 Encryption EKM Challenge Changed EE 50 Encryption Initiator Identifier Changed EE 51 Encryption Initiator Response Changed 2A 11 Encryption Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Another I_T Nexus 2A 12 Encryption Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Vendor Specific Event Sense Key 7 Data Protect EF 10 Encryption Key Required EF 11 Encryption Key Generation EF 13 Encryption Key Translate EF 1A Encryption Key Optional EF CO Encryption No Operation 26 10 Encryption Data Decryption Key Fail Limit 2A 13 Encryption Data Encryption Key Instance Counter Has Changed 74 00 Security Error 74 01 Encryption Unable to Decrypt Data 74 02 Encryption Unencrypted Data Encountered While Decrypting 74 03 Encryption Incorrect Data Encryption Key 74 04 Encryption Cryptographic Integrity Validation Failed 74 05 Encryption Error Decrypting Data 14 FRU code 15 SKSV C D Reserved BPV Bit pointer When set to 1 the bit pointer is valid 16 17 SKSV 0 First Error F
349. rator Control Panel Service Menu and clean the drive Use only an approved cleaning cartridge see Cleaning Cartridge on page 6 4 Run the Library Verify Diagnostic which includes a drive performance Read Write test other drive diagnostics are also available available on the Operator Control Panel or Web User Interface Be sure to use a known good scratch or blank data cartridge e If the drive test fails replace the drive sled CRU refer to Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled on page 10 3 e If the drive diagnostic s pass run the drive wrap test Service gt Service Drives gt Drive Tests on the Operator Control Panel If the wrap test fails verify that you are using a wrap tool and not a terminator If you are using the correct wrap tool replace the drive sled CRU refer to Note On a Half high SAS drive run SAS wrap test A Note If a SCSI drive wrap test fails run the test again with a different SCSI terminator prior to exchanging the drive sled Using the host interface test tool ITDT run the Scan function s to verify that the host application interface SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel can detect the drive LUN 0 and the library LUN 1 To further test the interface communication path run the Test Device function t if available after selecting the drive This function will write read data across the interface as well as sending a command to the drive to run the internal perform
350. rd and protective plastic cover on the sled e Place the card and the protective plastic cover on top of spacers aligning the three screw holes DO NOT TIGHTEN THE SCREWS COMPLETELY e After verifying that the connection card and protective plastic cover are properly aligned fully tighten the three screws 3 Install the tape drive sled in the library Refer to Installing a Tape Drive Sled on page 10 6 4 Power ON the library and wait for the library to finish POST power on self test inventory and mid tape recovery this can take up to 1 hour 5 If the cartridge does not eject from the drive move the cartridge from the drive to the I O Station Operator Control Panel Control gt Move Cartridges Web User Interface Manage Library gt Move Media then discard the cartridge 6 Run Library Verify before resuming normal library operations Refer to Service Library Verify on page 5 28 7 If necessary return the failed drive sled to IBM Writing a Drive Dump to Flash Memory When a tape drive error is reported by the library the drive produces a dump and saves it in RAM If the library is powered OFF this information will be lost To preserve this information for analysis by IBM Technical Support the drive dump must be copied to the drive s flash memory Complete the following steps to write a drive dump to flash memory 1 Log in to the Web User Interface a Username Service b Password contact IB
351. re on page 5 57 SCSI ID This is the unique identifier assigned to the SCSI drive X X to enable it to receive communications from the host computer Element This is the unique identifier assigned to the drive that X X X X X X Address allows the host to recognize and communicate with the drive Control Path If the drive communicates all messages from the host to X X X X X X Drive the library then it is considered the control path drive If the drive is the control path drive this element displays Yes If not this element displays No All drives in a logical library may be a control path drive Data If the drive is compressing data this element displays X X X X X X Compression Yes If not this element displays No Interface This identifies Fibre Channel drives X X Type Node Name This is the Worldwide node Name assigned to a Fibre X X drive Worldwide This is the Worldwide ID assigned to a SAS drive X X ID Port A This port is always enabled X X X X Port Name This is the name assigned to Port A on the drive X X X X Topology This is the type of connection to the host X X FC AL Loop This is the Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop ID of the X X ID drive Speed This is the current speed setting of the drive Choices X X are Auto where the drive will automatically negotiate the speed of the drive to match that of the server 1Gb s 2Gb s or 4 Gb s Port B This port is enabled for full high SAS drives only X X
352. re user configuration For more information on drive interfaces refer to Host Interfaces on page 3 7 e Control Paths use this to enable the drive as a control path drive Each logical library must have a control path drive however all drives in a logical library can be designated as control path drives Chapter 5 Operations 5 23 Configure Network Network IP Stack DHCP ON Figure 5 16 Configure Network menu DHCP OFF IPv4 amp IPv4 IPv6 DHCP OFF IPv6 IP Address i i Stateless autoconfig Netmask i Prefix Length i Static IPv6 Address Gateway Link Local IPv6 Address Ethernet Router Assigned IPv6 Address a77ug043 Use these menu items to change the current network settings which allow you to access the library remotely via a web browser e IP Stack Choose IPv4 only IPv6 only or IPv4 amp IPv6 e IPv6 Only and Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 Choose Enable Stateless Auto Config Address Web User Interface or Stateless Autoconfig Operator Control Panel if router assigned IPv6 IP addresses are desired To view the router assigned IPv6 addresses after enabling Stateless Auto Config Address do the following Operator Control Panel IPv6 Only Monitor gt Library gt Network Web Interface IPv6 Only and Dual Stack
353. ress field Byte 34 reports the SCSI Bus Address for the drive Values returned range from 00h to OFh 14 This field Byte 35 contains the frame and drive number passed across the RS 422 serial interface D 14 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host Retrieving messages from different hosts are discussed in this appendix Obtaining Error Information from the Host How error information is obtained from the host depends on the type of device driver being utilized Refer to the table below for instructions specific to your type of device driver If you are Then Using an IBM device driver Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide GC27 2130 for problem determination information specific to your host operation system Visit ftp ftp software ibm com storage devdrvr to download the latest version of the manual Refer to IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool ITDT on page 9 4 http www 1 ibm com support docview wss uid ssg1S4000662 download the diagnostic tool Using a non IBM device driver to Retrieving from an IBM System p or IBM Power System with AIX IBM device drivers for the System p system logs error information when an error occurs on a tape drive or library The error information includes the following 1 Device VPD 2 SCSI command parame
354. retch the tape 5 Go to Ending Procedure on page A 25 Full high Drive No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape Note If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY COPY data i e there is no backup eject commands issued at the host fail to unload the tape and power cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Call Technical Support and open a PMR if one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery 1 Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 19 a82ru008 Figure A 19 Using hex wrench to rewind tape into cartridge 2 From the bottom of the drive locate the access hole f in Figure A 19 3 Insert a 2 5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise 4 Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers Ensure that you do not stretch the tape 5 Locate the threader motor worm gear J in Figure A 20 on page A 21 on the rear of the drive Use your finger to rotate the threader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader mechanism
355. return it along with the Warranty Redemption Card to IBM Important Failure to return all of these components to IBM will result in you being charged for any missing components Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 29 10 30 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 11 Optional Features Replacement Parts and Power Cords For information on ordering tape cartridges refer to Ordering Media Supplies on For information on ordering bar code labels refer to Code Labels on page 6 20 Optional Features Table 11 1 Optional Features Feature Code Description 1682 Path Failover 4U 1901 Additional Power Supply 4U 5096 LC SC Fibre Cable Interposer 5400 SAS Mini SAS 4x Interposer 5402 2 m SAS Mini SAS 1x Cable 5406 5 5 m SAS Mini SAS 1x Cable 5500 Mini SAS Mini SAS 4x Interposer 5502 2 m Mini SAS Mini SAS 1x Cable 5506 5 5 m Mini SAS Mini SAS 1x Cable 5602 2 5 m VHDCI HD68 SCSI Cable 5604 4 5 m VHDCI HD68 SCSI Cable 5610 10 m VHDCI HD68 SCSI Cable 5900 Transparent LTO Encryption 6005 5 m LC LC Fibre Cable 6013 13 m LC LC Fibre Cable 6025 25 m LC LC Fibre Cable 7002 Rack Mount Kit 8002 Cleaning Cartridge L1 UCC 8043 Ultrium 3 LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled 8044 Ultrium 3 4Gb s Fibre Channel Tape Drive Sled 8046 Ultrium 3 Half High SCSI Tape Drive Sled
356. rify the SNMP MIB file currently installed on your SNMP server Verify the levels of library and drive firmware currently installed on your library by completing the following steps a b C d Expand Monitor Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface Click Library Identity and make note of the Firmware revision Click Drive Identity and make note of the Firmware revision Log out of the Web User Interface 2 Download the latest library firmware drive firmware and SNMP MIB Management Information Base file from the IBM web site a Enter http www ibm com storage support in your internet browser address field and press Enter on your keyboard Select Tape Systems from the Product Family list then select TS3100 Tape Library or TS3200 Tape Library from the Product list Click the Download tab then click Firmware d Click TS3100 Tape Library Firmware or TS3200 Tape Library Firmware e Compare the firmware level available on the web to those that you made note of in step 1 If you are running the latest levels of library and drive firmware proceed to the next step If you are not running the latest levels of library and drive firmware download the firmware that needs to be updated to your library host 3 Update library and drive firmware on your library if necessary a Enter the IP Address of your library in your internet browser address field and press Enter on your keyboard b Log
357. rite Once Read Many WORM method for storing data on tape The LTO Ultrium generation 4 drive enables WORM support when a WORM tape cartridge is loaded into the drive WORM Media Because standard read write media are incompatible with the WORM feature a specially formatted WORM tape cartridge cee Figure 6 2 is required Each WORM cartridge has a unique worldwide cartridge identifier WWCID which comprises the unique CM chip serial number and the unique tape media serial number Ultrium 4 WORM cartridges are two tone green and silvery gray See Ordering IMeclia supplies an panei te ce information on how to choose and purchase the appropriate WORM tape cartridges for your library a67b0024 Figure 6 2 Ultrium WORM Tape Cartridge Data Security on WORM Media Certain built in security measures help ensure that the data written on a WORM cartridge does not become compromised for example e The format of an Ultrium 4 800 GB or Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Cartridge is unlike that of standard read write media This unique format prevents a drive that lacks WORM capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge e When the drive senses a WORM cartridge the firmware prohibits the changing or altering of user data already written on the tape The firmware keeps track of the last appendable point on the tape Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 3 WORM Media Errors The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur
358. rol Panel OCP The feature has been implemented on the RMU and on the OCP but with slightly different functionality Note Configuration files saved with one version of library firmware may not be compatible with other versions of firmware It is recommended to save a configuration file each time the library firmware is upgraded Restore the library using a configuration file that was saved with the same version of firmware currently installed in the library Since the RMU can be accessed remotely its implementation will save restore the configuration data to from a file on the host site When entering commands on the OCP the unit is accessed directly For this reason the OCP implementation will save restore the configuration data to from a USB memory stick that is inserted into the USB connector on the library controller Restore Defaults Restore Factory Defaults Restore Save Restore Configuration Save Configuration to Save File Restore Configuration from File I Daston a77ug079 Figure 5 47 Configure Library Restore Defaults page Service Library Menu The 2U 4U library is always online except for when the user enters the Service Library area A warning message appears stating that the library should be taken offline from the host before performing any Service functions It is up to the operator to ensure that it is taken offline by phoning the host operator or other means of communication Before performing any
359. roughput or increased machine error rate Density reporting This setting determines whether the drive shows or masks encryption This settings affects host reporting of density and is included to support legacy needs for transparency The default of not masking encrypted densities means that the host can see a different density code for encrypted vs non encrypted tapes x72 enc as opposed to x52 non enc This feature masks this so the drive reports the primary density only Normally this is set to the drive default which is to show encr density If a legacy setup will not work with a new density code being reported for whatever software reason this will allow transparent encryption to still be used deserialize To change from serial by bit to parallel by byte detented A part being held in position with a catch or lever device Any hardware component or peripheral such as a tape drive or tape library that can receive and send data device driver A file that contains the code needed to use an attached device DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 Although IPv6 s stateless address autoconfiguration removes the primary motivation for DHCP in IPv4 DHCPv6 can still be used to statefully assign addresses if the network administrator desires more control over addressing DIAG Diagnostic section of maintenance information manual differential See High Voltage Differential HVD direct access s
360. rson pull the magazine out of the front of the unit DO NOT push the paper clip in more than 1 2 inch Chapter 9 Service Procedures 9 3 Figure 9 3 Left Magazine pulled out of the 2U Library Figure 9 4 Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library 4 If there are additional tapes still in the library or if manually remove the magazines and drive refer to Support on page 9 5 for further instructions a77ug023 N D 5 KR N oO ou were unable to Contacting IBM Technical IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool ITDT The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool ITDT 9 4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide e Runs quick or extended diagnostics on tape drives If the library is online to the server host where the tool resides ITDT will communicate with the drive through the library to load and unload a test cartridge thereby exercising some library functions e Retrieves firmware dumps from tape drives and libraries e Performs a firmware update on tape drives or libraries e Tests the performance of the environment by completely writing a cartridge and measuring performance e Retrieves and displays cartridge information e Verifies the encryption environment e Does not require special device drivers e Is available for most major platforms e Scans the host interface and will find and display for selection all IBM LTO devices The tool will not display non
361. rt B i Loop ID Status t A Speed B Hashed Address B Figure 5 5 Monitor Drive menu Under Status and Drive n are the following items e Activity the current action being performed by the drive 5 14 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Status the current status of the drive a77ug035 Source the serial number of the cartridge currently in the drive Encryption indicates the type of data encryption currently set for the selected drive Topology the topology chosen for a fibre library see Fibre Channel Interface on page 3 10 Speed indicates the speed of the fibre channel fibre library Link indicates the status of the fibre channel fibre library Hashed Address an address calculated from the WWID Under Identity and Drive n are the following items Firmware Rev the current level of drive firmware Vendor ID IBM Product ID drive inquiry string Serial Number the drive serial number SCSI ID the unique identifier assigned to a SCSI drive WWNN the fibre channel drive s World Wide Node Name Topology the topology chosen for the fibre channel drive Speed indicates the speed of the fibre channel tape drive Loop ID unique identifier assigned to a fibre channel tape drive PID port identification Monitor Inventory This menu item displays the current library inventory of a 4U library
362. rtridge Order as part number 08L9120 through an IBM authorized distributor Order VOLSER labels separately see Code Labels IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge universal Order as part number 35L2086 through an IBM authorized cleaning cartridge for use with Ultrium 1 Ultrium 2 _ distributor and Ultrium 3 drives VOLSER labels are included Leader Pin Reattachment Kit Order as part number 08L9129 through an IBM authorized distributor Manual Rewind Tool Order as part number 08L9130 through an IBM authorized distributor To find the closest IBM authorized distributor visit the web at http www ibm com storage media or call 1 888 IBM MEDIA Ordering Bar Code Labels The LTO Ultrium 3 and 4 Tape Drives do not require cartridge bar code labels However if you use your data cartridges or cleaning cartridges in an IBM tape library product you may need cartridge bar code labels if your tape library product requires them see Table 6 2 on page 6 5 You can order these labels separately from the IBM Data Cartridges and Cleaning Cartridges 6 20 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide You can order bar code labels directly from the authorized label suppliers in Table 6 7 Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels In America EDP Tri Optic 6800 West 117th Avenue Broomfield CO 80020 In Europe and Asia EDP Europe Ltd 43 Redhills Road South Woodham
363. rtridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY COPY data i e there is no backup eject commands issued at the host fail to unload the tape and power cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Call Technical Support and TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide open a PMR if one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery 1 From the takeup reel pull an arm s length of tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head and rollers on the left side of the drive 2 Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up 3 Ensure that the tape is not twisted Untwist the tape if required 4 Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm 0 5 in of the tape end and feed it onto the supply reel inside the cartridge 5 Turn the supply reel Ef clockwise allowing the moistened tape to adhere to the hub as it winds around the supply reel inside the cartridge a82hd002 Figure A 8 Rewinding tape into cartridge Loader motor worm gear Takeup reel motor A Outer guide rail WARNING Do Not Touch Supply reel motor 6 Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the f
364. rvers storage support Ito 1 Verify that you have exhausted all of the following troubleshooting options a Perform all recommended diagnostic procedures b Verify that the library s and drive s firmware is at the most recent level To determine the latest release of firmware visit the web c Verify that your device drivers are at the most recent level see your server host manual for instructions e For the latest release of IBM device drivers visit the web Chapter 9 Service Procedures 9 5 d e f e For the latest release of device drivers by Independent Software Vendors ISVs visit the appropriate third party web site Verify whether your hardware and software configuration is supported To determine the latest supported attachments visit the web Ensure that cables and connectors are not damaged Review all documentation carefully Experience has demonstrated that most questions are answered in your documentation 2 Follow these steps to take full advantage of your call a Be prepared to explain whether the software or hardware has worked properly at anytime in the past Have you changed anything recently Pinpoint the exact location of your problem if possible Note the steps that led to the problem Can you duplicate the problem or is it a one time occurrence Note any error messages displayed on your PC monitor or file server Write down the exact error message If at all possible
365. ry gt Identity Monitor Library gt Library Identity Netmask current address Monitor gt Library gt Network gt Netmask Configure Library gt Network Netmask Address modify Configure gt Network gt Netmask Configure Configure Library gt Network Network Configure gt Network Configure Library gt configuration Network change Network Monitor gt Library gt Network Configure Library gt configuration Network view Path Failover enter activation key Configure gt Path Failover page 5 27 Configure Library gt Path Failover Library Path Failover on page 5 43 Power cycles Restart library Monitor gt Library gt Status Not available with this interface Monitor Library gt Library Status Service Library gt Reboot P Monitor Library Librar 34 Service Library Reboot on page 5 SCSI Inquiry string library Monitor gt Library gt Identity Monitor Library gt Library Identity Monitor Library Librar dentity on page 5 3 Serial Number drive Monitor gt Drive gt Identity Monitor Library gt Drive Identity Library Drive dentity on page 5 3 Serial Number library Monitor gt Library gt Identity Monitor Library gt Library Identity Chapter 5 Operations Library Librar dentity on
366. ry Recovery Problem Determination The 2U and 4U library firmware will generally retry failed operations up to three times before posting a failure to complete the operation or in some situations proceeding with an operation that can be completed in an alternative manner Of course if the operation is successful within the allotted retry count the appropriate retry counter is updated and recorded in the retry log and the next library operation will commence For example failure to pick or place a cartridge from or to a designated cell or drive location after exhausting the retry count will result in a failed operation with the appropriate error code However failure to detect a particular cell location by sensing the prism fiducial located on the cell shelf because it is missing or damaged will eventually result in the cell location being located by the gripper bar code reader and positional emitter pulse count after the prism detection retry count is exhausted If several prisms are missing or damaged or if the accessor prism sensor emitter is inoperable initialization and or inventory functions can take a prolonged amount of time to complete due to the lengthy retry recovery procedure If the library is taking an extended amount of time to initialize to perform an inventory or even move a cartridge within the library the magazines prism integrity should be verified prior to exchanging a library component This situation can be noted by th
367. s gt Drive n Link Monitor Library gt Drive Status Firmware drive current level Monitor gt Drive gt Identity Monitor Library gt Drive Identity Firmware library identify current level Monitor gt Library gt Identity Monitor Library gt Library Identity Library Librar Firmware library update Not available with this interface Service Library gt Upgrade Firmware Service Library Up grade Firmware on Gateway current address Monitor gt Library gt Network gt Gateway Monitor Configure Library gt Network Chapter 5 Operations 5 5 Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Menu Navigation Shortcuts Information For More Activity Operator Control Panel Info Web User Interface For More Info Gateway Configure gt Network gt Configure Library gt Address modify Gateway Network Inventory perform Control gt Re Inventory Re Inventory Manage Library gt Perform Inventory I O Station configuring Configure gt Library Settings Configure Library gt General I O Station current status Monitor gt Library gt Status Monitor Library gt Library Status Library Librar I O Station open Control gt Open I O Station Not available with this interface IP Address current Monitor gt Library gt I
368. s Element Address rive A j Element Address Element Address ane see 256 rive 3 256 Drive 3 Element Address Element Address 256 256 Drive 2 Drive 2 Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3 Element Address Element Address Dri z a 256 256 rive 1 Drive 1 5 Element Address Element Address 5 256 256 Front side Figure 3 2 Configuration of a two partition system Configuration of a 3 Partition System A three partition system must have at least three drives installed A drive must be installed in drive position 1 another drive must be installed in drive position 2 and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4 Partition 1 contains the first drive and the first magazine Partition 2 contains the 3 4 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide second drive and the second magazine Partition 3 contains any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4 Partition 3 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4 Drive 4 aira Element Address rive 257 M j M i Element Address 5 open Pora 256 Drive 3 2 Element Address 256 Drive 2 Drive 2 Element Address Element Address Magazine LUET EPAI 256 256 1 3 A Drive 1 Drive 1 2 Element Address Element Address 9 256 256 Front side 5 Figure 3 3 Configuration of a three partition syste
369. s the cartridge slot locations The user selects the number of test cycles before starting the test from the EXECUTE button To cancel the test before it completes the cycles select the STOP button Note The Web User Interface System Status screen will indicate progress and completion of the activity Perform Diagnostics System Test Mo Cycles fi Execute Stop Figure 5 52 Service Library Perform Diagnostics page a77ug075 Service Library Perform Key Path Diagnostics Important Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before running the Key Path Diagnostic Library firmware level must be greater than 6 xx See Verifying Updating Firmware on page 4 19 The key path diagnostics test provides the ability to perform diagnostics on the encryption key path Only drives that are set up for library managed encryption will be tested All drives are listed in the test results even if the drive is not enabled for library managed encryption 5 56 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide The test consists of four parts e Drive Test The library performs a drive communication test to confirm communication with the drive e Ethernet Test For each EKM IP address the library performs a ping test and records the results e EKM Path Test For each EKM IP address that passed the ping test the library performs an EKM communication test e EKM Co
370. se review the information in Chapter 3 User Interfaces Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts Menu Navigation Shortcuts Information For More Activity Operator Control Panel Info Web User Interface For More Info Access PIN Configure gt Set Access PIN Configure Library gt User create new Access Access on page Access PIN modify existing Configure gt Set Access PIN Config Set Access Configure Library gt User Access 5 Configure Library User Access on page Accessor number of cartridge moves Monitor gt Library gt Status gt Cycles Monitor Library gt Library Status Library Librar tatus on page Auto Clean Configure gt Library Settings gt Configure Library gt enable Auto Clean General Cartridge Monitor gt Library gt Status gt Monitor Library gt Library currently Act Cart Library on Status active moving Cartridge Not available with this interface Monitor Library gt determine Inventory encryption Cartridge Monitor gt Inventory gt Manage Library gt Perform Inventory Magazines Inventory Cartridge Move Control gt Move Cartridges Manage Library gt Move Media edia on page Cartridge currently in drive n serial number Monitor gt Inventory gt Drive n Monitor Monitor Library gt Drive Status page 5 15
371. se the Operator Control Panel for configuring your library go to Logical Libraries Library Settings Drive s Network Set Access PIN Set Date and Time Path Failover To complete the configuration of your library the following items will have to be accessed from the Web User Interface Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 33 Encryption see Configure Library Encryption on page 5 43 User Access Information see Configure Library User Access on page 5 50 Logs and Traces see Configure Library Logs amp Traces on page 5 51 Event Notification Information see e Key Path Diagnostic see Service Library Perform Key Path Diagnostics on page 5 54 Updating Firmware see Service Library Upgrade Firmware on Preparing the Host Follow these general guidelines i Ensure that your backup application supports the SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel host bus adapter HBA Ensure that all the required or latest available Operating System files and or updates dll s PTF s etc have been installed and applied If the host server is connected to a network check with the system administrator before turning host power OFF Install a suitably rated HBA Remember that if there are any single ended SE devices on the same SCSI bus the entire SCSI bus will negotiate down to SE speed and severely degrade performance and limit cable length Ensure that LUN scanning is enabled on the SCSI host ada
372. se the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment I 2 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device might not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that might cause undesired operation European Union EU Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004 108 EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of the product including the fitting of non IBM option cards This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022 The limits for Class A equipment
373. service access or service password controlled access is required Customer setup support is by Field Technical Sales Support FTSS customer documentation and software support for encryption software problems Customer how to support is also provided via support line contract The library firmware should always allow the user to select None or Application Managed Encryption from the Web User Interface as long as there is at least one encryption capable drive in the logical library If a valid Transparent Encryption license key has been previously entered System Managed Encryption or Library Managed Encryption can be selected The factory default is None Note The optional Transparent Encryption Key feature enabling System Managed Encryption and Library Managed Encryption is not available on TS3200 and TS3100 models purchased through High Volume HVEC channels Note All encryption settings should be configured or re verified in the drive after any library or drive reset This is because a new drive may have been added or an existing drive may have been swapped with another drive For more details see the IBM Tape Device Drivers documentation and the IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference documentation See Related Publications in the Preface Supported Internet Protocols The library supports the following Internet protocols e IPv4 e IPv6 To learn more about IPv4 visit http www iana org To lear
374. space command ended at Beginning of Tape The EOM bit is also set 00 05 EOD Read or Space command terminated early because End of Data was encountered 00 16 Operation in Progress 04 00 Cause not reportable A cartridge is present in the drive but it is in the process of being unloaded 04 01 Becoming Ready A media access command was received during a front panel initiated load or an immediate reported load command 04 02 Initializing Command Required A cartridge is present in the drive but is not logically loaded A Load command is required 04 03 Manual Intervention Required A cartridge is present in the drive but could not be loaded or unloaded without manual intervention 04 10 Logical unit not ready auxiliary memory not accessible 04 12 Logical unit not ready offline 08 01 Logical unit communication failure 09 00 Track following error servo OC 00 Write Error A Write operation has failed This is probably due to bad media but may be hardware related 11 00 Unrecovered Read Error A Read operation failed This is probably due to bad media but may be hardware related 11 12 Auxiliary memory read error The drive reported that it is unable to read the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge 14 00 Recorded Entity Not Found A space or Locate command failed because a format violation prevented the target from being found 14 03 End Of Data not found A Read type operation failed because a format
375. ss ENTER Log in to the Web User Interface Refer to Login on page 2 5 Expand Configure Library in the left navigation pane Click Encryption Encryption is not supported for this Logical Library Feature Activation Key a77ug199 Figure 5 38 Feature Activation Key screen 5 On the Encryption screen enter the Feature Activation Key to make available the library managed and the system managed encryption options Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for additional encryption settings 5 44 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Encryption Feature Activation Key Encryption is currently licensed on this library Enable SSL for EKM Encryption Setting for Logical Library 1 Encryption method None Encryption policy EKM Server Setting Primary IP address IPv4 j9 0 0 0 IPv4 address or Host name and domain Primary TCP port Secondary IP address IPv4 IPv4 address or Host name and domain Secondary TCP port 20n4 Advanced Encryption Settings for Engineering Support use only Encryption mathod No Advanced Setting x Encryption policy No Advanced Setting m Encryption density No Advanced Setting x Encryption key path No Advanced Setting x a77ug150 Figure 5 39 Configure Library Encryption Feature configuration screen 7 10 Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets L
376. ss of your secondary DNS server Enable SSL for Web If you desire to have SSL Secure Sockets Layer enabled place a check in this box Note If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface you can install the certificate or allow an exception depending on the internet browser you are using SSL is enabled when the URL begins with https and some browsers will show a lock Ethernet Settings You can disable Ethernet settings manually enable them or let another machine enable them by using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP You can also set a specific speed for the Ethernet port or specify the library to automatically negotiate the speed Ethernet Settings choices are Auto the default 10 Mbit Half 10 Mbit Full 100 Mbit Half 100 Mbit Full Enter IPv4 settings if applicable a Enable DHCP Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the DHCP server If you are not using a DHCP server leave unchecked and enter the appropriate information for the IP Address Network Mask and Gateway Address b Static Address An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP IP network Networks using the TCP IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the destination The format of an IP address is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be zero to 255 For example 1 160 10 240 could be an IP address c
377. t Move Cartridge or the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Move Media to insert the cleaning cartridge into the reserved slot or the DCS if one exists 4U only b An alternate method is to use the Release Magazine option e Operator Control Panel Control gt Magazine Left Right e Web User Interface Manage Library gt Release Magazines Left Right c Place a cleaning cartridge into the reserved slot or the DCS if one exists 4U only Registering for My Notification 4 40 My Notification registration provides email notification when firmware levels have been updated and are available for download and installation To register for My Notification 1 Visit the web at http www ibm com us 2 Click Get Support 3 Click My support Note Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together When updating to the latest firmware verify that all installed components such as tape drive s and library are at the latest levels noted on the Support web site Mixing different levels of library and tape drive firmware is not supported and may cause unpredictable results TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Chapter 5 Operations The following table lists menu navigation shortcuts to activities that can be performed via the Operator Control Panel and or the Web User Interface Before using the Operator Control Panel or the Web user Interface plea
378. t meet predefined specifications They include but are not limited to Six or eight the default uppercase alphanumeric characters where the last two characters must be L4 L3 L2 or L1 Label and printing to be non glossy Nominal narrow line or space width of 0 423 mm 0 017 in Wide to narrow ratio of 2 75 1 Minimum bar length of 11 1 mm 0 44 in Table 6 3 Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive Cartridges VOLSER Ultrium 4 Data Cartridge XXXXXXL4 Ultrium 4 WORM Cartridge XxxxxxLU Ultrium 3 Data Cartridge XXXXxxL3 Ultrium 3 WORM Cartridge XXxxxxLT Ultrium 2 Data Cartridge XXXXXXL2 Ultrium 1 Data Cartridge READ ONLY XXXXXXL1 IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge CLNxxxLx Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 5 Table 6 3 Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive continued Cartridges VOLSER An Ultrium 3 Tape Drive must have a minimum firmware level of 54xx for it to be compatible with the WORM cartridge To determine the complete specifications of the bar code and the bar code label visit the web at http www ibm com storage 1to select LTO Support or contact your IBM Sales Representative When attaching a bar code label to a tape cartridge place the label only in the recessed label area see J in Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 A label that extends outside of the recessed area can cause loading pro
379. t on tape is not valid but is a known format A failure occurred attempting to write the FID 37 00 Rounded parameter A Mode Select command parameter has been rounded because the drive can not store it with the accuracy of the command 3A 00 Media Not Present A media access command has been received when there is no cartridge loaded 3B 00 Sequential Positioning Error A command has failed and left the logical position at an unexpected location 3B OC Position past beginning of medium 3D 00 Invalid bits in identify Message An illegal Identify Message has been received at the drive at the start of a command 3E 00 Logical Unit has not Self Configured The drive has just powered on and has not completed its self test sequence and can not process commands 3F 01 Code Download The firmware in the drive has just been changed by a Write Buffer command 3F 03 Inquiry data has changed 3F OE Reported LUNs data has changed 3F OF Echo buffer overwritten 40 xx Diagnostic failure A diagnostic test has failed The xx ASCQ is a vendor specific code indicating the failing component D 8 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table D 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Continued Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC ASCQ 41 00
380. t or a dedicated cleaning slot All cleaning cartridges must have CLN as part of the bar code The Universal Cleaning Cartridge has the bar code label CLNUxxLx e Bar Code Label Length Reported to Host Choose between 6 and 8 With 6 the first six characters of the cartridge VOLSER Volume Serial Numbers will be reported to the host With 8 All characters in the VOLSER first six characters plus the two character media type identifier will be reported to the host For more information on bar code labels see Bar Code Label on e Click one of the following 4 20 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Refresh Click this button to update the current screen Apply Selections Click this button to submit the changes made to the screen General Library Name Parao a Random O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots 23 PE I O Station Enabled k Auto Clean Enabled E Barcode Label Length 8v Reported To Host ka m Apply Selections F Figure 4 20 The 2U library Configure Library General screen General Library Name I O Station Enabled Auto Clean Enabled Barcode Label Length E Reported To Host Extended Configuration for Logical Libraries Logical Library 1 Library Mode E EA O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots 21 J Logical Library 2 a terary fone Random O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots 23 7 a Apply Selections a
381. tact IBM Technical Support for further instructions Swapping Power Supplies 1 Unplug the power cord from the power source then from the replacement library enclosure 2 Swap the Power Supply in the defective library with the Power Supply in the replacement library enclosure a Remove the power supply from the defective library and from the replacement library enclosure To remove a power supply from a library 1 Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply 2 Pull on two of the thumbscrews to pull the unit away from the rear panel of the library 3 Grasp the top and bottom edges of the power supply and pull it out of the library b Install the power supply removed from the defective library in the replacement library enclosure Install the power supply removed from the replacement library enclosure in the defective library to return to IBM To install a power supply 10 26 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide 1 Grasp two of the thumbscrews and push the power supply into the library 2 Tighten the thumbscrews Tooter rade Sory tn For ervicing aoe Parts Inside ar ener Us n ors ma ema a a66mi096 Figure 10 26 A power supply being removed from a library 3 Plug the power cord into the replacement library enclosure then into a power source 4 Power ON the replacement library enclosure a If power ON is successful 1 The replacement library en
382. talStorage pSeries zSeries System x System Storage i5 OS System z The following are U S trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company International Business Machines Corporation and Certance Linear Tape Open LTO Ultrium Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States or other countries or regions or both Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 2000 and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States or other countries or regions or both Solaris and Sun are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Incorporated Unix is a trademark of The Open Group in the United States or other countries or regions or both Other company product or service names may be the trademarks or service marks of others Electronic Emission Notices Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual might cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which ca
383. tape failure could be due to a faulty tape cartridge cartridge or to faulty drive hardware 6 Write failure Set for any unrecoverable write or If Flag Number 9 is also set make positioning error where isolation is sure that the write protect switch is uncertain and failure could be due to set so that data can be written to a faulty tape cartridge or to faulty the tape see Write Protect Switch drive hardware If Flag Number 4 is also set the cartridge is defective Replace the tape cartridge 7 Media life Set when the tape cartridge reaches its 4_ Copy the data to another tape end of life EOL cartridge 2 Discard the old EOL tape 8 Not data grade Set when the cartridge is not Replace the tape with a data grade data grade Any data that you write tape to the tape is at risk 9 Write protect Set when the tape drive detects that Ensure that the cartridge s the tape cartridge is write protected write protect switch is set so that the tape drive can write data to the tape see Write Protect Switch on page 6 7 10 No removal Set when the tape drive receives an Refer to the documentation for your UNLOAD command after the server server s operating system prevented the tape cartridge from being removed 11 Cleaning media Set when you load a cleaning No action required cartridge into the drive 12 Unsupported format Set when you load an unsupported Use a supported tape cartridge cartridge type into the drive
384. tatement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those web sites The materials at those web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those web sites is at your own risk IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 I 1 Trademarks The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States or other countries or regions or both AIX System p System i xSeries IBM Tivoli iSeries To
385. te substance Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS This library is NEBS certified This section includes the cautions and regulatory compliance statements for the Network Equipment Building System NEBS certification from the Telcordia Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment A Module of Safety and Environmental Notices XXili LSSGR FR 64 TSGR FR 440 and NEBSFR FR 2063 Telcordia Technologies Generic Requirements GR 1089 CORE Issue 4 June 2006 Table 2 NEBS Compliance Statements Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR 1089 CORE standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety for Ethernet RJ 45 ports use only shielded Ethernet cables that are grounded on both ends In a NEBS installation all Ethernet ports are limited to intra building wiring Caution The intra building ports of the equipment or subassembly are only suitable for connection to intra building or unexposed wiring or cabling The intra building ports of the equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring These interfaces are designed for use only as intra building interfaces Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR 1089 CORE Issue 4 and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically
386. ters 3 SCSI sense data if available The AIX Tape and Media Changer Device Driver for the System p provides logging to the system error log for a variety of errors You can view the error log by following this procedure 1 At the AIX command line type errpt pg to display a summary report or type errpt a pg to display a detailed report Press Enter Note In most cases you will use the summary report to find the date and time of any errors related to library devices then use the detail report to obtain the sense data needed to identify the cause of the error 2 Press Enter to scroll through the error log 3 Type q and press Enter to quit the error log at any time To correct a problem you noticed in the errpt report determine the type of error by using the examples that follow Copyright IBM Corp 2005 2008 E 1 e For library errors Resource Name smen for example smcQ and Resource Type 3573 TL refer to SCSI Sense Data Definition and in Appendix C e For drive errors Resource Name rmtn for example rmt0 and Resource Type LTO refer to SCSI Sense Data Definition and in Appendix C e For fibre channel errors not fibre channel adapter errors determine which host adapter and device are affected and go to that host documentation to resolve any fibre channel problems If unsuccessful call for IBM support e For fibre channel adapter errors not fibre channel bus errors use the m
387. th a 4U library and the library was manufactured after March 14 2008 If a redundant power supply fails the System Status screen will appear as shown in Figure 2 6 2 6 System Status View Legend 01 23 2008 10 44 42 Library Name ATLANTA162 peatu Power Supply Attention Drive 1 Status Ready Drive 3 Status R eady Slots 42 44 Empty Total I O Station Closed Library Time 10 44 42 Power Supply 1 online 1 Failed Figure 2 6 4U library System Status screen showing a power supply failure Note If your library has 04 level redundant power supplies see label on top of power supply it is normal for the one in Standby mode to turn its Green LED off You can test this power supply by pulling the power connector from the other Active power supply The power supply that was in Standby mode will now become Active and its Green LED should light If it doesn t replace it refer to Replacing a Power Supply fon page 10 11 n page 10 11 If your library has 05 level redundant power supplies the Green LED will be ON on both power supplies If both_ Green LEDs are not ON lace the failed power supply refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 11 Chapter 2 User Interfaces 2 7 Web User Interface Help Pages Each screen on the Web User Interface has an associated Help page To access a Help page click on Help in the upper right corner of the screen A new web page wi
388. the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure Desktop Installation 1 Place the library in its permanent location 2 Proceed to Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure 1 Connect all cables to the replacement library enclosure 2 Power ON the replacement library enclosure 3 Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version 10 28 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a Visit http www ibm com storage support to download the latest levels of library and drive firmware b Using the Web User Interface Service Library gt Upgrade Firmware upgrade library and drive firmware Run the Library Verify test Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify This diagnostic requires a blank or scratch data cartridge Properly fill out the Repair Identification RID Tag a Copy the serial number of the defective library onto the RID tag b a 2 the tag to the front of the replacement library enclosure as shown in Figure 10 29 IBM REPAIR IDENTIFICATION TAG REPAIR ID TAG MT Sa PART NUMBER 19P5941 ATTENTION 1 A Repair ID tag maintains the original serial number record of the machine and allows IBM to entitle the machine for future maintenance or warranty service Mail in exchange requires the completion and securing a Repair ID tag
389. the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was exposed Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it Do not expose the cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight Do not expose recorded or blank cartridges to stray magnetic fields of greater than 100 oersteds for example terminals motors video equipment X ray equipment or fields that exist near high current cables or power supplies Such exposure can cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge unusable Environmental and Shipping Maintain the conditions that are described in Specifications for Tape Cartrid Perform a Thorough Inspection After purchasing a cartridge and before using it perform the following steps Inspect the cartridge s packaging to determine potential rough handling When inspecting a cartridge open only the cartridge door Do not open any other part of the cartridge case The upper and lower parts of the case are held together with screws separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge Inspect the cartridge for damage before using or storing it Inspect the rear of the cartridge the part that loads first into the tape load compartment and ensure that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartrid case see E in and EJ in Figure 6 9 on page 6 12 there are gaps in the seam see Figure 6 7 on page 6 10 pin may be dislodged Go to Repositioning or Reattaching Chapter 6 Usi
390. the necessary hardware and firmware to encrypt and decrypt host tape application data Encryption policy and encryption keys are provided by the host application or host server EPO Emergency power off EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory EQC Equipment check equipment check An asynchronous indication of a malfunction Error log A dataset or file in a product or system where error information is stored for later access ESD Electrostatic discharge ESP The Encapsulating Security Payload ESP protocol provides origin authenticity integrity and confidentiality protection of a packet ESP also supports encryption only and authentication only configurations but using encryption without authentication is strongly discouraged because it is insecure F fault symptom code FSC A hexadecimal code generated by the drive or the control unit microcode in response to a detected subsystem error FC Feature code FCC Federal communications commission FE Field engineer customer engineer or service representative fiducial A target used for teaching a physical location to a robot field replaceable unit FRU An assembly that is replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails file A named set of records stored or processed as a unit Also referred to as a dataset file protection The processes and procedures established in an information system that are designed to inhibit unauthorize
391. the right or left magazine from the library Magazine Right z Release Figure 5 33 Manage Library Release Magazine page a77ug078 Note To manually release a magazine see Releasing the Magazines Manually fon page 9 1 n page 9 1 However this manual process should only be used if the magazine cannot be released using the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface 5 40 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Configure Library Menu The Configure Library menu contains the following sub menu items e Configure Library General Configure Library Path Failover on pag e Configure Library Encryption on page 5 43 e Configure Library Drives on page 5 46 e Configure Library Network on page 5 47 e Configure Library User Access on page 5 50 Configure Library Date amp Time on page 5 51 Configure Library Logs amp Traces on page 5 51 Configure Library Event Notification on page 5 52 e Configure Library Restore Defaults on page 5 52 Configure Library General This page allows you to make changes to general library configuration elements As changes are made they will only be applied after the Apply Selections or the Submit button is selected After making the selection a warning page will inform you of the impact of the proposed change In some cases a pop up screen will as
392. this menu item to set up email notification of library errors and warnings 1 Click Event Notification in the left navigation pane Event Notification Notify Errors Notify Warnings Vi On V On To Email Address SMTP Server xxxxx us ibm com Address IPv4 or 9 17 195 158 IPv6 Domain Name Figure 4 33 The Configure L Host name and domain a77ug065 Refresh Submit ibrary Event Notification screen If you would like to be notified when an error occurs select Notify Errors If you would like to be notified when a warning occurs select Notify Warnings In To Email Address enter the email address to which the information will be sent In SMTP Server Address IPv4 or IPv6 enter the IP Address of the SMTP server associated with the email address Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 31 6 Enter the Domain Name for your library This field cannot be blank when using event notification Note If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain Name a warning message will appear It will say If you are using Event Notification then a value is required for the Domain Name Running Key Path Diagnostic for Testing Encryption Configuration If you have purchased an encryption activation key Feature Code 5900 Transparent LTO Encryption and any LTO 4 Fibre Channel or SAS drives in your library are configured for library managed encryption run the Key Path Diagnostic to ensure that
393. thout media To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the library 1 observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual material handling 2 obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during installation or removal and 3 always remove all cartridges to reduce the overall weight of the library To install your library in a rack perform the following steps 1 Verify that your rack kit includes the following contents see Es e Packaged in plastic material Two 2 rails not shown Two 2 mounting brackets i e Packaged in the small bag with no label One 1 T10 Torx wrench H Two 2 anchors H Two 2 countersunk screws for securing the anchors iA Two 2 smaller screws for securing the tops of the mounting brackets K Two 2 large screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack H e Packaged in the small bag with Round Hole on the label Nine 9 screws to be used on racks with round holes H e Packaged in the small bag with Square Hole on the label Nine 9 screws to be used on racks with square holes EJ Note Eight 8 screws are needed for the installation One additional screw is provided for security Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 7 N j D N oO Figure 4 6 Rack Kit mounting hardware 2 Determine the location in your rack for your library to be installed and using a pencil mark the location o
394. threader motor worm gear J stops The LBA is in the correct position Note Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge by using a hex wrench as shown in Figure A 7 on page A 8 Notice the following A 10 1S3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a Loader mechanism gear EJ nearest the front of the drive that actuates the cartridge loader mechanism b Position of the rotator stub EJ c Front loader motor worm gear F Rotating this gear allows the loader mechanism gear H to turn Rotate the loader motor worm gear F to turn the loader mechanism gear A counterclockwise Continue turning until the rotator stub Ef loses contact with the lever J This releases the LBA leader pin Rotate the threader motor worm gear J to turn the threader mechanism gear J counterclockwise This moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the read write head Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller nearest the rear of the drive ij a82ru010 Figure A 10 Leader Block Assembly LBA 8 9 10 Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear until the rotate stub Kf is positioned as shown Notice that the rotator stub Ef is nearly aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing H Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray Go to Ending Procedure on page A 25 Half high Drive
395. ting Sequential Mode e Autoload Option If the Autoload option is set to ON Configure gt Library gt Autoload the accessor will load the first cartridge cartridge located in the slot with the lowest numeric value found in the storage inventory area into the drive upon power ON of the library If the library powers on with a cartridge already in the drive sequential mode will start with that cartridge unless the host issues a rewind and unload command to the drive In that case the next cartridge in sequence will be loaded into the drive If the Autoload Option if OFF sequential mode must be started by selecting the Move Cartridges option Control gt Move Cartridges to load the first cartridge or any cartridge into the drive Whatever cartridge is loaded into the drive that is where the sequence starts from For example if a cartridge from the fifth lowest numeric storage slot containing a cartridge is loaded using the Move Cartridges option after the host issues a rewind unload command the next cartridge loaded will be the cartridge from the next higher numeric slot Cartridges need not be in contiguous slots e Loop Option If the Loop option is set to ON Configure gt Library gt gt Loop when the last cartridge cartridge in the highest numeric slot is unloaded and placed back into storage the accessor will immediately start over again loading the first cartridge into the drive Stopping Sequential Mode
396. tinue turning until the rotator stub K in loses contact with the lever J in Figure A 20 This releases the LBA leader pin Appendix A Information for Trained Service Personnel A 21 counterclockwise This moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the read write head Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller nearest the rear of the drive shown as F a82ru010 Figure A 21 Leader Block Assembly LBA 10 Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear 11 I in Figure A 20 on page A 21 until the rotator stub J in Figure A 20 on page A 21 is positioned as shown Notice that the rotator stub J in Figure A 20 on page A 21 is nearly aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing 4 in Figure A 20 on page A21 Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray 12 Go to Ending Procedure on page A 25 Half high Drive No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape Note If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape containing ACTIVE or ONLY 1 COPY data i e there is no backup eject commands issued at the host fail to unload the tape and power cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge make no further attempts to unload this tape Call Technical Support and open a PMR if one isn t already open to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path faci
397. tional entries to include 1 Informational YES 2 Statistic 55 se cnceaxaade da NO c Reference code selection 1 Option 1 2 Reference codes ALL d Device selection 1 Option 2244itdeaeintades 1 2 Device type or resource names ALL 7 On the Log Analysis Report screen enter a 5 on an error line that has a resource type of 3583 library or 3580 drive and press Enter 8 On the Display Detail Report for Resource screen press e F4 Additional Information Pressing F4 will display the machine type and serial number of the device It also will display SCSI sense data if available e F6 Hexadecimal report Pressing F6 will display the device hexadecimal data for support use Appendix E Message Retrieval at the Host E 5 e F9 Address Information Pressing F9 will display the SCSI address information P System i Product Activity Log n Product Activity Log Page 1 ROMLPAR1 08 26 05 10 28 40 Invocation Product Activity Log WEN Boe eae ace Og 1DVReport System type 9406 System model 2 825 System release V5R3M0 System name ROMLPARL System serial number s e 2 10 F321B Log ID gt tom ser 09020145 Include hexadecimal Hata e s area e AT YES N NO Product Activity Log Page 2 ROMLPAR1 08 26 05 10 28 40 Detail Report for Resource Serial Resource Name Type Model N
398. to Monitor gt Library gt Identity Scroll down to IP Address and make note of the address Enter the IP Address in your internet browser address field to access your library with the Web User Interface For IPv4 or Dual Stack IPv4 IPv6 enter your library s static IP Address using the 0 0 0 0 format four octets For IPv6 enter your library s static IP Address or Router Assigned IP Address using the following format http 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 To determine your Router Assigned IP Address navigate to Monitor gt Library gt Network on the Operator Control Panel For the IPv6 Router Assigned Addresses to be displayed on the Operator Control Panel the Network must be configured to IPv6 Only and the Stateless Autoconfig on the must be set to ON Chapter 2 User Interfaces 2 5 User ID Admin gt Password Login Figure 2 2 Web User Interface login page a77ug070 System Status The System Status screen is always present after login giving current status of the library System Status View Legend 03 28 2007 15 59 24 Library Name BOSTONI41 Status Ready Drive 1 Status Read Slots Empty Total 22 23 2 1 0 Station Disabled 2 Library Time 15 59 24 5 Figure 2 3 2U library System Status screen System Status View Legend 03 28 2007 15 27 45 Library Name ATLANTALE2 Status Ready Drive 1 Status Ready Drive 2 Status Ready Slots 42 44 Empty Total 1 0 Station Closed Library Time 15 27 45 Auto Cle
399. torage A storage device in which the access time is independent of the location of the data display contrast On the Operator Control Panel OCP the brightness of the display can be set by setting the contrast from 1 the brightest to 10 the lightest dll Dynamic link library Microsoft s implementation of the shared library concept These libraries usually have the file extension DLL OCX for libraries containing ActiveX controls or DRV for legacy system drivers DNS Server A DNS server is any computer registered to join the Domain Name System A DNS server runs special purpose networking software features a public IP address and contains a database of network names and addresses for other Internet hosts Your ISP also maintains DNS servers as part of your Internet connection setup Domain Name System DNS The Domain Name System DNS is a standard technology for managing the names of Web sites and other Internet domains DNS technology allows you to type names into your Web browser like compnetworking about com and your computer to automatically find that address on the Internet A key element of the DNS is a worldwide collection of DNS servers download 1 To transfer programs or data from a computer to a connected device typically a personal computer 2 To transfer data from a computer to a connected device such as a workstation or microcomputer DRAM Dynamic random access memory drive magnetic t
400. trium 3 and Ultrium 4 e IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 2 e IBM 100 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 1 read only e IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge For additional information see Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media on page 6 1 Library Specifications Physical Specifications Table 1 5 Physical Specifications Specification 2U library 4U library Rack mount 87 6 mm 3 44 in Rack mount 175 2 mm 6 9 in Height stand alone 97 6 mm 3 84 in stand alone 185 2 mm 7 3 in Width 447 5 mm 17 6 in 447 5 mm 17 6 in Rack mount 740 mm 29 13 in Rack mount 740 mm 29 13 in Depth stand alone 810 mm 31 9 in stand alone 810 mm 31 9 in Weight with 1 drive and without media 15 59 kg 34 37 Ibs 21 32 kg 47 lbs Weight with media 20 67 kg 45 57 Ibs 31 71 kg 69 9 lbs Chapter 1 Product Description 1 9 Power Specifications Table 1 6 Power Specifications AC power voltage 100 127 VAC 200 240 VAC 4 2 A Line frequency 50 60 Hz Operation Specifications Table 1 7 Operation Specifications Ultrium 4 Library with F Ultrium 4 drive s 2U Library 4U Library Maxi tora Maximum number of data cartridges 24 Maximum number of data cartridges 48 a Native 19 2 TB Native 38 4 TB capacity Compressed 38 4 TB 2 1 compression Compressed 75 2 TB 2 1 compression Number of slots 24 including I O Station 48 Including 3
401. try for each logical library Important If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than one drive only the first drive in the Logical Library will be utilized Active Slots It may be necessary to modify the number of active slots to agree with X X the number of slots allowed by your host software To modify the number of active slots in your library click on the drop down list and select the number of slots you want active in your library Also the Auto Clean function requires the cleaning cartridge to be in a DCS or reserved slot Reserved slots are created by reducing the number of active slots Chapter 5 Operations 5 41 General Library Name I O Station Enabled a Auto Clean Enabled Barcode Label Length 3v Reported To Host Extended Configuration for Logical Libraries Logical Library 1 Library Mode Raada O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots J 21 Logical Library 2 Library Mode O Random O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots 23 FE a77ug094 Apply Selections Figure 5 34 The 4U library Configure Library General and Extended page Configure Library Logical Libraries To partition your multi drive library select the number of logical libraries you would like to create in your library then click Submit One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries If you partition a multi drive library each of the magazines must be assigned to a logical
402. ts Service gt Run Tests Service Library gt Perform Diagnostics Service Library gt Perform Diagnostics Service Library Perform Diagnostics on Service Library Diagnostics on Display Contrast Service gt Display Contrast Not available with this interface DNS modify settings Drive change interface configuration Drive change encryption Not available with this interface Configure gt Drive gt Drive Interface Not available with this interface Configure Library gt Network Configure Library gt Drives Configure Library gt Encryption Configure Network on Configure Library Drives on page 5 46 n Drive clean Service gt Service gt Clean Drive Service Library gt Clean Drive Drive current SCSI Loop ID Drive current status Monitor gt Drive gt Identity Monitor gt Drive gt Status Monitor Library gt Drive Identity Monitor Library gt Drive Status Library Drive Identity on page 5 32 Monitor Status on page 35 Chapter 5 Operations 5 3 Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Menu Navigation Shortcuts Information For More Activity Operator Control Panel Info Web User Interface For More Info Drive data Not available with this Monitor Library gt Drive c
403. ts and drive slot TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive A Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCO LTO Tape Drive Sense Data AIX ERRPT Library Sense Data AIX ERRPT Drive Sense Data SNMP Status Events 6 5 6 5 6 7 6 18 6 19 6 21 7 1 s 7 9 8 2 86 8 10 10 2 11 1 11 2 11 3 A 1 B 1 B 1 B 2 C3 D 1 D 6 E23 F 1 xiii xiv 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Safety and Environmental Notices When using this product observe the danger caution and attention notices that are contained in this guide The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent the severity of the safety condition Most danger or caution notices contain a reference number Dxxxx or Cxxxx Use the reference number to check the translation in the IBM Systems Safety Information G229 9054 publication included in your ship group The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples Danger Notice A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people A lightning bolt symbol always accompanies a danger notice to represent a dangerous electrical condition Caution Notice A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because of some existing condition A caution notice can be accompanied
404. two cases the device driver interface Data Path Failover key activation will still be required The Path Failover feature is available for select LTO 4 tape drives Path Failover is not supported for half high drives The Path Failover feature can be installed by the customer For ordering information see Chapter 11 Optional Features Replacement Parts and Power Cords on page 11 1 Note The optional Path Failover feature is not available on TS3200 models purchased through High Volume HVEC channels For more information about using the path failover feature see the IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User s Guide Library Partitioning and Element Addressing Library 4U systems with firmware versions of 1 70 and higher and containing at least 2 drives have the ability to configure two logical libraries create two partitions This partitioning has been expanded with the new library firmware and half high drive integration Now it is possible to configure 1 2 3 or 4 partitions in the 4U library Additionally the 2U library can now be configured into one or two partitions Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library partition Partitioning of 2U Libraries When two half high drives are installed in a 2U library the library firmware will support partitioning in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two full high drives today The first partition will contain the first
405. u Philippines Saudi Arabia South Korea Suriname Taiwan Trinidad Tobago Venezuela US Chapter 11 Optional Features Replacement Parts and Power Cords 11 3 Table 11 3 Power Cords continued Description Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 11 1 on page 11 7 FC and Part Number Reference PN Chicago NEMA 5 15P Chicago U S A 1 e 18m 125 V FC 9986 PN 39M5080 US Canada NEMA 6 15P Aruba Bahamas Barbados 2 e 2 8 m 250 V Bermuda Bolivia Brazil lt FC 9833 Canada Cayman Islands e PN 39M5095 Costa Rica Curacao Dominican Republic Ecuador El Salvador Guatemala Guyana Haiti Honduras Jamaica Japan Liberia Netherlands Antilles Nicaragua Panama Peru Philippines Suriname Taiwan Thailand Trinidad Tobago Venezuela US Australia AS 3112 Argentina Australia China 3 e 28 m 250V Colombia New Zealand NZS 198 Papua New Guinea e FC 9831 P araguay Uruguay Western e PN 39M5102 Samoa France Germany CEE 7 VII Afghanistan Algeria 4 2 8 m 250V e FC 9820 e PN 39M5123 Andorra Angola Aruba Austria Belgium Benin Brazil Bulgaria Burkina Faso Burundi Cameroon Central African Republic Chad Congo Brazzaville Curacao Czech Republic Democractic Republic of Congo Denmark Egypt Finland France French Guiana Germany Greece Guinea Hungary Iceland Indonesia Iran Ivory Coast Jordan K
406. uced by one volt applied across a resistance of one ohm ANSI American National Standards Institute archive To collect and store files in a designated place ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit coded character set 8 bits including parity check that consists of control characters and graphic characters assigning a device The establishing of the relationship of a device to a running task process job or program assignment The naming of a specific device to perform a function asynchronous Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals attention notice A word for calling attention to the possibility of danger to a program device or system or to data Contrast with caution and danger ATTN Attention backup To make additional copies of documents or software for safekeeping bar code A code representing characters by sets of parallel bars of varying thickness and separation which are read optically by transverse scanning bar code label Paper bearing a bar code and having an adhesive backing The bar code label must be affixed to a tape cartridge to enable the library to identify the cartridge and its volume serial number bar code reader A laser device specialized for scanning and reading bar codes and converting them into either the ASCII or EBCDIC digital character code Beginning
407. ultiple SCSI adapter cards on one server Remember that each SCSI bus must be terminated Multiple SCSI buses may be required for maximum performance depending on the application and data compression ratio Note however that library Medium Changer control is required on at least one SCSI bus The Medium Changer device is required to be addressed via LUN 1 of the lowest numbered drive position of each logical library The Medium Changer device may additionally be addressed via LUN 1 of other drives in any logical library Any bus containing a Medium Changer device via LUN 1 of a drive is referred to as a control and data path Any other bus is referred to_as a data path For information about control paths see Using Multiple Control Paths on page 3 2 Terminating the Bus The SCSI bus and all of the wires in the SCSI cable must be properly terminated according to the SCSI standard You can plug an external terminator into one of the SCSI connectors A terminator must be installed on the last device on each end of a string of multiple devices A terminator is included with each SCSI Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Connectors and Adapters The library is supported by a wide variety of servers hosts operating systems and adapters These attachments can change throughout the product s life cycle To determine the latest supported attachments visit the web ao S ner ba ea Or contact your IBM Sales Representative SCSI Differential
408. umber Name TAPMLB19 3580 001 00 1004538 Log ID 2 ss es 3 09020145 Sequence 211510 Date rarer rset a sereseO4 21 05 Time creates eases 10 40 11 Reference code 9350 Secondary code 00000000 Mable TDs acest cere 63A00001 IPL source state B 3 Class e es crags ees o gt S Permanent System ref code 63A09350 Tape unit detected a read or write error on tape medium Physical location Frame ID 32 Card position cs 3 Device position Logical address PCI bus Library SyStemibUSeee ne ses teams s Obs Ucadapteroqie eos a eee sie Systemihoatdirenre eet OL S stance a elt System card 32 Library 20 Controller ee o s aa e A DISC ce eee on oe T SENSE DATA FOLLOWS DATA OFFSETO0123456789ABCDEF 00000000 71000300 00000901C 00000000 53000600 00000010 31190601 00020000 00000000 00000000 00000020 00000301 00000000 0000 C5D3FOF5 00000188 00E00180 8983EBC2 4B9D8001 00033A36 20E00902 01450000 EL05 h C B sssssssssees 00000000 0040 F3F8F2F8 F4F4F6F3 C1F00002 00240000 00200000 00050001 00140004 00000002 38284463A0 00000000 0060 00000000 09900000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40400000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0080 00000000 09900000 00000000 90080000 OOOOOOOO 00900000 90000000 OOOOE3CI 00000000 OOAO D7D4D3C2 F1F94040 00000000 00000000 B9009000 09000000 40404040 40404040 PMLB19 00000000 OOCO 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040
409. up Operator and Service Guide Network Protocol Stack IPv4 only Host Name LIB1006DD Domain Name DNS Primary 0 0 0 0 DNS Secondary 0 0 0 0 Enable SSL For Web EJ Ethernet Settings Auto x IPv4 Enable DHCP E On Static Address 9 11 219 139 y oath 255 255 255 0 Gateway address 9 11 219 1 IPv6 Enable DHCP Enable Stateless Auto Config Static Address Prefix length Gateway address SNMP Enabled El Target 1 IP Address Version IPv4 address or Host name and domain Target 2 IP Address Version lersion IPv4 address or Host name and domain Target 3 IP Address Versi ersion IPv4 address or Host name and domain Community Name Security User Name initial You will be required to login again if changes are made except of changing snmp settings If you change the IP address of the library then you r will need to use the new IP address when you attempt to access the library again a77ug074 Figure 4 28 Configure Library Network Page 2 Select a Protocol Stack Choose IPv4 only IPv6 only or Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 you must be prepared to enter both IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses The sections below will gray out depending on the choices made here Note When changes are made the following Warning message will appear when the Submit button is clicked Warning Changes Will Take Effect After A Reboot a77ug171 Figure 4 29 Warning S
410. uring shipping and associated label storage label are stored on the rear panel of the library for future use See Removing and location Note j The shipping lock must P a before powering ON the library to allow the accessor to function properly USB port An alternative communication path to the library For use by IBM Service Personnel Serial port This port is used to communicate serially with the library using an RJ 11 connector For use by IBM Service Personnel Ethernet port This port is used to connect the library to a network Tape drive LED This LED indicates the current status of the drive When the LED is green it indicates normal drive activity o oc A a Machine type The machine type model number and serial number of the library are located on Model number and this pull out label This serial number is the number that links the library to your Serial Number warranty pull out label Fan vents These vents allow air to escape from the power supply and tape drive sled rd Wed ot KJ ESD label The Electrostatic Discharge label is a reminder that some of the components of this em are susceptible to electrostatic discharge See Electrostatic Discharge on Bar Code Reader The bar code reader is an integral part of the library accessor The bar code reader provides inventory feedback to the host application Operator Control Panel display and Web User Interface by readi
411. user to be listed on the Role listbox i e prohibits Superuser login Check the Disable User checkbox if you do not want User to be listed on the Role listbox i e prohibits User login Uncheck the checkbox es to allow Superuser or User login New Password The password must be a maximum of ten characters Repeat Password Enter the New Password again Support name The name of the individual within your company to contact for Web User Interface or library support 5 50 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Note Only one support person can be configured for the entire tape library The support person may or may not be one of the user superuser or admin account holders Support phone The phone number of the individual within your company to contact for Web User Interface or library support Support email The email address of the individual within your company to contact for Web User Interface or library support Configure Library Date amp Time This page allows the user to set the time and date and how it will be displayed Date amp Time Time 24H fiz fa len Date Month K TE Day 11 Year 2006 a77ug061 Refresh Submit Figure 5 44 The Configure Library Date amp Time page Time 24H Using a 24 hour format enter the current hour minutes and seconds Date Enter the current month day and year Configure Library Logs amp Traces This
412. ve disabled Check your configuration settings 43 SCSI I O Station disabled 44 SCSI flash image does not fit bootcode 45 SCSI media removal prevented by drive Refer to your host application documentation for problem 46 SCSI media removal prevented by determination information library 47 SCSI flash image does not fit personality Check the version of firmware used for the upgrade 48 SCSI drive type not supported in this Check whether a version of firmware is available which library supports this drive type For a list of supported drives refer Ultrium Tape Drives on page 1 7 49 SCSI incompatible magazine magazine Check your configuration settings not accessible 4A SCSI source not ready Complete move process and retry operation 4B SCSI destination source not ready 4C SCSI library controller busy Complete process and retry operation 4D SCSI cannot make reservation Refer to your host application documentation for problem 4E SCSI invalid slave robotic controller determination information request 4F SCSI robotic axes motors aren t Check robotics status Refer to Isolating a Librar initialized Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page 50 SCSI cartridge belongs to another Refer to your host application documentation for problem partition determination information 8 10 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 8 3 Warning Events continued
413. ventory Configure Menu The Configure Menu is used during the initial setup of your library and when changes need to be made to your library s configuration This menu contains the following items e Logical Libraries e Library Settings e Drive e Network 5 18 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide e Set Access PIN e Set Date and Time e Path Failover e Restore Defaults Configure Logical Libraries Use this menu item to select the number of logical libraries Logical Libraries Number of Logical Libraries N wo p s a77ug116 Figure 5 13 Configure Logical Libraries menu Note This menu is only available on libraries with multiple drives Note Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives being swapped with different form factors i e HH to FH or FH to HH a library configuration change is needed Reconfiguring the library by reassigning the amount of logical libraries will clear this issue Chapter 5 Operations 5 19 Configure Library If 1 Logical If 2 or more Library Logical Libraries i i Library Logical Settings Lib Settings Mode General t 1 2 3 4 Random S
414. ver air does not flow from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library replace the power supply refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 11 If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library Operator Control Panel and front panel LED s may be functioning and air is flowing from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library observe the Green LED lowest of the three If it is lit the power supply is OK Note If your library has 04 level redundant power supplies see label on top of power supply it is normal for the one in Standby mode to turn its Green LED off You can test this power supply by pulling the power connector from the other Active power supply The power supply that was in Standby mode will now become Active and its Green LED should light If it doesn t replace it refer to Replacing a Power Supply fon page 10 1 n page 10 11 If your library has 05 level redundant power supplies the Green LED will be ON on both power supplies If both Green LEDs are not ON replace the failed power supply refer to Replacing a Power Supply on age 10 1 age 10 11 If the Green LED is not lit and it is the only one in the Library replace it refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 11 Isolating Drive Sled Problems Prior to replacing a drive sled CRU verify that the followi
415. vices utilizing LTO technology 1 indicates that it is the first generation of its type mega One million of meter In the Metric System the basic unit of length equal to approximately 39 37 inches MIB file Management Information Block micro One millionth of microcode 1 One or more micro instructions 2 A code representing the instructions of an instruction set implemented in a part of storage that is not program addressable 3 To design write and test one or more micro instructions 4 See also microprogram microdiagnostic routine A program that runs under the control of a supervisor usually to identify field replaceable units microdiagnostic utility A program that is run by the customer engineer to test the machine J 6 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide microinstruction A basic or elementary machine instruction microprogram A group of microinstructions that when executed performs a preplanned function The term microprogram represents a dynamic arrangement or selection of one or more groups of microinstructions for execution to perform a particular function The term microcode represents microinstructions used in a product as an alternative to hard wired circuitry to implement certain functions of a processor or other system component MIM Media information message mm Millimeter modifier That which changes the meaning mount a device To assi
416. vigation pane Date amp Time Time 24H fiz ERIE Date Month P TE Day fit Year 2006 Refresh Submit a77ug061 Figure 4 31 The Configure Library Date and Time screen 2 Enter the current Time using the HH MM SS 24 hour format 3 Enter the current Date using the MMDDYYYY format 4 Click one of the following e Refresh to update the current screen e Submit to apply changes made to the current screen Configuring Logs and Traces using the Web User Interface This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel 1 Click Logs amp Traces in the left navigation pane 4 30 TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Logs amp Traces Error Log Mode Trace Level Trace Filter Continuous O Stop Trace At First Error Stopped Cmd Response Event Trace Data Low Level Recovered Trace Error Hard Error Main Drive CDB Interpreter Robotic Trace OCP Input OCP SCSI Module SDCI Module Output a77ug071 Figure 4 32 The Configure Library Logs and Traces screen 2 4 For Error Log Mode select Continuous so all information for logs and traces will be captured Leave all options under Trace Level and Trace Filters selected These options can be changed by Service personnel only Click Submit to apply any changes Entering Event Notification Information using the Web User Interface This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel Use
417. vity to the Host Bus Adapter HBA 1 If not already performed exercise the drive interface wrap test on the Operator Control Panel Service gt Service gt Drive Tests The test will require that a proper Wrap Tool be installed at some point during the test procedure If the wrap test fails replace the drive sled refer to flape Drive Sled on page 10 3 and skip steps 2 and 3 Proceed to step 2 if the wrap test passes Note If a SCSI wrap test fails run the test one more time with a different SCSI terminator prior to replacing the drive sled Use the utility ITDT to evaluate connectivity from the HBA through the cabling to the drive or drives ITDT does not require separate device drivers thus the Operating System has the ability to scan and find all the LTO devices that are attached If ITDT cannot successfully locate the LTO drive suspect Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 13 for a brief description of ITDT and instructions on how to download the tool from the web If ITDT successfully locates the LTO device s verify that the correct application device drivers and backup application software is properly installed cabling or HBA problems and skip step 3 If ITDT successfully located the LTO drive roceed to step 3 See IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool ITDT Ensure that all the required or latest available Operating System files and or updates dll s PTF s etc have been installed and applie
418. w drive sled inspect all connectors on the drive sled Ensure that the connectors are intact free of any foreign objects and have no cracks deformed or bent contacts Extend the black pull out tab E in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 located underneath the library near the lower right corner of the drive sled Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot and align the connectors on the library while supporting the bottom of the drive sled see Figure 10 8 lon page 10 7 Ensure that the black tab remains extended J in Figure 10 6 Important Push in on the drive sled handle QJ in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 while supporting the bottom of the drive sled until it is properly seated Damage to the connector pins may occur if this procedure is not followed Push the drive sled slowly into the drive slot until the sled seats itself against the back of the library 10 6 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide a77ug028 Figure 10 8 Pushing the drive sled into the library drive sled without ESD springs shown 5 Tighten the captive thumbscrews J in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 until the drive sled is secure 6 If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs see Figure 10 4 on page Figure 10 9 on page 10 8 3 apply conductive tape to the sled as shown in Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 7 2U Library 4U Library
419. way from the cartridge Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges Before you use a tape cartridge acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive the time will vary depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was exposed Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 17 The best storage container for the cartridges until they are opened is the original shipping container The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the cartridges and partially protects them from humidity changes When you ship a cartridge place it in its jewel case or in a sealed moisture proof bag to protect it from moisture contaminants and physical damage Ship the cartridge in a shipping container that has enough packing material to cushion the cartridge and prevent it from moving within the container Table 6 5 gives the environment for operating storing and shipping LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridges Table 6 5 Environment for operating storing and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge Environmental Specifications Environmental Factor Operating Operational Storage Archival Storage Shipping 10 to 45 C 50 to o 7 R 5 23 to 49 C 9 to Temperature 113 F 16 to 32 C 61 to 90 F 16 to 25 C 61 to 77 F 120 F eed 10 to 80 20 to 80 20 to 50 5 to 80 non condensing Me eels 26 C 79 F 26 C 79 F 26
420. y Path Diagnostics 5 56 keyboard H 1 L Labels bar code 6 5 guidelines for using 6 6 ordering 6 20 LED amber 7 14 LEDs 2 2 7 8 LEDs front panel 1 1 library configuration form G 1 Library Controller Board A 1 library firmware current level 5 31 library logs 5 54 library mode 4 20 5 20 5 31 5 41 library name 5 41 library network configuration 4 26 5 47 library recovery 7 8 library status 5 34 Library Verify 5 28 library weight 1 9 license activation key 4 22 4 23 5 27 Link local IPv6 address 5 11 LME 5 43 locating the library 4 1 logical libraries 4 21 5 19 5 42 determining number 3 1 basic guidelines 3 1 using multiple for sharing 3 2 logical libraries assigning 4 21 logs 5 54 low voltage differential LVD SCSI interface 1 7 low power mode 1 9 LUN 3 7 LUN scanning 3 7 LVD SCSI interface 1 7 X 2 153100 Tape Library and T 3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide M MAC Address 1 5 magazines 1 1 4 35 A 1 Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 1 5 media 1 9 Media 6 1 media capacity 1 1 menu shortcuts 5 1 menu tree Operator Control Panel 5 10 Menus Configure network settings 4 17 MIB 1 6 C 1 Monitor menu Drive 5 13 Library 5 11 Move Media 4 38 5 17 5 39 Multiple control paths 3 2 N Navigation 5 8 Netmask 4 17 Network Address Translation NAT 1 5 network configuration 5 24 Network Mask 4 26 5 24 5 47 network settings 5 24 O OCP 4 33 ON OFF power button 2 4 operating
421. your encryption configuration is correct Important Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before running the Key Path Diagnostic Library firmware level must be greater than 6 xx See Verifying For information on running the diagnostic refer to Service Library Perform Key Path Diagnostics on page 5 56 Restoring Factory Default Settings using the Web User Interface If you would like to erase_your current configuration and restore factory default settings see Table 5 3 in Configure Restore Defaults on page 5 25 do so by selecting Restore Defaults in the Configure Library menu This function is also available on the Operator Control Panel If you do not have the capability of accessing your library using the Web User Interface write down all library configuration settings on the Appendix G Library Configuration for future reference Logging out of the Web User Interface It is important to log out of the Web User Interface before using the Operator Control panel To log out of the Web User Interface click Logout in the upper right corner of the current screen Important If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser window you will not log out of the Web User Interface Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN using the Operator Control Panel 1 Navigate to Configure gt Set Access PIN Press the SELECT button to highlight the first digit o
422. zine To release the magazines using the Web User Interface navigate to Manage Library gt Release Magazines Cartridge will not eject from drive 1 Power cycle the library allow it to complete initialization which can take up to 1 hour depending on the type of cartridge LTO 4 LTO 3 etc and how much of the tape has been spooled out of the cartridge Retry unloading the i i 2 Allow the drive to complete all operations This may take as long as 1 hour if you reset or cycle power on the library while the cartridge is positioned at the physical end of the media 3 Ensure that the backup software is not reserving the slot or preventing the drive from ejecting the cartridge The backup software needs to cancel the reservation and any hold it has on the drive Temporarily disconnecting the library from the host server and power cycling eliminates the host and its software as a problem source 4 If the problem still exists refer to Contacting IBM Technical Support on page Cartridge can not be removed from storage slot idges from Magazine Slots on 7 4 153100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup Operator and Service Guide Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table continued Problem Solution Extended library recovery time i Release both left and right magazines Operator Control Panel Control gt Magazine Web User Interface Manage Library gt Release Magazine and inspe

TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents